Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
101 Innovation Drive
San Jose, CA 95134
www.altera.com
SII5V1-4.5
Copyright © 2011 Altera Corporation. All rights reserved. Altera, The Programmable Solutions Company, the stylized Altera logo, specific device designations, and all other words and logos that are identified as trademarks and/or service marks are, unless noted otherwise, the trademarks and
service marks of Altera Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. All other product or service names are the property of their respective holders. Altera products are protected under numerous U.S. and foreign patents and pending applications, maskwork rights, and copyrights. Altera warrants
performance of its semiconductor products to current specifications in accordance with Altera's standard warranty, but reserves the right to make
changes to any products and services at any time without notice. Altera assumes no responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any information, product, or service described herein except as
expressly agreed to in writing by Altera Corporation. Altera customers are advised to obtain the latest version of device specifications before relying on any published information and before placing orders for
products or services.
ii
Altera Corporation
Contents
Chapter Revision Dates .......................................................................... vii
About this Handbook ................................................................................ i
How to Contact Altera ............................................................................................................................... i
Typographic Conventions ......................................................................................................................... i
Section I. Stratix II Device Family Data Sheet
Revision History ....................................................................................................................... Section I–1
Chapter 1. Introduction
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 1–1
Features ................................................................................................................................................... 1–1
Document Revision History ................................................................................................................. 1–6
Chapter 2. Stratix II Architecture
Functional Description .......................................................................................................................... 2–1
Logic Array Blocks ................................................................................................................................ 2–3
LAB Interconnects ............................................................................................................................ 2–4
LAB Control Signals ......................................................................................................................... 2–5
Adaptive Logic Modules ...................................................................................................................... 2–6
ALM Operating Modes ................................................................................................................... 2–9
Register Chain ................................................................................................................................. 2–20
Clear & Preset Logic Control ........................................................................................................ 2–22
MultiTrack Interconnect ..................................................................................................................... 2–22
TriMatrix Memory ............................................................................................................................... 2–28
Memory Block Size ......................................................................................................................... 2–29
Digital Signal Processing Block ......................................................................................................... 2–40
Modes of Operation ....................................................................................................................... 2–44
DSP Block Interface ........................................................................................................................ 2–44
PLLs & Clock Networks ..................................................................................................................... 2–48
Global & Hierarchical Clocking ................................................................................................... 2–48
Enhanced & Fast PLLs ................................................................................................................... 2–57
Enhanced PLLs ............................................................................................................................... 2–68
Fast PLLs .......................................................................................................................................... 2–69
I/O Structure ........................................................................................................................................ 2–69
Double Data Rate I/O Pins ........................................................................................................... 2–77
External RAM Interfacing ............................................................................................................. 2–81
Programmable Drive Strength ..................................................................................................... 2–83
Altera Corporation
iii
Contents
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Open-Drain Output ........................................................................................................................ 2–84
Bus Hold .......................................................................................................................................... 2–84
Programmable Pull-Up Resistor .................................................................................................. 2–85
Advanced I/O Standard Support ................................................................................................ 2–85
On-Chip Termination .................................................................................................................... 2–89
MultiVolt I/O Interface ................................................................................................................. 2–93
High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA Support ............................................................................ 2–96
Dedicated Circuitry with DPA Support .................................................................................... 2–100
Fast PLL & Channel Layout ........................................................................................................ 2–102
Document Revision History ............................................................................................................. 2–104
Chapter 3. Configuration & Testing
IEEE Std. 1149.1 JTAG Boundary-Scan Support ............................................................................... 3–1
SignalTap II Embedded Logic Analyzer ............................................................................................ 3–4
Configuration ......................................................................................................................................... 3–4
Operating Modes .............................................................................................................................. 3–5
Configuration Schemes ................................................................................................................... 3–7
Configuring Stratix II FPGAs with JRunner ............................................................................... 3–10
Programming Serial Configuration Devices with SRunner ..................................................... 3–10
Configuring Stratix II FPGAs with the MicroBlaster Driver ................................................... 3–11
PLL Reconfiguration ...................................................................................................................... 3–11
Temperature Sensing Diode (TSD) ................................................................................................... 3–11
Automated Single Event Upset (SEU) Detection ............................................................................ 3–13
Custom-Built Circuitry .................................................................................................................. 3–14
Software Interface ........................................................................................................................... 3–14
Document Revision History ............................................................................................................... 3–14
Chapter 4. Hot Socketing & Power-On Reset
Stratix II
Hot-Socketing Specifications ...............................................................................................................
Devices Can Be Driven Before Power-Up ....................................................................................
I/O Pins Remain Tri-Stated During Power-Up ...........................................................................
Signal Pins Do Not Drive the VCCIO, VCCINT or VCCPD Power Supplies ....................................
Hot Socketing Feature Implementation in Stratix II Devices ..........................................................
Power-On Reset Circuitry ....................................................................................................................
Document Revision History .................................................................................................................
4–1
4–2
4–2
4–2
4–3
4–5
4–6
Chapter 5. DC & Switching Characteristics
Operating Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 5–1
Absolute Maximum Ratings ........................................................................................................... 5–1
Recommended Operating Conditions .......................................................................................... 5–2
DC Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 5–3
I/O Standard Specifications ........................................................................................................... 5–4
Bus Hold Specifications ................................................................................................................. 5–17
On-Chip Termination Specifications ........................................................................................... 5–17
Pin Capacitance .............................................................................................................................. 5–19
Power Consumption ........................................................................................................................... 5–20
iv
Altera Corporation
Contents
Contents
Timing Model ....................................................................................................................................... 5–20
Preliminary & Final Timing .......................................................................................................... 5–20
I/O Timing Measurement Methodology .................................................................................... 5–21
Performance .................................................................................................................................... 5–27
Internal Timing Parameters .......................................................................................................... 5–34
Stratix II Clock Timing Parameters .............................................................................................. 5–41
Clock Network Skew Adders ....................................................................................................... 5–50
IOE Programmable Delay ............................................................................................................. 5–51
Default Capacitive Loading of Different I/O Standards .......................................................... 5–52
I/O Delays ....................................................................................................................................... 5–54
Maximum Input & Output Clock Toggle Rate .......................................................................... 5–66
Duty Cycle Distortion ......................................................................................................................... 5–77
DCD Measurement Techniques ................................................................................................... 5–78
High-Speed I/O Specifications .......................................................................................................... 5–87
PLL Timing Specifications .................................................................................................................. 5–91
External Memory Interface Specifications ....................................................................................... 5–94
JTAG Timing Specifications ............................................................................................................... 5–96
Document Revision History ............................................................................................................... 5–97
Chapter 6. Reference & Ordering Information
Software ..................................................................................................................................................
Device Pin-Outs .....................................................................................................................................
Ordering Information ...........................................................................................................................
Document Revision History .................................................................................................................
Altera Corporation
6–1
6–1
6–1
6–2
v
Contents
vi
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
Chapter Revision Dates
The chapters in this book, Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1, were revised on the following dates.
Where chapters or groups of chapters are available separately, part numbers are listed.
Chapter 1. Introduction
Revised:
Part number:
May 2007
SII51001-4.2
Chapter 2. Stratix II Architecture
Revised:
May 2007
Part number: SII51002-4.3
Chapter 3. Configuration & Testing
Revised:
May 2007
Part number: SII51003-4.2
Chapter 4. Hot Socketing & Power-On Reset
Revised:
May 2007
Part number: SII51004-3.2
Chapter 5. DC & Switching Characteristics
Revised:
April 2011
Part number: SII51005-4.5
Chapter 6. Reference & Ordering Information
Revised:
April 2011
Part number: SII51006-2.2
Altera Corporation
vii
Chapter Revision Dates
viii
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
About this Handbook
This handbook provides comprehensive information about the Altera®
Stratix® II family of devices.
How to Contact
Altera
For the most up-to-date information about Altera products, refer to the
following table.
Contact (1)
Contact
Method
Address
Technical support
Website
www.altera.com/support
Technical training
Website
www.altera.com/training
Email
custrain@altera.com
Product literature
Email
www.altera.com/literature
Altera literature services
Website
literature@altera.com
Non-technical support (General) Email
(Software Licensing)
Email
nacomp@altera.com
authorization@altera.com
Note to table:
(1)
Typographic
Conventions
Visual Cue
You can also contact your local Altera sales office or sales representative.
This document uses the typographic conventions shown below.
Meaning
Bold Type with Initial
Capital Letters
Command names, dialog box titles, checkbox options, and dialog box options are
shown in bold, initial capital letters. Example: Save As dialog box.
bold type
External timing parameters, directory names, project names, disk drive names,
filenames, filename extensions, and software utility names are shown in bold
type. Examples: fMAX, \qdesigns directory, d: drive, chiptrip.gdf file.
Italic Type with Initial Capital
Letters
Document titles are shown in italic type with initial capital letters. Example: AN 75:
High-Speed Board Design.
Altera Corporation
i
Preliminary
Typographic Conventions
Visual Cue
Italic type
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Meaning
Internal timing parameters and variables are shown in italic type.
Examples: tPIA, n + 1.
Variable names are enclosed in angle brackets (< >) and shown in italic type.
Example: , .pof file.
Initial Capital Letters
Keyboard keys and menu names are shown with initial capital letters. Examples:
Delete key, the Options menu.
“Subheading Title”
References to sections within a document and titles of on-line help topics are
shown in quotation marks. Example: “Typographic Conventions.”
Courier type
Signal and port names are shown in lowercase Courier type. Examples: data1,
tdi, input. Active-low signals are denoted by suffix n, e.g., resetn.
Anything that must be typed exactly as it appears is shown in Courier type. For
example: c:\qdesigns\tutorial\chiptrip.gdf. Also, sections of an
actual file, such as a Report File, references to parts of files (e.g., the AHDL
keyword SUBDESIGN), as well as logic function names (e.g., TRI) are shown in
Courier.
1., 2., 3., and
a., b., c., etc.
Numbered steps are used in a list of items when the sequence of the items is
important, such as the steps listed in a procedure.
■
Bullets are used in a list of items when the sequence of the items is not important.
●
•
v
The checkmark indicates a procedure that consists of one step only.
1
The hand points to information that requires special attention.
c
The caution indicates required information that needs special consideration and
understanding and should be read prior to starting or continuing with the
procedure or process.
w
The warning indicates information that should be read prior to starting or
continuing the procedure or processes
r
The angled arrow indicates you should press the Enter key.
f
The feet direct you to more information on a particular topic.
ii
Preliminary
Altera Corporation
Section I. Stratix II Device
Family Data Sheet
This section provides the data sheet specifications for Stratix® II devices.
This section contains feature definitions of the internal architecture,
configuration and JTAG boundary-scan testing information, DC
operating conditions, AC timing parameters, a reference to power
consumption, and ordering information for Stratix II devices.
This section contains the following chapters:
Revision History
Altera Corporation
■
Chapter 1, Introduction
■
Chapter 2, Stratix II Architecture
■
Chapter 3, Configuration & Testing
■
Chapter 4, Hot Socketing & Power-On Reset
■
Chapter 5, DC & Switching Characteristics
■
Chapter 6, Reference & Ordering Information
Refer to each chapter for its own specific revision history. For information
on when each chapter was updated, refer to the Chapter Revision Dates
section, which appears in the full handbook.
Section I–1
Stratix II Device Family Data Sheet
Section I–2
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
1. Introduction
SII51001-4.2
Introduction
The Stratix® II FPGA family is based on a 1.2-V, 90-nm, all-layer copper
SRAM process and features a new logic structure that maximizes
performance, and enables device densities approaching 180,000
equivalent logic elements (LEs). Stratix II devices offer up to 9 Mbits of
on-chip, TriMatrix™ memory for demanding, memory intensive
applications and has up to 96 DSP blocks with up to 384 (18-bit × 18-bit)
multipliers for efficient implementation of high performance filters and
other DSP functions. Various high-speed external memory interfaces are
supported, including double data rate (DDR) SDRAM and DDR2
SDRAM, RLDRAM II, quad data rate (QDR) II SRAM, and single data
rate (SDR) SDRAM. Stratix II devices support various I/O standards
along with support for 1-gigabit per second (Gbps) source synchronous
signaling with DPA circuitry. Stratix II devices offer a complete clock
management solution with internal clock frequency of up to 550 MHz
and up to 12 phase-locked loops (PLLs). Stratix II devices are also the
industry’s first FPGAs with the ability to decrypt a configuration
bitstream using the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) algorithm to
protect designs.
Features
The Stratix II family offers the following features:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Altera Corporation
May 2007
15,600 to 179,400 equivalent LEs; see Table 1–1
New and innovative adaptive logic module (ALM), the basic
building block of the Stratix II architecture, maximizes performance
and resource usage efficiency
Up to 9,383,040 RAM bits (1,172,880 bytes) available without
reducing logic resources
TriMatrix memory consisting of three RAM block sizes to implement
true dual-port memory and first-in first-out (FIFO) buffers
High-speed DSP blocks provide dedicated implementation of
multipliers (at up to 450 MHz), multiply-accumulate functions, and
finite impulse response (FIR) filters
Up to 16 global clocks with 24 clocking resources per device region
Clock control blocks support dynamic clock network enable/disable,
which allows clock networks to power down to reduce power
consumption in user mode
Up to 12 PLLs (four enhanced PLLs and eight fast PLLs) per device
provide spread spectrum, programmable bandwidth, clock switchover, real-time PLL reconfiguration, and advanced multiplication
and phase shifting
1–1
Features
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Support for numerous single-ended and differential I/O standards
High-speed differential I/O support with DPA circuitry for 1-Gbps
performance
Support for high-speed networking and communications bus
standards including Parallel RapidIO, SPI-4 Phase 2 (POS-PHY
Level 4), HyperTransport™ technology, and SFI-4
Support for high-speed external memory, including DDR and DDR2
SDRAM, RLDRAM II, QDR II SRAM, and SDR SDRAM
Support for multiple intellectual property megafunctions from
Altera MegaCore® functions and Altera Megafunction Partners
Program (AMPPSM) megafunctions
Support for design security using configuration bitstream
encryption
Support for remote configuration updates
Table 1–1. Stratix II FPGA Family Features
Feature
EP2S15
EP2S30
EP2S60
EP2S90
EP2S130
EP2S180
ALMs
6,240
13,552
24,176
36,384
53,016
71,760
Adaptive look-up tables (ALUTs) (1)
12,480
27,104
48,352
72,768
106,032
143,520
Equivalent LEs (2)
15,600
33,880
60,440
90,960
132,540
179,400
M512 RAM blocks
104
202
329
488
699
930
M4K RAM blocks
78
144
255
408
609
768
M-RAM blocks
0
1
2
4
6
9
Total RAM bits
419,328
1,369,728
2,544,192
4,520,488
6,747,840
9,383,040
DSP blocks
12
16
36
48
63
96
18-bit × 18-bit multipliers (3)
48
64
144
192
252
384
Enhanced PLLs
2
2
4
4
4
4
Fast PLLs
Maximum user I/O pins
4
4
8
8
8
8
366
500
718
902
1,126
1,170
Notes to Table 1–1:
(1)
(2)
(3)
One ALM contains two ALUTs. The ALUT is the cell used in the Quartus® II software for logic synthesis.
This is the equivalent number of LEs in a Stratix device (four-input LUT-based architecture).
These multipliers are implemented using the DSP blocks.
1–2
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Introduction
Stratix II devices are available in space-saving FineLine BGA® packages
(see Tables 1–2 and 1–3).
Table 1–2. Stratix II Package Options & I/O Pin Counts
Device
484-Pin
FineLine BGA
484-Pin
Hybrid
FineLine
BGA
672-Pin
FineLine
BGA
EP2S15
342
366
EP2S30
342
500
EP2S60 (3)
334
EP2S90 (3)
Notes (1), (2)
780-Pin
FineLine
BGA
492
308
EP2S130 (3)
1,020-Pin
FineLine BGA
1,508-Pin
FineLine BGA
718
534
758
902
534
742
1,126
742
1,170
EP2S180 (3)
Notes to Table 1–2:
(1)
(2)
(3)
All I/O pin counts include eight dedicated clock input pins (clk1p, clk1n, clk3p, clk3n, clk9p, clk9n,
clk11p, and clk11n) that can be used for data inputs.
The Quartus II software I/O pin counts include one additional pin, PLL_ENA, which is not available as generalpurpose I/O pins. The PLL_ENA pin can only be used to enable the PLLs within the device.
The I/O pin counts for the EP2S60, EP2S90, EP2S130, and EP2S180 devices in the 1020-pin and 1508-pin packages
include eight dedicated fast PLL clock inputs (FPLL7CLKp/n, FPLL8CLKp/n, FPLL9CLKp/n, and
FPLL10CLKp/n) that can be used for data inputs.
Table 1–3. Stratix II FineLine BGA Package Sizes
Dimension
Pitch (mm)
Area (mm2)
Length × width
(mm × mm)
484 Pin
484-Pin
Hybrid
672 Pin
780 Pin
1,020 Pin
1,508 Pin
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
529
729
729
841
1,089
1,600
23 × 23
27 × 27
27 × 27
29 × 29
33 × 33
40 × 40
All Stratix II devices support vertical migration within the same package
(for example, you can migrate between the EP2S15, EP2S30, and EP2S60
devices in the 672-pin FineLine BGA package). Vertical migration means
that you can migrate to devices whose dedicated pins, configuration pins,
and power pins are the same for a given package across device densities.
To ensure that a board layout supports migratable densities within one
package offering, enable the applicable vertical migration path within the
Quartus II software (Assignments menu > Device > Migration Devices).
Altera Corporation
May 2007
1–3
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Features
After compilation, check the information messages for a full list of I/O,
DQ, LVDS, and other pins that are not available because of the selected
migration path.
Table 1–4 lists the Stratix II device package offerings and shows the total
number of non-migratable user I/O pins when migrating from one
density device to a larger density device. Additional I/O pins may not be
migratable if migrating from the larger device to the smaller density
device.
1
When moving from one density to a larger density, the larger
density device may have fewer user I/O pins. The larger device
requires more power and ground pins to support the additional
logic within the device. Use the Quartus II Pin Planner to
determine which user I/O pins are migratable between the two
devices.
Table 1–4. Total Number of Non-Migratable I/O Pins for Stratix II Vertical Migration Paths
Vertical Migration
Path
484-Pin
FineLine BGA
672-Pin
FineLine BGA
EP2S15 to EP2S30
0 (1)
0
EP2S15 to EP2S60
8 (1)
0
EP2S30 to EP2S60
8 (1)
8
780-Pin
FineLine BGA
1020-Pin
FineLine BGA
EP2S60 to EP2S90
0
EP2S60 to EP2S130
0
EP2S60 to EP2S180
0
0 (1)
EP2S90 to EP2S130
1508-Pin
FineLine BGA
16
17
EP2S90 to EP2S180
16
0
EP2S130 to EP2S180
0
0
Note to Table 1–4:
(1)
Some of the DQ/DQS pins are not migratable. Refer to the Quartus II software information messages for more
detailed information.
1
f
To determine if your user I/O assignments are correct, run the
I/O Assignment Analysis command in the Quartus II software
(Processing > Start > Start I/O Assignment Analysis).
Refer to the I/O Management chapter in volume 2 of the Quartus II
Handbook for more information on pin migration.
1–4
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Introduction
Stratix II devices are available in up to three speed grades, -3, -4, and -5,
with -3 being the fastest. Table 1–5 shows Stratix II device speed-grade
offerings.
Table 1–5. Stratix II Device Speed Grades
484-Pin
Hybrid
FineLine
BGA
Device
Temperature
Grade
484-Pin
FineLine
BGA
EP2S15
Commercial
-3, -4, -5
Industrial
-4
-4
EP2S30
Commercial
-3, -4, -5
-3, -4, -5
Industrial
-4
-4
EP2S60
Commercial
-3, -4, -5
-3, -4, -5
Industrial
-4
EP2S90
Commercial
EP2S130
Commercial
Industrial
-4
-4
EP2S180
Commercial
-3, -4, -5
-3, -4, -5
Industrial
-4
-4
672-Pin
FineLine
BGA
780-Pin
FineLine
BGA
1,508-Pin
FineLine
BGA
-3, -4, -5
-3, -4, -5
-4
-4, -5
-4
-4, -5
-3, -4, -5
-4
-4
-4, -5
-3, -4, -5
-3, -4, -5
Industrial
Altera Corporation
May 2007
1,020-Pin
FineLine
BGA
-3, -4, -5
1–5
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Document Revision History
Document
Revision History
Table 1–6 shows the revision history for this chapter.
Table 1–6. Document Revision History
Date and
Document
Version
Changes Made
May 2007, v4.2
Moved Document Revision History to the end of the
chapter.
April 2006, v4.1
●
●
●
December 2005,
v4.0
●
July 2005, v3.1
●
●
●
May 2005, v3.0
●
●
Summary of Changes
—
Updated “Features” section.
Removed Note 4 from Table 1–2.
Updated Table 1–4.
—
Updated Tables 1–2, 1–4, and 1–5.
Updated Figure 2–43.
—
Added vertical migration information, including
Table 1–4.
Updated Table 1–5.
—
Updated “Features” section.
Updated Table 1–2.
—
March 2005,
v2.1
Updated “Introduction” and “Features” sections.
—
January 2005,
v2.0
Added note to Table 1–2.
—
October 2004,
v1.2
Updated Tables 1–2, 1–3, and 1–5.
—
July 2004, v1.1
●
Updated Tables 1–1 and 1–2.
Updated “Features” section.
—
●
February 2004,
v1.0
Added document to the Stratix II Device Handbook.
1–6
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
—
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2. Stratix II Architecture
SII51002-4.3
Functional
Description
Stratix® II devices contain a two-dimensional row- and column-based
architecture to implement custom logic. A series of column and row
interconnects of varying length and speed provides signal interconnects
between logic array blocks (LABs), memory block structures (M512 RAM,
M4K RAM, and M-RAM blocks), and digital signal processing (DSP)
blocks.
Each LAB consists of eight adaptive logic modules (ALMs). An ALM is
the Stratix II device family’s basic building block of logic providing
efficient implementation of user logic functions. LABs are grouped into
rows and columns across the device.
M512 RAM blocks are simple dual-port memory blocks with 512 bits plus
parity (576 bits). These blocks provide dedicated simple dual-port or
single-port memory up to 18-bits wide at up to 500 MHz. M512 blocks are
grouped into columns across the device in between certain LABs.
M4K RAM blocks are true dual-port memory blocks with 4K bits plus
parity (4,608 bits). These blocks provide dedicated true dual-port, simple
dual-port, or single-port memory up to 36-bits wide at up to 550 MHz.
These blocks are grouped into columns across the device in between
certain LABs.
M-RAM blocks are true dual-port memory blocks with 512K bits plus
parity (589,824 bits). These blocks provide dedicated true dual-port,
simple dual-port, or single-port memory up to 144-bits wide at up to
420 MHz. Several M-RAM blocks are located individually in the device's
logic array.
DSP blocks can implement up to either eight full-precision 9 × 9-bit
multipliers, four full-precision 18 × 18-bit multipliers, or one
full-precision 36 × 36-bit multiplier with add or subtract features. The
DSP blocks support Q1.15 format rounding and saturation in the
multiplier and accumulator stages. These blocks also contain shift
registers for digital signal processing applications, including finite
impulse response (FIR) and infinite impulse response (IIR) filters. DSP
blocks are grouped into columns across the device and operate at up to
450 MHz.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–1
Functional Description
Each Stratix II device I/O pin is fed by an I/O element (IOE) located at
the end of LAB rows and columns around the periphery of the device.
I/O pins support numerous single-ended and differential I/O standards.
Each IOE contains a bidirectional I/O buffer and six registers for
registering input, output, and output-enable signals. When used with
dedicated clocks, these registers provide exceptional performance and
interface support with external memory devices such as DDR and DDR2
SDRAM, RLDRAM II, and QDR II SRAM devices. High-speed serial
interface channels with dynamic phase alignment (DPA) support data
transfer at up to 1 Gbps using LVDS or HyperTransportTM technology I/O
standards.
Figure 2–1 shows an overview of the Stratix II device.
Figure 2–1. Stratix II Block Diagram
M4K RAM Blocks
DSP Blocks for
for True Dual-Port
Multiplication and Full
Memory & Other Embedded
Implementation of FIR Filters Memory Functions
M512 RAM Blocks for
Dual-Port Memory, Shift
Registers, & FIFO Buffers
IOEs Support DDR, PCI, PCI-X,
SSTL-3, SSTL-2, HSTL-1, HSTL-2,
LVDS, HyperTransport & other
I/O Standards
IOEs
IOEs
IOEs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
IOEs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
LABs
M-RAM Block
DSP
Block
2–2
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
The number of M512 RAM, M4K RAM, and DSP blocks varies by device
along with row and column numbers and M-RAM blocks. Table 2–1 lists
the resources available in Stratix II devices.
Table 2–1. Stratix II Device Resources
Device
M512 RAM
Columns/Blocks
M4K RAM
Columns/Blocks
M-RAM
Blocks
DSP Block
Columns/Blocks
LAB
Columns
LAB Rows
EP2S15
4 / 104
3 / 78
0
2 / 12
30
26
EP2S30
6 / 202
4 / 144
1
2 / 16
49
36
EP2S60
7 / 329
5 / 255
2
3 / 36
62
51
EP2S90
8 / 488
6 / 408
4
3 / 48
71
68
EP2S130
9 / 699
7 / 609
6
3 / 63
81
87
EP2S180
11 / 930
8 / 768
9
4 / 96
100
96
Logic Array
Blocks
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Each LAB consists of eight ALMs, carry chains, shared arithmetic chains,
LAB control signals, local interconnect, and register chain connection
lines. The local interconnect transfers signals between ALMs in the same
LAB. Register chain connections transfer the output of an ALM register to
the adjacent ALM register in an LAB. The Quartus® II Compiler places
associated logic in an LAB or adjacent LABs, allowing the use of local,
shared arithmetic chain, and register chain connections for performance
and area efficiency. Figure 2–2 shows the Stratix II LAB structure.
2–3
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Logic Array Blocks
Figure 2–2. Stratix II LAB Structure
Row Interconnects of
Variable Speed & Length
ALMs
Direct link
interconnect from
adjacent block
Direct link
interconnect from
adjacent block
Direct link
interconnect to
adjacent block
Direct link
interconnect to
adjacent block
Local Interconnect
LAB
Local Interconnect is Driven
from Either Side by Columns & LABs,
& from Above by Rows
Column Interconnects of
Variable Speed & Length
LAB Interconnects
The LAB local interconnect can drive ALMs in the same LAB. It is driven
by column and row interconnects and ALM outputs in the same LAB.
Neighboring LABs, M512 RAM blocks, M4K RAM blocks, M-RAM
blocks, or DSP blocks from the left and right can also drive an LAB's local
interconnect through the direct link connection. The direct link
connection feature minimizes the use of row and column interconnects,
providing higher performance and flexibility. Each ALM can drive
24 ALMs through fast local and direct link interconnects. Figure 2–3
shows the direct link connection.
2–4
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–3. Direct Link Connection
Direct link interconnect from
left LAB, TriMatrix memory
block, DSP block, or IOE output
Direct link interconnect from
right LAB, TriMatrix memory
block, DSP block, or IOE output
ALMs
Direct link
interconnect
to right
Direct link
interconnect
to left
Local
Interconnect
LAB Control Signals
Each LAB contains dedicated logic for driving control signals to its ALMs.
The control signals include three clocks, three clock enables, two
asynchronous clears, synchronous clear, asynchronous preset/load, and
synchronous load control signals. This gives a maximum of 11 control
signals at a time. Although synchronous load and clear signals are
generally used when implementing counters, they can also be used with
other functions.
Each LAB can use three clocks and three clock enable signals. However,
there can only be up to two unique clocks per LAB, as shown in the LAB
control signal generation circuit in Figure 2–4. Each LAB's clock and clock
enable signals are linked. For example, any ALM in a particular LAB
using the labclk1 signal also uses labclkena1. If the LAB uses both
the rising and falling edges of a clock, it also uses two LAB-wide clock
signals. De-asserting the clock enable signal turns off the corresponding
LAB-wide clock.
Each LAB can use two asynchronous clear signals and an asynchronous
load/preset signal. By default, the Quartus II software uses a NOT gate
push-back technique to achieve preset. If you disable the NOT gate
push-up option or assign a given register to power up high using the
Quartus II software, the preset is achieved using the asynchronous load
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–5
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Adaptive Logic Modules
signal with asynchronous load data input tied high. When the
asynchronous load/preset signal is used, the labclkena0 signal is no
longer available.
The LAB row clocks [5..0] and LAB local interconnect generate the
LAB-wide control signals. The MultiTrackTM interconnect's inherent low
skew allows clock and control signal distribution in addition to data.
Figure 2–4 shows the LAB control signal generation circuit.
Figure 2–4. LAB-Wide Control Signals
There are two unique
clock signals per LAB.
6
Dedicated Row LAB Clocks
6
6
Local Interconnect
Local Interconnect
Local Interconnect
Local Interconnect
Local Interconnect
Local Interconnect
labclk0
labclk1
labclkena0
or asyncload
or labpreset
Adaptive Logic
Modules
labclk2
labclkena1
labclkena2
labclr1
syncload
labclr0
synclr
The basic building block of logic in the Stratix II architecture, the adaptive
logic module (ALM), provides advanced features with efficient logic
utilization. Each ALM contains a variety of look-up table (LUT)-based
resources that can be divided between two adaptive LUTs (ALUTs). With
up to eight inputs to the two ALUTs, one ALM can implement various
combinations of two functions. This adaptability allows the ALM to be
2–6
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
completely backward-compatible with four-input LUT architectures. One
ALM can also implement any function of up to six inputs and certain
seven-input functions.
In addition to the adaptive LUT-based resources, each ALM contains two
programmable registers, two dedicated full adders, a carry chain, a
shared arithmetic chain, and a register chain. Through these dedicated
resources, the ALM can efficiently implement various arithmetic
functions and shift registers. Each ALM drives all types of interconnects:
local, row, column, carry chain, shared arithmetic chain, register chain,
and direct link interconnects. Figure 2–5 shows a high-level block
diagram of the Stratix II ALM while Figure 2–6 shows a detailed view of
all the connections in the ALM.
Figure 2–5. High-Level Block Diagram of the Stratix II ALM
carry_in
shared_arith_in
reg_chain_in
To general or
local routing
dataf0
adder0
datae0
D
dataa
datab
datac
datad
Q
To general or
local routing
reg0
Combinational
Logic
adder1
D
Q
datae1
To general or
local routing
reg1
dataf1
To general or
local routing
carry_out
shared_arith_out
Altera Corporation
May 2007
reg_chain_out
2–7
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
2–8
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
datae0
datac
Local
Interconnect
Local
datad
datae1
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
dataf1
datab
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
dataa
Local
Interconnect
Interconnect
dataf0
Local
Interconnect
3-Input
LUT
3-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
3-Input
LUT
3-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
shared_arith_out
shared_arith_in
carry_out
carry_in
VCC
sclr
syncload
reg_chain_out
reg_chain_in
clk[2..0]
aclr[1..0]
ENA
CLRN
PRN/ALD
D
Q
ADATA
ENA
CLRN
PRN/ALD
D
Q
ADATA
asyncload
ena[2..0]
Local
Interconnect
Row, column &
direct link routing
Row, column &
direct link routing
Local
Interconnect
Row, column &
direct link routing
Row, column &
direct link routing
Adaptive Logic Modules
Figure 2–6. Stratix II ALM Details
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
One ALM contains two programmable registers. Each register has data,
clock, clock enable, synchronous and asynchronous clear, asynchronous
load data, and synchronous and asynchronous load/preset inputs.
Global signals, general-purpose I/O pins, or any internal logic can drive
the register's clock and clear control signals. Either general-purpose I/O
pins or internal logic can drive the clock enable, preset, asynchronous
load, and asynchronous load data. The asynchronous load data input
comes from the datae or dataf input of the ALM, which are the same
inputs that can be used for register packing. For combinational functions,
the register is bypassed and the output of the LUT drives directly to the
outputs of the ALM.
Each ALM has two sets of outputs that drive the local, row, and column
routing resources. The LUT, adder, or register output can drive these
output drivers independently (see Figure 2–6). For each set of output
drivers, two ALM outputs can drive column, row, or direct link routing
connections, and one of these ALM outputs can also drive local
interconnect resources. This allows the LUT or adder to drive one output
while the register drives another output. This feature, called register
packing, improves device utilization because the device can use the
register and the combinational logic for unrelated functions. Another
special packing mode allows the register output to feed back into the LUT
of the same ALM so that the register is packed with its own fan-out LUT.
This provides another mechanism for improved fitting. The ALM can also
drive out registered and unregistered versions of the LUT or adder
output.
f
See the Performance & Logic Efficiency Analysis of Stratix II Devices White
Paper for more information on the efficiencies of the Stratix II ALM and
comparisons with previous architectures.
ALM Operating Modes
The Stratix II ALM can operate in one of the following modes:
■
■
■
■
Normal mode
Extended LUT mode
Arithmetic mode
Shared arithmetic mode
Each mode uses ALM resources differently. In each mode, eleven
available inputs to the ALM--the eight data inputs from the LAB local
interconnect; carry-in from the previous ALM or LAB; the shared
arithmetic chain connection from the previous ALM or LAB; and the
register chain connection--are directed to different destinations to
implement the desired logic function. LAB-wide signals provide clock,
asynchronous clear, asynchronous preset/load, synchronous clear,
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–9
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Adaptive Logic Modules
synchronous load, and clock enable control for the register. These LABwide signals are available in all ALM modes. See the “LAB Control
Signals” section for more information on the LAB-wide control signals.
The Quartus II software and supported third-party synthesis tools, in
conjunction with parameterized functions such as library of
parameterized modules (LPM) functions, automatically choose the
appropriate mode for common functions such as counters, adders,
subtractors, and arithmetic functions. If required, you can also create
special-purpose functions that specify which ALM operating mode to use
for optimal performance.
Normal Mode
The normal mode is suitable for general logic applications and
combinational functions. In this mode, up to eight data inputs from the
LAB local interconnect are inputs to the combinational logic. The normal
mode allows two functions to be implemented in one Stratix II ALM, or
an ALM to implement a single function of up to six inputs. The ALM can
support certain combinations of completely independent functions and
various combinations of functions which have common inputs.
Figure 2–7 shows the supported LUT combinations in normal mode.
2–10
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–7. ALM in Normal Mode Note (1)
dataf0
datae0
datac
dataa
4-Input
LUT
combout0
datab
datad
datae1
dataf1
4-Input
LUT
combout1
dataf0
datae0
datac
dataa
datab
5-Input
LUT
combout0
datad
datae1
dataf1
dataf0
datae0
datac
dataa
datab
datad
datae1
dataf1
3-Input
LUT
5-Input
LUT
combout0
5-Input
LUT
combout1
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datab
datac
datad
6-Input
LUT
combout0
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datab
datac
datad
6-Input
LUT
combout0
6-Input
LUT
combout1
datad
datae1
dataf1
combout1
5-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
dataf0
datae0
datac
dataa
datab
combout0
combout1
datae1
dataf1
Note to Figure 2–7:
(1)
Combinations of functions with fewer inputs than those shown are also supported. For example, combinations of
functions with the following number of inputs are supported: 4 and 3, 3 and 3, 3 and 2, 5 and 2, etc.
The normal mode provides complete backward compatibility with fourinput LUT architectures. Two independent functions of four inputs or less
can be implemented in one Stratix II ALM. In addition, a five-input
function and an independent three-input function can be implemented
without sharing inputs.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–11
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Adaptive Logic Modules
For the packing of two five-input functions into one ALM, the functions
must have at least two common inputs. The common inputs are dataa
and datab. The combination of a four-input function with a five-input
function requires one common input (either dataa or datab).
In the case of implementing two six-input functions in one ALM, four
inputs must be shared and the combinational function must be the same.
For example, a 4 × 2 crossbar switch (two 4-to-1 multiplexers with
common inputs and unique select lines) can be implemented in one ALM,
as shown in Figure 2–8. The shared inputs are dataa, datab, datac, and
datad, while the unique select lines are datae0 and dataf0 for
function0, and datae1 and dataf1 for function1. This crossbar
switch consumes four LUTs in a four-input LUT-based architecture.
Figure 2–8. 4 × 2 Crossbar Switch Example
4 × 2 Crossbar Switch
sel0[1..0]
inputa
inputb
out0
inputc
inputd
Implementation in 1 ALM
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datab
datac
datad
Six-Input
LUT
(Function0)
combout0
Six-Input
LUT
(Function1)
combout1
out1
sel1[1..0]
datae1
dataf1
In a sparsely used device, functions that could be placed into one ALM
may be implemented in separate ALMs. The Quartus II Compiler spreads
a design out to achieve the best possible performance. As a device begins
to fill up, the Quartus II software automatically utilizes the full potential
of the Stratix II ALM. The Quartus II Compiler automatically searches for
functions of common inputs or completely independent functions to be
placed into one ALM and to make efficient use of the device resources. In
addition, you can manually control resource usage by setting location
assignments.
Any six-input function can be implemented utilizing inputs dataa,
datab, datac, datad, and either datae0 and dataf0 or datae1 and
dataf1. If datae0 and dataf0 are utilized, the output is driven to
register0, and/or register0 is bypassed and the data drives out to
the interconnect using the top set of output drivers (see Figure 2–9). If
2–12
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
datae1 and dataf1 are utilized, the output drives to register1
and/or bypasses register1 and drives to the interconnect using the
bottom set of output drivers. The Quartus II Compiler automatically
selects the inputs to the LUT. Asynchronous load data for the register
comes from the datae or dataf input of the ALM. ALMs in normal
mode support register packing.
Figure 2–9. 6-Input Function in Normal Mode Notes (1), (2)
dataf0
datae0
dataa
datab
datac
datad
To general or
local routing
6-Input
LUT
D
Q
To general or
local routing
reg0
datae1
dataf1
(2)
D
These inputs are available for register packing.
Q
To general or
local routing
reg1
Notes to Figure 2–9:
(1)
(2)
If datae1 and dataf1 are used as inputs to the six-input function, then datae0
and dataf0 are available for register packing.
The dataf1 input is available for register packing only if the six-input function is
un-registered.
Extended LUT Mode
The extended LUT mode is used to implement a specific set of
seven-input functions. The set must be a 2-to-1 multiplexer fed by two
arbitrary five-input functions sharing four inputs. Figure 2–10 shows the
template of supported seven-input functions utilizing extended LUT
mode. In this mode, if the seven-input function is unregistered, the
unused eighth input is available for register packing.
Functions that fit into the template shown in Figure 2–10 occur naturally
in designs. These functions often appear in designs as “if-else” statements
in Verilog HDL or VHDL code.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–13
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Adaptive Logic Modules
Figure 2–10. Template for Supported Seven-Input Functions in Extended LUT Mode
datae0
datac
dataa
datab
datad
dataf0
5-Input
LUT
To general or
local routing
combout0
D
5-Input
LUT
Q
To general or
local routing
reg0
datae1
dataf1
(1)
This input is available
for register packing.
Note to Figure 2–10:
(1)
If the seven-input function is unregistered, the unused eighth input is available for register packing. The second
register, reg1, is not available.
Arithmetic Mode
The arithmetic mode is ideal for implementing adders, counters,
accumulators, wide parity functions, and comparators. An ALM in
arithmetic mode uses two sets of two four-input LUTs along with two
dedicated full adders. The dedicated adders allow the LUTs to be
available to perform pre-adder logic; therefore, each adder can add the
output of two four-input functions. The four LUTs share the dataa and
datab inputs. As shown in Figure 2–11, the carry-in signal feeds to
adder0, and the carry-out from adder0 feeds to carry-in of adder1. The
carry-out from adder1 drives to adder0 of the next ALM in the LAB.
ALMs in arithmetic mode can drive out registered and/or unregistered
versions of the adder outputs.
2–14
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–11. ALM in Arithmetic Mode
carry_in
adder0
datae0
4-Input
LUT
To general or
local routing
D
dataf0
datac
datab
dataa
Q
To general or
local routing
reg0
4-Input
LUT
adder1
datad
datae1
4-Input
LUT
To general or
local routing
D
4-Input
LUT
Q
To general or
local routing
reg1
dataf1
carry_out
While operating in arithmetic mode, the ALM can support simultaneous
use of the adder's carry output along with combinational logic outputs. In
this operation, the adder output is ignored. This usage of the adder with
the combinational logic output provides resource savings of up to 50% for
functions that can use this ability. An example of such functionality is a
conditional operation, such as the one shown in Figure 2–12. The
equation for this example is:
R = (X < Y) ? Y : X
To implement this function, the adder is used to subtract ‘Y’ from ‘X.’ If
‘X’ is less than ‘Y,’ the carry_out signal is ‘1.’ The carry_out signal is
fed to an adder where it drives out to the LAB local interconnect. It then
feeds to the LAB-wide syncload signal. When asserted, syncload
selects the syncdata input. In this case, the data ‘Y’ drives the
syncdata inputs to the registers. If ‘X’ is greater than or equal to ‘Y,’ the
syncload signal is de-asserted and ‘X’ drives the data port of the
registers.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–15
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Adaptive Logic Modules
Figure 2–12. Conditional Operation Example
Adder output
is not used.
ALM 1
X[0]
Comb &
Adder
Logic
Y[0]
X[0]
D
R[0]
To general or
local routing
R[1]
To general or
local routing
R[2]
To general or
local routing
Q
reg0
syncdata
syncload
X[1]
Comb &
Adder
Logic
Y[1]
X[1]
D
Q
reg1
syncload
Carry Chain
ALM 2
X[2]
Y[2]
Comb &
Adder
Logic
X[2]
D
Q
reg0
syncload
Comb &
Adder
Logic
carry_out
To local routing &
then to LAB-wide
syncload
The arithmetic mode also offers clock enable, counter enable,
synchronous up/down control, add/subtract control, synchronous clear,
synchronous load. The LAB local interconnect data inputs generate the
clock enable, counter enable, synchronous up/down and add/subtract
control signals. These control signals are good candidates for the inputs
that are shared between the four LUTs in the ALM. The synchronous clear
and synchronous load options are LAB-wide signals that affect all
registers in the LAB. The Quartus II software automatically places any
registers that are not used by the counter into other LABs.
Carry Chain
The carry chain provides a fast carry function between the dedicated
adders in arithmetic or shared arithmetic mode. Carry chains can begin in
either the first ALM or the fifth ALM in an LAB. The final carry-out signal
is routed to an ALM, where it is fed to local, row, or column interconnects.
2–16
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
The Quartus II Compiler automatically creates carry chain logic during
design processing, or you can create it manually during design entry.
Parameterized functions such as LPM functions automatically take
advantage of carry chains for the appropriate functions.
The Quartus II Compiler creates carry chains longer than 16 (8 ALMs in
arithmetic or shared arithmetic mode) by linking LABs together
automatically. For enhanced fitting, a long carry chain runs vertically
allowing fast horizontal connections to TriMatrix memory and DSP
blocks. A carry chain can continue as far as a full column.
To avoid routing congestion in one small area of the device when a high
fan-in arithmetic function is implemented, the LAB can support carry
chains that only utilize either the top half or the bottom half of the LAB
before connecting to the next LAB. This leaves the other half of the ALMs
in the LAB available for implementing narrower fan-in functions in
normal mode. Carry chains that use the top four ALMs in the first LAB
carry into the top half of the ALMs in the next LAB within the column.
Carry chains that use the bottom four ALMs in the first LAB carry into the
bottom half of the ALMs in the next LAB within the column. Every other
column of LABs is top-half bypassable, while the other LAB columns are
bottom-half bypassable.
See the “MultiTrack Interconnect” on page 2–22 section for more
information on carry chain interconnect.
Shared Arithmetic Mode
In shared arithmetic mode, the ALM can implement a three-input add. In
this mode, the ALM is configured with four 4-input LUTs. Each LUT
either computes the sum of three inputs or the carry of three inputs. The
output of the carry computation is fed to the next adder (either to adder1
in the same ALM or to adder0 of the next ALM in the LAB) via a
dedicated connection called the shared arithmetic chain. This shared
arithmetic chain can significantly improve the performance of an adder
tree by reducing the number of summation stages required to implement
an adder tree. Figure 2–13 shows the ALM in shared arithmetic mode.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–17
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Adaptive Logic Modules
Figure 2–13. ALM in Shared Arithmetic Mode
shared_arith_in
carry_in
4-Input
LUT
To general or
local routing
D
datae0
datac
datab
dataa
datad
datae1
Q
To general or
local routing
reg0
4-Input
LUT
4-Input
LUT
To general or
local routing
D
4-Input
LUT
Q
To general or
local routing
reg1
carry_out
shared_arith_out
Note to Figure 2–13:
(1)
Inputs dataf0 and dataf1 are available for register packing in shared arithmetic mode.
Adder trees can be found in many different applications. For example, the
summation of the partial products in a logic-based multiplier can be
implemented in a tree structure. Another example is a correlator function
that can use a large adder tree to sum filtered data samples in a given time
frame to recover or to de-spread data which was transmitted utilizing
spread spectrum technology.
An example of a three-bit add operation utilizing the shared arithmetic
mode is shown in Figure 2–14. The partial sum (S[2..0]) and the
partial carry (C[2..0]) is obtained using the LUTs, while the result
(R[2..0]) is computed using the dedicated adders.
2–18
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–14. Example of a 3-bit Add Utilizing Shared Arithmetic Mode
shared_arith_in = '0'
carry_in = '0'
3-Bit Add Example
ALM Implementation
ALM 1
1st stage add is
implemented in LUTs.
X2 X1 X0
Y2 Y1 Y0
+ Z2 Z1 Z0
2nd stage add is
implemented in adders.
S2 S1 S0
+ C2 C1 C0
R3 R2 R1 R0
Binary Add
Decimal
Equivalents
1 1 0
1 0 1
+ 0 1 0
6
5
+ 2
0 0 1
+ 1 1 0
1
+ 2x6
1 1 0 1
13
3-Input
LUT
S0
R0
X0
Y0
Z0
3-Input
LUT
C0
X1
Y1
Z1
3-Input
LUT
S1
R1
3-Input
LUT
C1
3-Input
LUT
S2
ALM 2
R2
X2
Y2
Z2
3-Input
LUT
C2
3-Input
LUT
'0'
R3
3-Input
LUT
Shared Arithmetic Chain
In addition to the dedicated carry chain routing, the shared arithmetic
chain available in shared arithmetic mode allows the ALM to implement
a three-input add. This significantly reduces the resources necessary to
implement large adder trees or correlator functions.
The shared arithmetic chains can begin in either the first or fifth ALM in
an LAB. The Quartus II Compiler creates shared arithmetic chains longer
than 16 (8 ALMs in arithmetic or shared arithmetic mode) by linking
LABs together automatically. For enhanced fitting, a long shared
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–19
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Adaptive Logic Modules
arithmetic chain runs vertically allowing fast horizontal connections to
TriMatrix memory and DSP blocks. A shared arithmetic chain can
continue as far as a full column.
Similar to the carry chains, the shared arithmetic chains are also top- or
bottom-half bypassable. This capability allows the shared arithmetic
chain to cascade through half of the ALMs in a LAB while leaving the
other half available for narrower fan-in functionality. Every other LAB
column is top-half bypassable, while the other LAB columns are bottomhalf bypassable.
See the “MultiTrack Interconnect” on page 2–22 section for more
information on shared arithmetic chain interconnect.
Register Chain
In addition to the general routing outputs, the ALMs in an LAB have
register chain outputs. The register chain routing allows registers in the
same LAB to be cascaded together. The register chain interconnect allows
an LAB to use LUTs for a single combinational function and the registers
to be used for an unrelated shift register implementation. These resources
speed up connections between ALMs while saving local interconnect
resources (see Figure 2–15). The Quartus II Compiler automatically takes
advantage of these resources to improve utilization and performance.
2–20
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–15. Register Chain within an LAB Note (1)
From Previous ALM
Within The LAB
reg_chain_in
To general or
local routing
adder0
D
Q
To general or
local routing
reg0
Combinational
Logic
adder1
D
Q
To general or
local routing
reg1
To general or
local routing
To general or
local routing
adder0
D
Q
To general or
local routing
reg0
Combinational
Logic
adder1
D
Q
To general or
local routing
reg1
To general or
local routing
reg_chain_out
To Next ALM
within the LAB
Note to Figure 2–15:
(1)
The combinational or adder logic can be utilized to implement an unrelated, un-registered function.
See the “MultiTrack Interconnect” on page 2–22 section for more
information on register chain interconnect.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–21
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
MultiTrack Interconnect
Clear & Preset Logic Control
LAB-wide signals control the logic for the register's clear and load/preset
signals. The ALM directly supports an asynchronous clear and preset
function. The register preset is achieved through the asynchronous load
of a logic high. The direct asynchronous preset does not require a NOTgate push-back technique. Stratix II devices support simultaneous
asynchronous load/preset, and clear signals. An asynchronous clear
signal takes precedence if both signals are asserted simultaneously. Each
LAB supports up to two clears and one load/preset signal.
In addition to the clear and load/preset ports, Stratix II devices provide a
device-wide reset pin (DEV_CLRn) that resets all registers in the device.
An option set before compilation in the Quartus II software controls this
pin. This device-wide reset overrides all other control signals.
MultiTrack
Interconnect
In the Stratix II architecture, connections between ALMs, TriMatrix
memory, DSP blocks, and device I/O pins are provided by the MultiTrack
interconnect structure with DirectDriveTM technology. The MultiTrack
interconnect consists of continuous, performance-optimized routing lines
of different lengths and speeds used for inter- and intra-design block
connectivity. The Quartus II Compiler automatically places critical design
paths on faster interconnects to improve design performance.
DirectDrive technology is a deterministic routing technology that ensures
identical routing resource usage for any function regardless of placement
in the device. The MultiTrack interconnect and DirectDrive technology
simplify the integration stage of block-based designing by eliminating the
re-optimization cycles that typically follow design changes and
additions.
The MultiTrack interconnect consists of row and column interconnects
that span fixed distances. A routing structure with fixed length resources
for all devices allows predictable and repeatable performance when
migrating through different device densities. Dedicated row
interconnects route signals to and from LABs, DSP blocks, and TriMatrix
memory in the same row. These row resources include:
■
■
■
Direct link interconnects between LABs and adjacent blocks
R4 interconnects traversing four blocks to the right or left
R24 row interconnects for high-speed access across the length of the
device
2–22
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
The direct link interconnect allows an LAB, DSP block, or TriMatrix
memory block to drive into the local interconnect of its left and right
neighbors and then back into itself. This provides fast communication
between adjacent LABs and/or blocks without using row interconnect
resources.
The R4 interconnects span four LABs, three LABs and one M512 RAM
block, two LABs and one M4K RAM block, or two LABs and one DSP
block to the right or left of a source LAB. These resources are used for fast
row connections in a four-LAB region. Every LAB has its own set of R4
interconnects to drive either left or right. Figure 2–16 shows R4
interconnect connections from an LAB. R4 interconnects can drive and be
driven by DSP blocks and RAM blocks and row IOEs. For LAB
interfacing, a primary LAB or LAB neighbor can drive a given R4
interconnect. For R4 interconnects that drive to the right, the primary
LAB and right neighbor can drive on to the interconnect. For R4
interconnects that drive to the left, the primary LAB and its left neighbor
can drive on to the interconnect. R4 interconnects can drive other R4
interconnects to extend the range of LABs they can drive. R4
interconnects can also drive C4 and C16 interconnects for connections
from one row to another. Additionally, R4 interconnects can drive R24
interconnects.
Figure 2–16. R4 Interconnect Connections
Notes (1), (2), (3)
Adjacent LAB can
Drive onto Another
LAB's R4 Interconnect
C4 and C16
Column Interconnects (1)
R4 Interconnect
Driving Right
R4 Interconnect
Driving Left
LAB
Neighbor
Primary
LAB (2)
LAB
Neighbor
Notes to Figure 2–16:
(1)
(2)
(3)
C4 and C16 interconnects can drive R4 interconnects.
This pattern is repeated for every LAB in the LAB row.
The LABs in Figure 2–16 show the 16 possible logical outputs per LAB.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–23
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
MultiTrack Interconnect
R24 row interconnects span 24 LABs and provide the fastest resource for
long row connections between LABs, TriMatrix memory, DSP blocks, and
Row IOEs. The R24 row interconnects can cross M-RAM blocks. R24 row
interconnects drive to other row or column interconnects at every fourth
LAB and do not drive directly to LAB local interconnects. R24 row
interconnects drive LAB local interconnects via R4 and C4 interconnects.
R24 interconnects can drive R24, R4, C16, and C4 interconnects.
The column interconnect operates similarly to the row interconnect and
vertically routes signals to and from LABs, TriMatrix memory, DSP
blocks, and IOEs. Each column of LABs is served by a dedicated column
interconnect. These column resources include:
■
■
■
■
■
Shared arithmetic chain interconnects in an LAB
Carry chain interconnects in an LAB and from LAB to LAB
Register chain interconnects in an LAB
C4 interconnects traversing a distance of four blocks in up and down
direction
C16 column interconnects for high-speed vertical routing through
the device
Stratix II devices include an enhanced interconnect structure in LABs for
routing shared arithmetic chains and carry chains for efficient arithmetic
functions. The register chain connection allows the register output of one
ALM to connect directly to the register input of the next ALM in the LAB
for fast shift registers. These ALM to ALM connections bypass the local
interconnect. The Quartus II Compiler automatically takes advantage of
these resources to improve utilization and performance. Figure 2–17
shows the shared arithmetic chain, carry chain and register chain
interconnects.
2–24
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–17. Shared Arithmetic Chain, Carry Chain & Register Chain
Interconnects
Local Interconnect
Routing Among ALMs
in the LAB
Carry Chain & Shared
Arithmetic Chain
Routing to Adjacent ALM
ALM 1
ALM 2
Local
Interconnect
Register Chain
Routing to Adjacent
ALM's Register Inpu
ALM 3
ALM 4
ALM 5
ALM 6
ALM 7
ALM 8
The C4 interconnects span four LABs, M512, or M4K blocks up or down
from a source LAB. Every LAB has its own set of C4 interconnects to drive
either up or down. Figure 2–18 shows the C4 interconnect connections
from an LAB in a column. The C4 interconnects can drive and be driven
by all types of architecture blocks, including DSP blocks, TriMatrix
memory blocks, and column and row IOEs. For LAB interconnection, a
primary LAB or its LAB neighbor can drive a given C4 interconnect. C4
interconnects can drive each other to extend their range as well as drive
row interconnects for column-to-column connections.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–25
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
MultiTrack Interconnect
Figure 2–18. C4 Interconnect Connections Note (1)
C4 Interconnect
Drives Local and R4
Interconnects
up to Four Rows
C4 Interconnect
Driving Up
LAB
Row
Interconnect
Adjacent LAB can
drive onto neighboring
LAB's C4 interconnect
Local
Interconnect
C4 Interconnect
Driving Down
Note to Figure 2–18:
(1)
Each C4 interconnect can drive either up or down four rows.
2–26
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
C16 column interconnects span a length of 16 LABs and provide the
fastest resource for long column connections between LABs, TriMatrix
memory blocks, DSP blocks, and IOEs. C16 interconnects can cross
M-RAM blocks and also drive to row and column interconnects at every
fourth LAB. C16 interconnects drive LAB local interconnects via C4 and
R4 interconnects and do not drive LAB local interconnects directly.
All embedded blocks communicate with the logic array similar to LABto-LAB interfaces. Each block (that is, TriMatrix memory and DSP blocks)
connects to row and column interconnects and has local interconnect
regions driven by row and column interconnects. These blocks also have
direct link interconnects for fast connections to and from a neighboring
LAB. All blocks are fed by the row LAB clocks, labclk[5..0].
Table 2–2 shows the Stratix II device’s routing scheme.
Table 2–2. Stratix II Device Routing Scheme (Part 1 of 2)
Row IOE
Column IOE
DSP Blocks
M-RAM Block
M4K RAM Block
M512 RAM Block
ALM
C16 Interconnect
C4 Interconnect
R24 Interconnect
R4 Interconnect
Direct Link Interconnect
Local Interconnect
Register Chain
Carry Chain
Source
Shared Arithmetic Chain
Destination
Shared arithmetic chain
v
Carry chain
v
Register chain
v
Local interconnect
v v v v v v v
Direct link interconnect
v
R4 interconnect
v
v v v v
R24 interconnect
C4 interconnect
C16 interconnect
v v v v
v
v
v
v v v v
v v v v v v
v
M512 RAM block
v v v
v
M4K RAM block
v v v
v
ALM
M-RAM block
v v v v
DSP blocks
v v
Altera Corporation
May 2007
v
2–27
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
TriMatrix Memory
Table 2–2. Stratix II Device Routing Scheme (Part 2 of 2)
Column IOE
v
Row IOE
v v v v
TriMatrix
Memory
Row IOE
Column IOE
DSP Blocks
M-RAM Block
M4K RAM Block
M512 RAM Block
ALM
C16 Interconnect
C4 Interconnect
R24 Interconnect
R4 Interconnect
Direct Link Interconnect
Local Interconnect
Register Chain
Carry Chain
Source
Shared Arithmetic Chain
Destination
v v
TriMatrix memory consists of three types of RAM blocks: M512, M4K,
and M-RAM. Although these memory blocks are different, they can all
implement various types of memory with or without parity, including
true dual-port, simple dual-port, and single-port RAM, ROM, and FIFO
buffers. Table 2–3 shows the size and features of the different RAM
blocks.
Table 2–3. TriMatrix Memory Features (Part 1 of 2)
Memory Feature
M512 RAM Block
(32 × 18 Bits)
M4K RAM Block
(128 × 36 Bits)
M-RAM Block
(4K × 144 Bits)
500 MHz
550 MHz
420 MHz
v
v
Maximum performance
True dual-port memory
Simple dual-port memory
v
v
v
Single-port memory
v
v
v
Shift register
v
v
ROM
v
v
(1)
FIFO buffer
v
v
v
v
v
Pack mode
Byte enable
v
Address clock enable
v
v
v
v
Parity bits
v
v
v
Mixed clock mode
v
v
v
Memory initialization (.mif)
v
v
2–28
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Table 2–3. TriMatrix Memory Features (Part 2 of 2)
Memory Feature
M512 RAM Block
(32 × 18 Bits)
M4K RAM Block
(128 × 36 Bits)
M-RAM Block
(4K × 144 Bits)
v
v
v
v
v
Simple dual-port memory
mixed width support
True dual-port memory
mixed width support
Power-up conditions
Outputs cleared
Outputs cleared
Outputs unknown
Register clears
Output registers
Output registers
Output registers
Mixed-port read-during-write Unknown output/old data Unknown output/old data Unknown output
Configurations
512 × 1
256 × 2
128 × 4
64 × 8
64 × 9
32 × 16
32 × 18
4K × 1
2K × 2
1K × 4
512 × 8
512 × 9
256 × 16
256 × 18
128 × 32
128 × 36
64K × 8
64K × 9
32K × 16
32K × 18
16K × 32
16K × 36
8K × 64
8K × 72
4K × 128
4K × 144
Notes to Table 2–3:
(1)
The M-RAM block does not support memory initializations. However, the M-RAM block can emulate a ROM
function using a dual-port RAM bock. The Stratix II device must write to the dual-port memory once and then
disable the write-enable ports afterwards.
Memory Block Size
TriMatrix memory provides three different memory sizes for efficient
application support. The Quartus II software automatically partitions the
user-defined memory into the embedded memory blocks using the most
efficient size combinations. You can also manually assign the memory to
a specific block size or a mixture of block sizes.
When applied to input registers, the asynchronous clear signal for the
TriMatrix embedded memory immediately clears the input registers.
However, the output of the memory block does not show the effects until
the next clock edge. When applied to output registers, the asynchronous
clear signal clears the output registers and the effects are seen
immediately.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–29
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
TriMatrix Memory
M512 RAM Block
The M512 RAM block is a simple dual-port memory block and is useful
for implementing small FIFO buffers, DSP, and clock domain transfer
applications. Each block contains 576 RAM bits (including parity bits).
M512 RAM blocks can be configured in the following modes:
■
■
■
■
■
Simple dual-port RAM
Single-port RAM
FIFO
ROM
Shift register
1
Violating the setup or hold time on the memory block address
registers could corrupt memory contents. This applies to both
read and write operations.
When configured as RAM or ROM, you can use an initialization file to
pre-load the memory contents.
M512 RAM blocks can have different clocks on its inputs and outputs.
The wren, datain, and write address registers are all clocked together
from one of the two clocks feeding the block. The read address, rden, and
output registers can be clocked by either of the two clocks driving the
block. This allows the RAM block to operate in read/write or
input/output clock modes. Only the output register can be bypassed. The
six labclk signals or local interconnect can drive the inclock,
outclock, wren, rden, and outclr signals. Because of the advanced
interconnect between the LAB and M512 RAM blocks, ALMs can also
control the wren and rden signals and the RAM clock, clock enable, and
asynchronous clear signals. Figure 2–19 shows the M512 RAM block
control signal generation logic.
The RAM blocks in Stratix II devices have local interconnects to allow
ALMs and interconnects to drive into RAM blocks. The M512 RAM block
local interconnect is driven by the R4, C4, and direct link interconnects
from adjacent LABs. The M512 RAM blocks can communicate with LABs
on either the left or right side through these row interconnects or with
LAB columns on the left or right side with the column interconnects. The
M512 RAM block has up to 16 direct link input connections from the left
adjacent LABs and another 16 from the right adjacent LAB. M512 RAM
outputs can also connect to left and right LABs through direct link
interconnect. The M512 RAM block has equal opportunity for access and
performance to and from LABs on either its left or right side. Figure 2–20
shows the M512 RAM block to logic array interface.
2–30
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–19. M512 RAM Block Control Signals
Dedicated
Row LAB
Clocks
6
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Altera Corporation
May 2007
outclocken
inclocken
inclock
outclock
wren
rden
outclr
2–31
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
TriMatrix Memory
Figure 2–20. M512 RAM Block LAB Row Interface
C4 Interconnect
R4 Interconnect
16
Direct link
interconnect
to adjacent LAB
Direct link
interconnect
to adjacent LAB
dataout
Direct link
interconnect
from adjacent LAB
M512 RAM
Block
Direct link
interconnect
from adjacent LAB
clocks
datain
control
signals
address
2
6
M512 RAM Block Local
Interconnect Region
LAB Row Clocks
M4K RAM Blocks
The M4K RAM block includes support for true dual-port RAM. The M4K
RAM block is used to implement buffers for a wide variety of applications
such as storing processor code, implementing lookup schemes, and
implementing larger memory applications. Each block contains 4,608
RAM bits (including parity bits). M4K RAM blocks can be configured in
the following modes:
■
■
■
■
■
■
True dual-port RAM
Simple dual-port RAM
Single-port RAM
FIFO
ROM
Shift register
When configured as RAM or ROM, you can use an initialization file to
pre-load the memory contents.
2–32
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
The M4K RAM blocks allow for different clocks on their inputs and
outputs. Either of the two clocks feeding the block can clock M4K RAM
block registers (renwe, address, byte enable, datain, and output registers).
Only the output register can be bypassed. The six labclk signals or local
interconnects can drive the control signals for the A and B ports of the
M4K RAM block. ALMs can also control the clock_a, clock_b,
renwe_a, renwe_b, clr_a, clr_b, clocken_a, and clocken_b
signals, as shown in Figure 2–21.
The R4, C4, and direct link interconnects from adjacent LABs drive the
M4K RAM block local interconnect. The M4K RAM blocks can
communicate with LABs on either the left or right side through these row
resources or with LAB columns on either the right or left with the column
resources. Up to 16 direct link input connections to the M4K RAM Block
are possible from the left adjacent LABs and another 16 possible from the
right adjacent LAB. M4K RAM block outputs can also connect to left and
right LABs through direct link interconnect. Figure 2–22 shows the M4K
RAM block to logic array interface.
Figure 2–21. M4K RAM Block Control Signals
Dedicated
Row LAB
Clocks
6
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Altera Corporation
May 2007
clocken_b
clock_b
clock_a
clocken_a
renwe_b
renwe_a
aclr_b
aclr_a
2–33
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
TriMatrix Memory
Figure 2–22. M4K RAM Block LAB Row Interface
C4 Interconnect
Direct link
interconnect
to adjacent LAB
R4 Interconnect
16
Direct link
interconnect
to adjacent LAB
36
dataout
M4K RAM
Block
Direct link
interconnect
from adjacent LAB
Direct link
interconnect
from adjacent LAB
datain
control
signals
byte
enable
clocks
address
6
M4K RAM Block Local
Interconnect Region
LAB Row Clocks
M-RAM Block
The largest TriMatrix memory block, the M-RAM block, is useful for
applications where a large volume of data must be stored on-chip. Each
block contains 589,824 RAM bits (including parity bits). The M-RAM
block can be configured in the following modes:
■
■
■
■
True dual-port RAM
Simple dual-port RAM
Single-port RAM
FIFO
You cannot use an initialization file to initialize the contents of an M-RAM
block. All M-RAM block contents power up to an undefined value. Only
synchronous operation is supported in the M-RAM block, so all inputs
are registered. Output registers can be bypassed.
2–34
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Similar to all RAM blocks, M-RAM blocks can have different clocks on
their inputs and outputs. Either of the two clocks feeding the block can
clock M-RAM block registers (renwe, address, byte enable, datain, and
output registers). The output register can be bypassed. The six labclk
signals or local interconnect can drive the control signals for the A and B
ports of the M-RAM block. ALMs can also control the clock_a,
clock_b, renwe_a, renwe_b, clr_a, clr_b, clocken_a, and
clocken_b signals as shown in Figure 2–23.
Figure 2–23. M-RAM Block Control Signals
Dedicated
Row LAB
Clocks
6
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
Local
Interconnect
clocken_a
Local
Interconnect
clock_a
renwe_a
aclr_a
clock_b
aclr_b
renwe_b
Local
Interconnect
clocken_b
The R4, R24, C4, and direct link interconnects from adjacent LABs on
either the right or left side drive the M-RAM block local interconnect. Up
to 16 direct link input connections to the M-RAM block are possible from
the left adjacent LABs and another 16 possible from the right adjacent
LAB. M-RAM block outputs can also connect to left and right LABs
through direct link interconnect. Figure 2–24 shows an example floorplan
for the EP2S130 device and the location of the M-RAM interfaces.
Figures 2–25 and 2–26 show the interface between the M-RAM block and
the logic array.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–35
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
TriMatrix Memory
Figure 2–24. EP2S130 Device with M-RAM Interface Locations Note (1)
M-RAM blocks interface to
LABs on right and left sides for
easy access to horizontal I/O pins
M4K
Blocks
M-RAM
Block
M-RAM
Block
M-RAM
Block
M-RAM
Block
M-RAM
Block
M-RAM
Block
M512
Blocks
DSP
Blocks
LABs
DSP
Blocks
Note to Figure 2–24:
(1)
The device shown is an EP2S130 device. The number and position of M-RAM blocks varies in other devices.
2–36
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–25. M-RAM Block LAB Row Interface Note (1)
Row Unit Interface Allows LAB
Rows to Drive Port A Datain,
Dataout, Address and Control
Signals to and from M-RAM Block
Row Unit Interface Allows LAB
Rows to Drive Port B Datain,
Dataout, Address and Control
Signals to and from M-RAM Block
L0
R0
L1
R1
M-RAM Block
L2
Port A
Port B R2
L3
R3
L4
R4
L5
R5
LAB Interface
Blocks
LABs in Row
M-RAM Boundary
LABs in Row
M-RAM Boundary
Note to Figure 2–25:
(1)
Only R24 and C16 interconnects cross the M-RAM block boundaries.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–37
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
TriMatrix Memory
Figure 2–26. M-RAM Row Unit Interface to Interconnect
C4 Interconnect
R4 and R24 Interconnects
M-RAM Block
LAB
Up to 16
dataout_a[ ]
16
Up to 28
Direct Link
Interconnects
datain_a[ ]
addressa[ ]
addr_ena_a
renwe_a
byteenaA[ ]
clocken_a
clock_a
aclr_a
Row Interface Block
M-RAM Block to
LAB Row Interface
Block Interconnect Region
Table 2–4 shows the input and output data signal connections along with
the address and control signal input connections to the row unit interfaces
(L0 to L5 and R0 to R5).
2–38
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Table 2–4. M-RAM Row Interface Unit Signals
Unit Interface Block
f
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Input Signals
Output Signals
L0
datain_a[14..0]
byteena_a[1..0]
dataout_a[11..0]
L1
datain_a[29..15]
byteena_a[3..2]
dataout_a[23..12]
L2
datain_a[35..30]
addressa[4..0]
addr_ena_a
clock_a
clocken_a
renwe_a
aclr_a
dataout_a[35..24]
L3
addressa[15..5]
datain_a[41..36]
dataout_a[47..36]
L4
datain_a[56..42]
byteena_a[5..4]
dataout_a[59..48]
L5
datain_a[71..57]
byteena_a[7..6]
dataout_a[71..60]
R0
datain_b[14..0]
byteena_b[1..0]
dataout_b[11..0]
R1
datain_b[29..15]
byteena_b[3..2]
dataout_b[23..12]
R2
datain_b[35..30]
addressb[4..0]
addr_ena_b
clock_b
clocken_b
renwe_b
aclr_b
dataout_b[35..24]
R3
addressb[15..5]
datain_b[41..36]
dataout_b[47..36]
R4
datain_b[56..42]
byteena_b[5..4]
dataout_b[59..48]
R5
datain_b[71..57]
byteena_b[7..6]
dataout_b[71..60]
See the TriMatrix Embedded Memory Blocks in Stratix II & Stratix II GX
Devices chapter in volume 2 of the Stratix II Device Handbook or the
Stratix II GX Device Handbook for more information on TriMatrix
memory.
2–39
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Digital Signal Processing Block
Digital Signal
Processing
Block
The most commonly used DSP functions are FIR filters, complex FIR
filters, IIR filters, fast Fourier transform (FFT) functions, direct cosine
transform (DCT) functions, and correlators. All of these use the multiplier
as the fundamental building block. Additionally, some applications need
specialized operations such as multiply-add and multiply-accumulate
operations. Stratix II devices provide DSP blocks to meet the arithmetic
requirements of these functions.
Each Stratix II device has from two to four columns of DSP blocks to
efficiently implement DSP functions faster than ALM-based
implementations. Stratix II devices have up to 24 DSP blocks per column
(see Table 2–5). Each DSP block can be configured to support up to:
■
■
■
Eight 9 × 9-bit multipliers
Four 18 × 18-bit multipliers
One 36 × 36-bit multiplier
As indicated, the Stratix II DSP block can support one 36 × 36-bit
multiplier in a single DSP block. This is true for any combination of
signed, unsigned, or mixed sign multiplications.
1
2–40
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
This list only shows functions that can fit into a single DSP block.
Multiple DSP blocks can support larger multiplication
functions.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–27 shows one of the columns with surrounding LAB rows.
Figure 2–27. DSP Blocks Arranged in Columns
DSP Block
Column
4 LAB
Rows
Altera Corporation
May 2007
DSP Block
2–41
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Digital Signal Processing Block
Table 2–5 shows the number of DSP blocks in each Stratix II device.
Table 2–5. DSP Blocks in Stratix II Devices Note (1)
Device
DSP Blocks
Total 9 × 9
Multipliers
Total 18 × 18
Multipliers
Total 36 × 36
Multipliers
12
96
48
12
EP2S15
EP2S30
16
128
64
16
EP2S60
36
288
144
36
EP2S90
48
384
192
48
EP2S130
63
504
252
63
EP2S180
96
768
384
96
Note to Table 2–5:
(1)
Each device has either the numbers of 9 × 9-, 18 × 18-, or 36 × 36-bit multipliers
shown. The total number of multipliers for each device is not the sum of all the
multipliers.
DSP block multipliers can optionally feed an adder/subtractor or
accumulator in the block depending on the configuration. This makes
routing to ALMs easier, saves ALM routing resources, and increases
performance, because all connections and blocks are in the DSP block.
Additionally, the DSP block input registers can efficiently implement shift
registers for FIR filter applications, and DSP blocks support Q1.15 format
rounding and saturation.
Figure 2–28 shows the top-level diagram of the DSP block configured for
18 × 18-bit multiplier mode.
2–42
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–28. DSP Block Diagram for 18 × 18-Bit Configuration
Optional Serial Shift
Register Inputs from
Previous DSP Block
Output
Selection
Multiplexer
Adder Output Block
PRN
D
Multiplier Block
Q
ENA
CLRN
From the row
interface block
D
PRN
Q1.15
Round/
Saturate
PRN
Q
D
Q
ENA
CLRN
ENA
CLRN
D
Adder/
Subtractor/
Accumulator
1
Q1.15
Round/
Saturate
PRN
Q
ENA
CLRN
D
Optional Stage Configurable
as Accumulator or Dynamic
Adder/Subtractor
PRN
Q1.15
Round/
Saturate
PRN
Q
D
Q
ENA
CLRN
Summation
Block
ENA
CLRN
Adder
D
Q
ENA
CLRN
D
PRN
Q
ENA
CLRN
PRN
Q1.15
Round/
Saturate
PRN
D
Q
D
Q
ENA
CLRN
D
D
Adder/
Subtractor/
Accumulator
2
Q1.15
Round/
Saturate
PRN
Q
ENA
CLRN
Optional Serial Shift
Register Outputs to
Next DSP Block
in the Column
Summation Stage
for Adding Four
Multipliers Together
ENA
CLRN
PRN
Q1.15
Round/
Saturate
PRN
Q
ENA
CLRN
D
Q
ENA
CLRN
Optional Pipline
Register Stage
Optional Input Register
Stage with Parallel Input or
Shift Register Configuration
to MultiTrack
Interconnect
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–43
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Digital Signal Processing Block
Modes of Operation
The adder, subtractor, and accumulate functions of a DSP block have four
modes of operation:
■
■
■
■
Simple multiplier
Multiply-accumulator
Two-multipliers adder
Four-multipliers adder
Table 2–6 shows the different number of multipliers possible in each DSP
block mode according to size. These modes allow the DSP blocks to
implement numerous applications for DSP including FFTs, complex FIR,
FIR, and 2D FIR filters, equalizers, IIR, correlators, matrix multiplication
and many other functions. The DSP blocks also support mixed modes
and mixed multiplier sizes in the same block. For example, half of one
DSP block can implement one 18 × 18-bit multiplier in multiplyaccumulator mode, while the other half of the DSP block implements four
9 × 9-bit multipliers in simple multiplier mode.
Table 2–6. Multiplier Size & Configurations per DSP Block
DSP Block Mode
Multiplier
9×9
Eight multipliers with
eight product outputs
Multiply-accumulator
-
Two-multipliers adder
Four-multipliers adder
18 × 18
Four multipliers with four
product outputs
36 × 36
One multiplier with one
product output
Two 52-bit multiplyaccumulate blocks
-
Four two-multiplier adder
(two 9 × 9 complex
multiply)
Two two-multiplier adder
(one 18 × 18 complex
multiply)
-
Two four-multiplier adder
One four-multiplier adder
-
DSP Block Interface
Stratix II device DSP block input registers can generate a shift register that
can cascade down in the same DSP block column. Dedicated connections
between DSP blocks provide fast connections between the shift register
inputs to cascade the shift register chains. You can cascade registers
within multiple DSP blocks for 9 × 9- or 18 × 18-bit FIR filters larger than
four taps, with additional adder stages implemented in ALMs. If the DSP
block is configured as 36 × 36 bits, the adder, subtractor, or accumulator
stages are implemented in ALMs. Each DSP block can route the shift
register chain out of the block to cascade multiple columns of DSP blocks.
2–44
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
The DSP block is divided into four block units that interface with four
LAB rows on the left and right. Each block unit can be considered one
complete 18 × 18-bit multiplier with 36 inputs and 36 outputs. A local
interconnect region is associated with each DSP block. Like an LAB, this
interconnect region can be fed with 16 direct link interconnects from the
LAB to the left or right of the DSP block in the same row. R4 and C4
routing resources can access the DSP block's local interconnect region.
The outputs also work similarly to LAB outputs as well. Eighteen outputs
from the DSP block can drive to the left LAB through direct link
interconnects and eighteen can drive to the right LAB though direct link
interconnects. All 36 outputs can drive to R4 and C4 routing
interconnects. Outputs can drive right- or left-column routing.
Figures 2–29 and 2–30 show the DSP block interfaces to LAB rows.
Figure 2–29. DSP Block Interconnect Interface
DSP Block
R4, C4 & Direct
Link Interconnects
OA[17..0]
OB[17..0]
R4, C4 & Direct
Link Interconnects
A1[17..0]
B1[17..0]
OC[17..0]
OD[17..0]
A2[17..0]
B2[17..0]
OE[17..0]
OF[17..0]
A3[17..0]
B3[17..0]
OG[17..0]
OH[17..0]
A4[17..0]
B4[17..0]
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–45
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Digital Signal Processing Block
Figure 2–30. DSP Block Interface to Interconnect
Direct Link Interconnect
from Adjacent LAB
C4 Interconnect
R4 Interconnect
Direct Link Outputs
to Adjacent LABs
Direct Link Interconnect
from Adjacent LAB
36
DSP Block
Row Structure
36
LAB
LAB
18
16
16
12
Control
36
A[17..0]
B[17..0]
OA[17..0]
OB[17..0]
36
Row Interface
Block
DSP Block to
LAB Row Interface
Block Interconnect Region
36 Inputs per Row
36 Outputs per Row
A bus of 44 control signals feeds the entire DSP block. These signals
include clocks, asynchronous clears, clock enables, signed/unsigned
control signals, addition and subtraction control signals, rounding and
saturation control signals, and accumulator synchronous loads. The clock
signals are routed from LAB row clocks and are generated from specific
LAB rows at the DSP block interface.
2–46
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
The LAB row source for control signals, data inputs, and outputs is
shown in Table 2–7.
Table 2–7. DSP Block Signal Sources & Destinations
LAB Row at
Interface
f
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Control Signals Generated
Data Inputs
Data Outputs
0
clock0
aclr0
ena0
mult01_saturate
addnsub1_round/ accum_round
addnsub1
signa
sourcea
sourceb
A1[17..0]
B1[17..0]
OA[17..0]
OB[17..0]
1
clock1
aclr1
ena1
accum_saturate
mult01_round
accum_sload
sourcea
sourceb
mode0
A2[17..0]
B2[17..0]
OC[17..0]
OD[17..0]
2
clock2
aclr2
ena2
mult23_saturate
addnsub3_round/ accum_round
addnsub3
sign_b
sourcea
sourceb
A3[17..0]
B3[17..0]
OE[17..0]
OF[17..0]
3
clock3
aclr3
ena3
accum_saturate
mult23_round
accum_sload
sourcea
sourceb
mode1
A4[17..0]
B4[17..0]
OG[17..0]
OH[17..0]
See the DSP Blocks in Stratix II & Stratix II GX Devices chapter in
volume 2 of the Stratix II Device Handbook or the Stratix II GX Device
Handbook, for more information on DSP blocks.
2–47
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
PLLs & Clock
Networks
Stratix II devices provide a hierarchical clock structure and multiple PLLs
with advanced features. The large number of clocking resources in
combination with the clock synthesis precision provided by enhanced
and fast PLLs provides a complete clock management solution.
Global & Hierarchical Clocking
Stratix II devices provide 16 dedicated global clock networks and
32 regional clock networks (eight per device quadrant). These clocks are
organized into a hierarchical clock structure that allows for up to
24 clocks per device region with low skew and delay. This hierarchical
clocking scheme provides up to 48 unique clock domains in Stratix II
devices.
There are 16 dedicated clock pins (CLK[15..0]) to drive either the global
or regional clock networks. Four clock pins drive each side of the device,
as shown in Figures 2–31 and 2–32. Internal logic and enhanced and fast
PLL outputs can also drive the global and regional clock networks. Each
global and regional clock has a clock control block, which controls the
selection of the clock source and dynamically enables/disables the clock
to reduce power consumption. Table 2–8 shows global and regional clock
features.
Table 2–8. Global & Regional Clock Features
Feature
Global Clocks
Regional Clocks
Number per device
16
32
Number available per
quadrant
16
8
Sources
Dynamic clock source
selection
Dynamic enable/disable
CLK pins, PLL outputs,
or internal logic
CLK pins, PLL outputs,
or internal logic
v (1)
v
v
Note to Table 2–8:
(1)
Dynamic source clock selection is supported for selecting between CLKp pins and
PLL outputs only.
Global Clock Network
These clocks drive throughout the entire device, feeding all device
quadrants. The global clock networks can be used as clock sources for all
resources in the device-IOEs, ALMs, DSP blocks, and all memory blocks.
These resources can also be used for control signals, such as clock enables
and synchronous or asynchronous clears fed from the external pin. The
2–48
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
global clock networks can also be driven by internal logic for internally
generated global clocks and asynchronous clears, clock enables, or other
control signals with large fanout. Figure 2–31 shows the 16 dedicated CLK
pins driving global clock networks.
Figure 2–31. Global Clocking
CLK[15..12]
Global Clock [15..0]
CLK[3..0]
Global Clock [15..0]
CLK[11..8]
CLK[7..4]
Regional Clock Network
There are eight regional clock networks RCLK[7..0] in each quadrant of
the Stratix II device that are driven by the dedicated CLK[15..0] input
pins, by PLL outputs, or by internal logic. The regional clock networks
provide the lowest clock delay and skew for logic contained in a single
quadrant. The CLK clock pins symmetrically drive the RCLK networks in
a particular quadrant, as shown in Figure 2–32.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–49
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
Figure 2–32. Regional Clocks
RCLK[31..28]
RCLK[27..24]
CLK[15..12]
RCLK[23..20]
RCLK[3..0]
CLK[3..0]
CLK[11..8]
RCLK[19..16]
RCLK[7..4]
CLK[7..4]
Regional Clocks Only Drive a Device
Quadrant from Specified CLK Pins,
PLLs or Core Logic within that Quadrant
RCLK[11..8]
RCLK[15..12]
Dual-Regional Clock Network
A single source (CLK pin or PLL output) can generate a dual-regional
clock by driving two regional clock network lines in adjacent quadrants
(one from each quadrant). This allows logic that spans multiple
quadrants to utilize the same low skew clock. The routing of this clock
signal on an entire side has approximately the same speed but slightly
higher clock skew when compared with a clock signal that drives a single
quadrant. Internal logic-array routing can also drive a dual-regional
clock. Clock pins and enhanced PLL outputs on the top and bottom can
drive horizontal dual-regional clocks. Clock pins and fast PLL outputs on
the left and right can drive vertical dual-regional clocks, as shown in
Figure 2–33. Corner PLLs cannot drive dual-regional clocks.
2–50
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–33. Dual-Regional Clocks
Clock Pins or PLL Clock Outputs
Can Drive Dual-Regional Network
CLK[15..12]
CLK[3..0]
Clock Pins or PLL Clock
Outputs Can Drive
Dual-Regional Network
CLK[3..0]
CLK[11..8]
PLLs
CLK[15..12]
CLK[11..8]
PLLs
CLK[7..4]
CLK[7..4]
Combined Resources
Within each quadrant, there are 24 distinct dedicated clocking resources
consisting of 16 global clock lines and eight regional clock lines.
Multiplexers are used with these clocks to form busses to drive LAB row
clocks, column IOE clocks, or row IOE clocks. Another multiplexer is
used at the LAB level to select three of the six row clocks to feed the ALM
registers in the LAB (see Figure 2–34).
Figure 2–34. Hierarchical Clock Networks Per Quadrant
Clocks Available
to a Quadrant
or Half-Quadrant
Column I/O Cell
IO_CLK[7..0]
Global Clock Network [15..0]
Clock [23..0]
Lab Row Clock [5..0]
Regional Clock Network [7..0]
Row I/O Cell
IO_CLK[7..0]
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–51
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
IOE clocks have row and column block regions that are clocked by eight
I/O clock signals chosen from the 24 quadrant clock resources.
Figures 2–35 and 2–36 show the quadrant relationship to the I/O clock
regions.
Figure 2–35. EP2S15 & EP2S30 Device I/O Clock Groups
IO_CLKA[7:0]
IO_CLKB[7:0]
8
8
I/O Clock Regions
8
24 Clocks in
the Quadrant
24 Clocks in
the Quadrant
IO_CLKH[7:0]
IO_CLKC[7:0]
8
8
IO_CLKG[7:0]
IO_CLKD[7:0]
24 Clocks in
the Quadrant
24 Clocks in
the Quadrant
8
8
8
IO_CLKF[7:0]
2–52
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
IO_CLKE[7:0]
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–36. EP2S60, EP2S90, EP2S130 & EP2S180 Device I/O Clock Groups
IO_CLKA[7:0]
IO_CLKB[7:0]
8
IO_CLKC[7:0]
8
IO_CLKD[7:0]
8
8
I/O Clock Regions
8
8
IO_CLKE[7:0]
IO_CLKP[7:0]
24 Clocks in the
Quadrant
24 Clocks in the
Quadrant
8
8
IO_CLKF[7:0]
IO_CLKO[7:0]
8
8
IO_CLKN[7:0]
IO_CLKG[7:0]
24 Clocks in the
Quadrant
24 Clocks in the
Quadrant
8
8
IO_CLKH[7:0]
IO_CLKM[7:0]
8
8
IO_CLKL[7:0]
8
IO_CLKK[7:0]
8
IO_CLKJ[7:0]
IO_CLKI[7:0]
You can use the Quartus II software to control whether a clock input pin
drives either a global, regional, or dual-regional clock network. The
Quartus II software automatically selects the clocking resources if not
specified.
Clock Control Block
Each global clock, regional clock, and PLL external clock output has its
own clock control block. The control block has two functions:
■
■
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Clock source selection (dynamic selection for global clocks)
Clock power-down (dynamic clock enable/disable)
2–53
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
1
When using the global or regional clock control blocks in
Stratix II devices to select between multiple clocks or to enable
and disable clock networks, be aware of possible narrow pulses
or glitches when switching from one clock signal to another. A
glitch or runt pulse has a width that is less than the width of the
highest frequency input clock signal. To prevent logic errors
within the FPGA, Altera recommends that you build circuits
that filter out glitches and runt pulses.
Figures 2–37 through 2–39 show the clock control block for the global
clock, regional clock, and PLL external clock output, respectively.
Figure 2–37. Global Clock Control Blocks
CLKp
Pins
PLL Counter
Outputs
CLKSELECT[1..0]
(1)
2
2
CLKn
Pin
2
This multiplexer supports
User-Controllable
Dynamic Switching
Internal
Logic
Static Clock Select (2)
Enable/
Disable
Internal
Logic
GCLK
Notes to Figure 2–37:
(1)
(2)
These clock select signals can be dynamically controlled through internal logic
when the device is operating in user mode.
These clock select signals can only be set through a configuration file (.sof or .pof)
and cannot be dynamically controlled during user mode operation.
2–54
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–38. Regional Clock Control Blocks
CLKp
Pin
PLL Counter
Outputs (3)
CLKn
Pin (2)
2
Internal
Logic
Static Clock Select (1)
Enable/
Disable
Internal
Logic
RCLK
Notes to Figure 2–38:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Altera Corporation
May 2007
These clock select signals can only be set through a configuration file (.sof or .pof)
and cannot be dynamically controlled during user mode operation.
Only the CLKn pins on the top and bottom of the device feed to regional clock select
blocks.The clock outputs from corner PLLs cannot be dynamically selected
through the global clock control block.
The clock outputs from corner PLLs cannot be dynamically selected through the
global clock control block.
2–55
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
Figure 2–39. External PLL Output Clock Control Blocks
PLL Counter
Outputs (c[5..0])
6
Static Clock Select (1)
Enable/
Disable
Internal
Logic
IOE (2)
Internal
Logic
Static Clock
Select (1)
PLL_OUT
Pin
Notes to Figure 2–39:
(1)
(2)
These clock select signals can only be set through a configuration file (.sof or .pof)
and cannot be dynamically controlled during user mode operation.
The clock control block feeds to a multiplexer within the PLL_OUT pin’s IOE. The
PLL_OUT pin is a dual-purpose pin. Therefore, this multiplexer selects either an
internal signal or the output of the clock control block.
For the global clock control block, the clock source selection can be
controlled either statically or dynamically. The user has the option of
statically selecting the clock source by using the Quartus II software to set
specific configuration bits in the configuration file (.sof or .pof) or the
user can control the selection dynamically by using internal logic to drive
the multiplexor select inputs. When selecting statically, the clock source
can be set to any of the inputs to the select multiplexor. When selecting
the clock source dynamically, you can either select between two PLL
outputs (such as the C0 or C1 outputs from one PLL), between two PLLs
(such as the C0/C1 clock output of one PLL or the C0/C1 c1ock output of
the other PLL), between two clock pins (such as CLK0 or CLK1), or
between a combination of clock pins or PLL outputs. The clock outputs
from corner PLLs cannot be dynamically selected through the global
control block.
For the regional and PLL_OUT clock control block, the clock source
selection can only be controlled statically using configuration bits. Any of
the inputs to the clock select multiplexor can be set as the clock source.
2–56
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
The Stratix II clock networks can be disabled (powered down) by both
static and dynamic approaches. When a clock net is powered down, all
the logic fed by the clock net is in an off-state thereby reducing the overall
power consumption of the device.
The global and regional clock networks can be powered down statically
through a setting in the configuration (.sof or .pof) file. Clock networks
that are not used are automatically powered down through configuration
bit settings in the configuration file generated by the Quartus II software.
The dynamic clock enable/disable feature allows the internal logic to
control power up/down synchronously on GCLK and RCLK nets and
PLL_OUT pins. This function is independent of the PLL and is applied
directly on the clock network or PLL_OUT pin, as shown in Figures 2–37
through 2–39.
1
The following restrictions for the input clock pins apply:
•
•
•
•
CLK0
CLK1
CLK2
CLK3
pin
pin
pin
pin
->
->
->
->
inclk[0]
inclk[1]
inclk[0]
inclk[1]
of
of
of
of
CLKCTRL
CLKCTRL
CLKCTRL
CLKCTRL
In general, even CLK numbers connect to the inclk[0] port of
CLKCTRL, and odd CLK numbers connect to the inclk[1] port
of CLKCTRL.
Failure to comply with these restrictions will result in a no-fit
error.
Enhanced & Fast PLLs
Stratix II devices provide robust clock management and synthesis using
up to four enhanced PLLs and eight fast PLLs. These PLLs increase
performance and provide advanced clock interfacing and clockfrequency synthesis. With features such as clock switchover,
spread-spectrum clocking, reconfigurable bandwidth, phase control, and
reconfigurable phase shifting, the Stratix II device’s enhanced PLLs
provide you with complete control of clocks and system timing. The fast
PLLs provide general purpose clocking with multiplication and phase
shifting as well as high-speed outputs for high-speed differential I/O
support. Enhanced and fast PLLs work together with the Stratix II
high-speed I/O and advanced clock architecture to provide significant
improvements in system performance and bandwidth.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–57
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
The Quartus II software enables the PLLs and their features without
requiring any external devices. Table 2–9 shows the PLLs available for
each Stratix II device and their type.
Table 2–9. Stratix II Device PLL Availability
Fast PLLs
Enhanced PLLs
Device
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
5
6
11
12
EP2S15
v
v
v
v
EP2S30
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
EP2S60 (1)
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
EP2S90 (2)
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
EP2S130 (3)
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
EP2S180
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Notes to Table 2–9:
(1)
(2)
(3)
EP2S60 devices in the 1020-pin package contain 12 PLLs. EP2S60 devices in the 484-pin and 672-pin packages
contain fast PLLs 1–4 and enhanced PLLs 5 and 6.
EP2S90 devices in the 1020-pin and 1508-pin packages contain 12 PLLs. EP2S90 devices in the 484-pin and 780-pin
packages contain fast PLLS 1–4 and enhanced PLLs 5 and 6.
EP2S130 devices in the 1020-pin and 1508-pin packages contain 12PLLs. The EP2S130 device in the 780-pin package
contains fast PLLs 1–4 and enhanced PLLs 5 and 6.
2–58
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Table 2–10 shows the enhanced PLL and fast PLL features in Stratix II
devices.
Table 2–10. Stratix II PLL Features
Feature
Enhanced PLL
Fast PLL
Clock multiplication and division
m/(n × post-scale counter) (1)
m/(n × post-scale counter) (2)
Down to 125-ps increments (3), (4)
Down to 125-ps increments (3), (4)
Clock switchover
v
v (5)
PLL reconfiguration
v
v
Reconfigurable bandwidth
v
v
Spread spectrum clocking
v
Programmable duty cycle
v
v
Number of internal clock outputs
6
4
Number of external clock outputs
Three differential/six single-ended
(6)
Number of feedback clock inputs
One single-ended or differential
(7), (8)
Phase shift
Notes to Table 2–10:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
For enhanced PLLs, m ranges from 1 to 256, while n and post-scale counters range from 1 to 512 with 50% duty
cycle.
For fast PLLs, m, and post-scale counters range from 1 to 32. The n counter ranges from 1 to 4.
The smallest phase shift is determined by the voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) period divided by 8.
For degree increments, Stratix II devices can shift all output frequencies in increments of at least 45. Smaller degree
increments are possible depending on the frequency and divide parameters.
Stratix II fast PLLs only support manual clock switchover.
Fast PLLs can drive to any I/O pin as an external clock. For high-speed differential I/O pins, the device uses a data
channel to generate txclkout.
If the feedback input is used, you lose one (or two, if FBIN is differential) external clock output pin.
Every Stratix II device has at least two enhanced PLLs with one single-ended or differential external feedback input
per PLL.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–59
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
Figure 2–40 shows a top-level diagram of the Stratix II device and PLL
floorplan.
Figure 2–40. PLL Locations
CLK[15..12]
11
5
FPLL7CLK
7
10
FPLL10CLK
CLK[3..0]
1
2
4
3
CLK[8..11]
8
9
FPLL9CLK
PLLs
FPLL8CLK
12
6
CLK[7..4]
Figures 2–41 and 2–42 shows the global and regional clocking from the
fast PLL outputs and the side clock pins.
2–60
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
CLK8
C2
C2
RCK19
RCK17
RCK22
C3
CLK3
Fast
PLL 2
CLK2
CLK1
CLK0
Fast
PLL 1
RCK0
RCK1
RCK2
RCK3
RCK4
RCK5
RCK6
RCK7
GCK0
GCK1
GCK2
GCK3
Logic Array
Signal Input
To Clock
Network
GCK8
GCK9
GCK10
GCK11
RCK16
RCK18
RCK20
RCK21
RCK23
C1
C1
C3
C0
C0
Fast
PLL 3
CLK9
CLK10
C3
C3
C1
C2
C0
C1
C2
C0
Fast
PLL 4
CLK11
Figure 2–41. Global & Regional Clock Connections from Center Clock Pins &
Fast PLL Outputs
Note (1)
Notes to Figure 2–41:
(1)
(2)
Altera Corporation
May 2007
EP2S15 and EP2S30 devices only have four fast PLLs (1, 2, 3, and 4), but the
connectivity from these four PLLs to the global and regional clock networks
remains the same as shown.
The global or regional clocks in a fast PLL's quadrant can drive the fast PLL input.
The global or regional clock input can be driven by an output from another PLL, a
pin-driven dedicated global or regional clock, or through a clock control block,
provided the clock control block is fed by an output from another PLL or a
pin-driven dedicated global or regional clock. An internally generated global
signal cannot drive the PLL.
2–61
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
FPLL9CLK
C1
C1
RCK19
RCK17
Fast
PLL 8
FPLL8CLK
FPLL7CLK
Fast
PLL 7
RCK0
RCK4
RCK1
RCK5
RCK2
RCK6
RCK3
RCK7
GCK0
GCK1
GCK2
GCK3
GCK8
GCK9
GCK10
GCK11
RCK16
RCK18
C0
C0
C3
C3
C3
C3
C2
C2
C1
C2
C2
C0
C1
RCK21
RCK20
RCK22
RCK23
C0
Fast
PLL 9
Fast
PLL 10
FPLL10CLK
Figure 2–42. Global & Regional Clock Connections from Corner Clock Pins &
Fast PLL Outputs
Note (1)
Note to Figure 2–42:
(1)
The corner fast PLLs can also be driven through the global or regional clock
networks. The global or regional clock input can be driven by an output from
another PLL, a pin-driven dedicated global or regional clock, or through a clock
control block, provided the clock control block is fed by an output from another
PLL or a pin-driven dedicated global or regional clock. An internally generated
global signal cannot drive the PLL.
2–62
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–43 shows the global and regional clocking from enhanced PLL
outputs and top and bottom CLK pins. The connections to the global and
regional clocks from the top clock pins and enhanced PLL outputs is
shown in Table 2–11. The connections to the clocks from the bottom clock
pins is shown in Table 2–12.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–63
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
Figure 2–43. Global & Regional Clock Connections from Top & Bottom Clock Pins & Enhanced PLL Outputs
Notes (1), (2), and (3)
CLK15
CLK13
CLK12
CLK14
PLL5_FB
PLL11_FB
PLL 11
PLL 5
c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5
c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5
PLL5_OUT[2..0]p
PLL5_OUT[2..0]n
RCLK31
RCLK30
RCLK29
RCLK28
PLL11_OUT[2..0]p
PLL11_OUT[2..0]n
Regional
Clocks
RCLK27
RCLK26
RCLK25
RCLK24
G15
G14
G13
G12
Global
Clocks
Regional
Clocks
G4
G5
G6
G7
RCLK8
RCLK9
RCLK10
RCLK11
RCLK12
RCLK13
RCLK14
RCLK15
PLL6_OUT[2..0]p
PLL6_OUT[2..0]n
PLL12_OUT[2..0]p
PLL12_OUT[2..0]n
c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5
c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5
PLL 12
PLL 6
PLL12_FB
PLL6_FB
CLK4
CLK6
CLK5
CLK7
Notes to Figure 2–43:
(1)
(2)
(3)
EP2S15 and EP2S30 devices only have two enhanced PLLs (5 and 6), but the connectivity from these two PLLs to
the global and regional clock networks remains the same as shown.
If the design uses the feedback input, you lose one (or two, if FBIN is differential) external clock output pin.
The enhanced PLLs can also be driven through the global or regional clock netowrks. The global or regional clock
input can be driven by an output from another PLL, a pin-driven dedicated global or regional clock, or through a
clock control block provided the clock control block is fed by an output from another PLL or a pin-driven dedicated
global or regional clock. An internally generated global signal cannot drive the PLL.
2–64
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
CLK15p
v
v
v
RCLK31
v
(Part 1
RCLK30
v
RCLK29
v
RCLK28
v
v
RCLK27
v
CLK14p
RCLK26
v
RCLK25
v
RCLK24
CLK13
v
CLK13p
CLK15
CLK12
CLK12p
Top Side Global & Regional
Clock Network Connectivity
CLK14
DLLCLK
Table 2–11. Global & Regional Clock Connections from Top Clock Pins & Enhanced PLL Outputs
of 2)
Clock pins
v
v
v
CLK12n
v
v
v
v
v
v
CLK13n
v
v
v
v
CLK14n
v
v
v
v
CLK15n
v
v
v
Drivers from internal logic
v
GCLKDRV0
v
GCLKDRV1
v
GCLKDRV2
v
GCLKDRV3
v
RCLKDRV0
v
v
RCLKDRV1
v
v
RCLKDRV2
v
v
RCLKDRV3
v
RCLKDRV4
v
v
v
RCLKDRV5
v
v
RCLKDRV6
v
v
RCLKDRV7
v
Enhanced PLL 5 outputs
c0
v
v
v
c1
v
v
v
c2
v
v
v
c3
v
v
v
Altera Corporation
May 2007
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
2–65
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
v
v
v
v
v
RCLK31
(Part 2
RCLK30
RCLK29
RCLK28
RCLK27
RCLK26
RCLK25
RCLK24
CLK15
v
CLK14
v
c5
CLK13
c4
CLK12
Top Side Global & Regional
Clock Network Connectivity
DLLCLK
Table 2–11. Global & Regional Clock Connections from Top Clock Pins & Enhanced PLL Outputs
of 2)
v
v
v
Enhanced PLL 11 outputs
c0
v
v
c1
v
v
v
v
v
c2
v
v
c3
v
v
v
v
v
v
c4
v
v
v
c5
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
RCLK15
v
CLK7p
RCLK14
v
RCLK13
v
RCLK12
v
CLK6p
RCLK11
v
RCLK10
v
RCLK9
CLK5
v
CLK5p
CLK7
CLK4
CLK4p
CLK6
DLLCLK
Bottom Side Global &
Regional Clock Network
Connectivity
RCLK8
Table 2–12. Global & Regional Clock Connections from Bottom Clock Pins & Enhanced PLL
Outputs
(Part 1 of 2)
Clock pins
CLK4n
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
CLK5n
v
v
v
v
CLK6n
v
v
v
CLK7n
v
v
v
v
Drivers from internal logic
GCLKDRV0
v
GCLKDRV1
GCLKDRV2
2–66
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
v
v
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
RCLK15
RCLK14
RCLK13
RCLK12
RCLK11
RCLK10
RCLK9
RCLK8
CLK7
CLK6
CLK5
CLK4
Bottom Side Global &
Regional Clock Network
Connectivity
DLLCLK
Table 2–12. Global & Regional Clock Connections from Bottom Clock Pins & Enhanced PLL
Outputs
(Part 2 of 2)
v
GCLKDRV3
v
RCLKDRV0
v
v
RCLKDRV1
v
v
RCLKDRV2
v
v
RCLKDRV3
v
RCLKDRV4
v
v
v
RCLKDRV5
v
v
RCLKDRV6
v
v
RCLKDRV7
v
Enhanced PLL 6 outputs
c0
v
v
v
c1
v
v
v
v
c2
v
v
v
c3
v
v
v
c4
v
c5
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Enhanced PLL 12 outputs
c0
v
v
c1
v
v
v
v
c2
v
v
c3
v
v
c4
c5
Altera Corporation
May 2007
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
2–67
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLLs & Clock Networks
Enhanced PLLs
Stratix II devices contain up to four enhanced PLLs with advanced clock
management features. Figure 2–44 shows a diagram of the enhanced PLL.
Figure 2–44. Stratix II Enhanced PLL Note (1)
From Adjacent PLL
VCO Phase Selection
Selectable at Each
PLL Output Port
Clock
Switchover
Circuitry
Post-Scale
Counters
Spread
Spectrum
Phase Frequency
Detector
/c0
INCLK[3..0]
/c1
4
/n
PFD
Charge
Pump
Loop
Filter
8
VCO
Global or
Regional
Clock (4)
4
Global
Clocks
8
Regional
Clocks
/c2
6
/c3
6
/m
I/O Buffers (3)
/c4
(2)
/c5
FBIN
Shaded Portions of the
PLL are Reconfigurable
Lock Detect
& Filter
to I/O or general
routing
VCO Phase Selection
Affecting All Outputs
Notes to Figure 2–44:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Each clock source can come from any of the four clock pins that are physically located on the same side of the device
as the PLL.
If the feedback input is used, you lose one (or two, if FBIN is differential) external clock output pin.
Each enhanced PLL has three differential external clock outputs or six single-ended external clock outputs.
The global or regional clock input can be driven by an output from another PLL, a pin-driven dedicated global or
regional clock, or through a clock control block, provided the clock control block is fed by an output from another
PLL or a pin-driven dedicated global or regional clock. An internally generated global signal cannot drive the PLL.
2–68
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Fast PLLs
Stratix II devices contain up to eight fast PLLs with high-speed serial
interfacing ability. Figure 2–45 shows a diagram of the fast PLL.
Figure 2–45. Stratix II Device Fast PLL
Clock
Switchover
Circuitry (4)
Global or
regional clock (1)
Notes (1), (2), (3)
VCO Phase Selection
Selectable at each PLL
Output Port
Phase
Frequency
Detector
Post-Scale
Counters
diffioclk0 (2)
load_en0 (3)
÷c0
(5)
Clock
Input
÷n
4
PFD
Charge
Pump
Loop
Filter
VCO
÷k
8
load_en1 (3)
÷c1
diffioclk1 (2)
4
Global clocks
÷c2
4
Global or
regional clock (1)
8
Regional clocks
÷c3
÷m
8
to DPA block
Shaded Portions of the
PLL are Reconfigurable
Notes to Figure 2–45:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
The global or regional clock input can be driven by an output from another PLL, a pin-driven dedicated global or
regional clock, or through a clock control block, provided the clock control block is fed by an output from another
PLL or a pin-driven dedicated global or regional clock. An internally generated global signal cannot drive the PLL.
In high-speed differential I/O support mode, this high-speed PLL clock feeds the SERDES circuitry. Stratix II
devices only support one rate of data transfer per fast PLL in high-speed differential I/O support mode.
This signal is a differential I/O SERDES control signal.
Stratix II fast PLLs only support manual clock switchover.
If the design enables this ÷2 counter, then the device can use a VCO frequency range of 150 to 520 MHz.
f
I/O Structure
See the PLLs in Stratix II & Stratix II GX Devices chapter in volume 2 of
the Stratix II Device Handbook or the Stratix II GX Device Handbook for
more information on enhanced and fast PLLs. See “High-Speed
Differential I/O with DPA Support” on page 2–96 for more information
on high-speed differential I/O support.
The Stratix II IOEs provide many features, including:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Dedicated differential and single-ended I/O buffers
3.3-V, 64-bit, 66-MHz PCI compliance
3.3-V, 64-bit, 133-MHz PCI-X 1.0 compliance
Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) boundary-scan test (BST) support
On-chip driver series termination
On-chip parallel termination
On-chip termination for differential standards
Programmable pull-up during configuration
2–69
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Output drive strength control
Tri-state buffers
Bus-hold circuitry
Programmable pull-up resistors
Programmable input and output delays
Open-drain outputs
DQ and DQS I/O pins
Double data rate (DDR) registers
The IOE in Stratix II devices contains a bidirectional I/O buffer, six
registers, and a latch for a complete embedded bidirectional single data
rate or DDR transfer. Figure 2–46 shows the Stratix II IOE structure. The
IOE contains two input registers (plus a latch), two output registers, and
two output enable registers. The design can use both input registers and
the latch to capture DDR input and both output registers to drive DDR
outputs. Additionally, the design can use the output enable (OE) register
for fast clock-to-output enable timing. The negative edge-clocked OE
register is used for DDR SDRAM interfacing. The Quartus II software
automatically duplicates a single OE register that controls multiple
output or bidirectional pins.
2–70
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–46. Stratix II IOE Structure
Logic Array
OE Register
OE
D
Q
OE Register
D
Q
Output Register
Output A
D
Q
CLK
Output Register
Output B
D
Q
Input Register
D
Q
Input A
Input B
Input Register
D
Q
Input Latch
D
Q
ENA
The IOEs are located in I/O blocks around the periphery of the Stratix II
device. There are up to four IOEs per row I/O block and four IOEs per
column I/O block. The row I/O blocks drive row, column, or direct link
interconnects. The column I/O blocks drive column interconnects.
Figure 2–47 shows how a row I/O block connects to the logic array.
Figure 2–48 shows how a column I/O block connects to the logic array.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–71
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
Figure 2–47. Row I/O Block Connection to the Interconnect Note (1)
R4 & R24
Interconnects
C4 Interconnect
I/O Block Local
Interconnect
32 Data & Control
Signals from
Logic Array (1)
32
LAB
Horizontal
I/O Block
io_dataina[3..0]
io_datainb[3..0]
Direct Link
Interconnect
to Adjacent LAB
Direct Link
Interconnect
to Adjacent LAB
io_clk[7:0]
LAB Local
Interconnect
Horizontal I/O
Block Contains
up to Four IOEs
Note to Figure 2–47:
(1)
The 32 data and control signals consist of eight data out lines: four lines each for DDR applications
io_dataouta[3..0] and io_dataoutb[3..0], four output enables io_oe[3..0], four input clock enables
io_ce_in[3..0], four output clock enables io_ce_out[3..0], four clocks io_clk[3..0], four asynchronous
clear and preset signals io_aclr/apreset[3..0], and four synchronous clear and preset signals
io_sclr/spreset[3..0].
2–72
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–48. Column I/O Block Connection to the Interconnect Note (1)
32 Data &
Control Signals
from Logic Array (1)
Vertical I/O
Block Contains
up to Four IOEs
Vertical I/O Block
32
IO_dataina[3:0]
IO_datainb[3:0]
io_clk[7..0]
I/O Block
Local Interconnect
R4 & R24
Interconnects
LAB
LAB Local
Interconnect
LAB
LAB
C4 & C16
Interconnects
Note to Figure 2–48:
(1)
The 32 data and control signals consist of eight data out lines: four lines each for DDR applications
io_dataouta[3..0] and io_dataoutb[3..0], four output enables io_oe[3..0], four input clock enables
io_ce_in[3..0], four output clock enables io_ce_out[3..0], four clocks io_clk[3..0], four asynchronous
clear and preset signals io_aclr/apreset[3..0], and four synchronous clear and preset signals
io_sclr/spreset[3..0].
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–73
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
There are 32 control and data signals that feed each row or column I/O
block. These control and data signals are driven from the logic array. The
row or column IOE clocks, io_clk[7..0], provide a dedicated routing
resource for low-skew, high-speed clocks. I/O clocks are generated from
global or regional clocks (see the “PLLs & Clock Networks” section).
Figure 2–49 illustrates the signal paths through the I/O block.
Figure 2–49. Signal Path through the I/O Block
Row or Column
io_clk[7..0]
To Logic
Array
To Other
IOEs
io_dataina
io_datainb
oe
ce_in
io_oe
ce_out
io_ce_in
io_ce_out
Control
Signal
Selection
aclr/apreset
IOE
sclr/spreset
io_aclr
From Logic
Array
clk_in
io_sclr
clk_out
io_clk
io_dataouta
io_dataoutb
Each IOE contains its own control signal selection for the following
control signals: oe, ce_in, ce_out, aclr/apreset, sclr/spreset,
clk_in, and clk_out. Figure 2–50 illustrates the control signal
selection.
2–74
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–50. Control Signal Selection per IOE
Dedicated I/O
Clock [7..0]
Local
Interconnect
io_oe
Local
Interconnect
io_sclr
Local
Interconnect
io_aclr
Local
Interconnect
io_ce_out
Local
Interconnect
io_ce_in
Local
Interconnect
io_clk
ce_out
clk_out
clk_in
ce_in
sclr/spreset
aclr/apreset
oe
Notes to Figure 2–50:
(1)
Control signals ce_in, ce_out, aclr/apreset, sclr/spreset, and oe can be global signals even though their
control selection multiplexers are not directly fed by the ioe_clk[7..0] signals. The ioe_clk signals can drive
the I/O local interconnect, which then drives the control selection multiplexers.
In normal bidirectional operation, the input register can be used for input
data requiring fast setup times. The input register can have its own clock
input and clock enable separate from the OE and output registers. The
output register can be used for data requiring fast clock-to-output
performance. The OE register can be used for fast clock-to-output enable
timing. The OE and output register share the same clock source and the
same clock enable source from local interconnect in the associated LAB,
dedicated I/O clocks, and the column and row interconnects.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–75
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
Figure 2–51 shows the IOE in bidirectional configuration.
Figure 2–51. Stratix II IOE in Bidirectional I/O Configuration Note (1)
ioe_clk[7..0]
Column, Row,
or Local
Interconnect
oe
OE Register
D
Q
clkout
ce_out
ENA
CLRN/PRN
OE Register
tCO Delay
VCCIO
PCI Clamp (2)
VCCIO
Programmable
Pull-Up
Resistor
aclr/apreset
Chip-Wide Reset
Output Register
D
sclr/spreset
Q
Output
Pin Delay
On-Chip
Termination
Drive Strength Control
ENA
Open-Drain Output
CLRN/PRN
Input Pin to
Logic Array Delay
Input Register
clkin
ce_in
D
Input Pin to
Input Register Delay
Bus-Hold
Circuit
Q
ENA
CLRN/PRN
Notes to Figure 2–51:
(1)
(2)
All input signals to the IOE can be inverted at the IOE.
The optional PCI clamp is only available on column I/O pins.
2–76
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
The Stratix II device IOE includes programmable delays that can be
activated to ensure input IOE register-to-logic array register transfers,
input pin-to-logic array register transfers, or output IOE register-to-pin
transfers.
A path in which a pin directly drives a register may require the delay to
ensure zero hold time, whereas a path in which a pin drives a register
through combinational logic may not require the delay. Programmable
delays exist for decreasing input-pin-to-logic-array and IOE input
register delays. The Quartus II Compiler can program these delays to
automatically minimize setup time while providing a zero hold time.
Programmable delays can increase the register-to-pin delays for output
and/or output enable registers. Programmable delays are no longer
required to ensure zero hold times for logic array register-to-IOE register
transfers. The Quartus II Compiler can create the zero hold time for these
transfers. Table 2–13 shows the programmable delays for Stratix II
devices.
Table 2–13. Stratix II Programmable Delay Chain
Programmable Delays
Quartus II Logic Option
Input pin to logic array delay
Input delay from pin to internal cells
Input pin to input register delay
Input delay from pin to input register
Output pin delay
Delay from output register to output pin
Output enable register tCO delay
Delay to output enable pin
The IOE registers in Stratix II devices share the same source for clear or
preset. You can program preset or clear for each individual IOE. You can
also program the registers to power up high or low after configuration is
complete. If programmed to power up low, an asynchronous clear can
control the registers. If programmed to power up high, an asynchronous
preset can control the registers. This feature prevents the inadvertent
activation of another device's active-low input upon power-up. If one
register in an IOE uses a preset or clear signal then all registers in the IOE
must use that same signal if they require preset or clear. Additionally, a
synchronous reset signal is available for the IOE registers.
Double Data Rate I/O Pins
Stratix II devices have six registers in the IOE, which support DDR
interfacing by clocking data on both positive and negative clock edges.
The IOEs in Stratix II devices support DDR inputs, DDR outputs, and
bidirectional DDR modes.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–77
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
When using the IOE for DDR inputs, the two input registers clock double
rate input data on alternating edges. An input latch is also used in the IOE
for DDR input acquisition. The latch holds the data that is present during
the clock high times. This allows both bits of data to be synchronous with
the same clock edge (either rising or falling). Figure 2–52 shows an IOE
configured for DDR input. Figure 2–53 shows the DDR input timing
diagram.
Figure 2–52. Stratix II IOE in DDR Input I/O Configuration Notes (1), (2), (3)
ioe_clk[7..0]
Column, Row,
or Local
Interconnect
VCCIO
To DQS Logic
Block (3)
DQS Local
Bus (2)
PCI Clamp (4)
VCCIO
Programmable
Pull-Up
Resistor
On-Chip
Termination
Input Pin to
Input RegisterDelay
sclr/spreset
Input Register
D
Q
clkin
ce_in
ENA
CLRN/PRN
Bus-Hold
Circuit
aclr/apreset
Chip-Wide Reset
Latch
Input Register
D
Q
ENA
CLRN/PRN
D
Q
ENA
CLRN/PRN
Notes to Figure 2–52:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
All input signals to the IOE can be inverted at the IOE.
This signal connection is only allowed on dedicated DQ function pins.
This signal is for dedicated DQS function pins only.
The optional PCI clamp is only available on column I/O pins.
2–78
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–53. Input Timing Diagram in DDR Mode
Data at
input pin
B0
A0
B1
A1
B2
A2
B3
A3
B4
CLK
A0
A1
A2
A3
B0
B1
B2
B3
Input To
Logic Array
When using the IOE for DDR outputs, the two output registers are
configured to clock two data paths from ALMs on rising clock edges.
These output registers are multiplexed by the clock to drive the output
pin at a ×2 rate. One output register clocks the first bit out on the clock
high time, while the other output register clocks the second bit out on the
clock low time. Figure 2–54 shows the IOE configured for DDR output.
Figure 2–55 shows the DDR output timing diagram.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–79
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
Figure 2–54. Stratix II IOE in DDR Output I/O Configuration Notes (1), (2)
ioe_clk[7..0]
Column, Row,
or Local
Interconnect
oe
OE Register
D
Q
clkout
ENA
CLRN/PRN
OE Register
tCO Delay
ce_out
aclr/apreset
VCCIO
PCI Clamp (3)
Chip-Wide Reset
OE Register
D
VCCIO
Q
sclr/spreset
ENA
CLRN/PRN
Used for
DDR, DDR2
SDRAM
Programmable
Pull-Up
Resistor
Output Register
D
Q
ENA
CLRN/PRN
Output Register
D
Output
Pin Delay
On-Chip
Termination
clk
Drive Strength
Control
Open-Drain Output
Q
ENA
CLRN/PRN
Bus-Hold
Circuit
Notes to Figure 2–54:
(1)
(2)
(3)
All input signals to the IOE can be inverted at the IOE.
The tri-state buffer is active low. The DDIO megafunction represents the tri-state buffer as active-high with an
inverter at the OE register data port. Similarly, the aclr and apreset signals are also active-high at the input ports
of the DDIO megafunction.
The optional PCI clamp is only available on column I/O pins.
2–80
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–55. Output TIming Diagram in DDR Mode
CLK
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
B3
B4
From Internal
Registers
B1
DDR output
A1
B2
A2
B3
A3
B4
A4
The Stratix II IOE operates in bidirectional DDR mode by combining the
DDR input and DDR output configurations. The negative-edge-clocked
OE register holds the OE signal inactive until the falling edge of the clock.
This is done to meet DDR SDRAM timing requirements.
External RAM Interfacing
In addition to the six I/O registers in each IOE, Stratix II devices also have
dedicated phase-shift circuitry for interfacing with external memory
interfaces. Stratix II devices support DDR and DDR2 SDRAM, QDR II
SRAM, RLDRAM II, and SDR SDRAM memory interfaces. In every
Stratix II device, the I/O banks at the top (banks 3 and 4) and bottom
(banks 7 and 8) of the device support DQ and DQS signals with DQ bus
modes of ×4, ×8/×9, ×16/×18, or ×32/×36. Table 2–14 shows the number
of DQ and DQS buses that are supported per device.
Table 2–14. DQS & DQ Bus Mode Support (Part 1 of 2)
Number of
×4 Groups
Number of
×8/×9 Groups
484-pin FineLine BGA
8
4
0
0
672-pin FineLine BGA
18
8
4
0
484-pin FineLine BGA
8
4
0
0
672-pin FineLine BGA
18
8
4
0
484-pin FineLine BGA
8
4
0
0
672-pin FineLine BGA
18
8
4
0
1,020-pin FineLine BGA
36
18
8
4
Device
EP2S15
EP2S30
EP2S60
Note (1)
Package
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Number of
Number of
×16/×18 Groups ×32/×36 Groups
2–81
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
Table 2–14. DQS & DQ Bus Mode Support (Part 2 of 2)
Note (1)
Device
Package
Number of
×4 Groups
Number of
×8/×9 Groups
EP2S90
484-pin Hybrid FineLine BGA
8
4
Number of
Number of
×16/×18 Groups ×32/×36 Groups
0
0
780-pin FineLine BGA
18
8
4
0
1,020-pin FineLine BGA
36
18
8
4
1,508-pin FineLine BGA
36
18
8
4
18
8
4
0
1,020-pin FineLine BGA
36
18
8
4
1,508-pin FineLine BGA
36
18
8
4
EP2S180 1,020-pin FineLine BGA
36
18
8
4
1,508-pin FineLine BGA
36
18
8
4
EP2S130 780-pin FineLine BGA
Notes to Table 2–14:
(1)
Check the pin table for each DQS/DQ group in the different modes.
A compensated delay element on each DQS pin automatically aligns
input DQS synchronization signals with the data window of their
corresponding DQ data signals. The DQS signals drive a local DQS bus in
the top and bottom I/O banks. This DQS bus is an additional resource to
the I/O clocks and is used to clock DQ input registers with the DQS
signal.
The Stratix II device has two phase-shifting reference circuits, one on the
top and one on the bottom of the device. The circuit on the top controls
the compensated delay elements for all DQS pins on the top. The circuit
on the bottom controls the compensated delay elements for all DQS pins
on the bottom.
Each phase-shifting reference circuit is driven by a system reference clock,
which must have the same frequency as the DQS signal. Clock pins
CLK[15..12]p feed the phase circuitry on the top of the device and
clock pins CLK[7..4]p feed the phase circuitry on the bottom of the
device. In addition, PLL clock outputs can also feed the phase-shifting
reference circuits.
Figure 2–56 illustrates the phase-shift reference circuit control of each
DQS delay shift on the top of the device. This same circuit is duplicated
on the bottom of the device.
2–82
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–56. DQS Phase-Shift Circuitry Notes (1), (2), (3), (4)
From PLL 5 (3)
DQSn
Pin
DQS
Pin
DQSn
Pin
DQS
Pin
Δt
Δt
Δt
Δt
to IOE
to IOE
to IOE
to IOE
CLK[15..12]p (2)
DQS
Phase-Shift
Circuitry
DQS
Pin
DQSn
Pin
DQS
Pin
DQSn
Pin
Δt
Δt
Δt
Δt
to IOE
to IOE
to IOE
to IOE
DQS Logic
Blocks
Notes to Figure 2–56:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
There are up to 18 pairs of DQS and DQSn pins available on the top or the bottom of the Stratix II device. There are
up to 10 pairs on the right side and 8 pairs on the left side of the DQS phase-shift circuitry.
The Δt module represents the DQS logic block.
Clock pins CLK[15..12]p feed the phase-shift circuitry on the top of the device and clock pins CLK[7..4]p feed
the phase circuitry on the bottom of the device. You can also use a PLL clock output as a reference clock to the phaseshift circuitry.
You can only use PLL 5 to feed the DQS phase-shift circuitry on the top of the device and PLL 6 to feed the DQS
phase-shift circuitry on the bottom of the device.
These dedicated circuits combined with enhanced PLL clocking and
phase-shift ability provide a complete hardware solution for interfacing
to high-speed memory.
f
For more information on external memory interfaces, refer to the
External Memory Interfaces in Stratix II & Stratix II GX Devices chapter in
volume 2 of the Stratix II Device Handbook or the Stratix II GX Device
Handbook.
Programmable Drive Strength
The output buffer for each Stratix II device I/O pin has a programmable
drive strength control for certain I/O standards. The LVTTL, LVCMOS,
SSTL, and HSTL standards have several levels of drive strength that the
user can control. The default setting used in the Quartus II software is the
maximum current strength setting that is used to achieve maximum I/O
performance. For all I/O standards, the minimum setting is the lowest
drive strength that guarantees the IOH/IOL of the standard. Using
minimum settings provides signal slew rate control to reduce system
noise and signal overshoot.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–83
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
Table 2–15 shows the possible settings for the I/O standards with drive
strength control.
Table 2–15. Programmable Drive Strength Note (1)
IOH / IOL Current Strength
Setting (mA) for Column
I/O Pins
IOH / IOL Current Strength
Setting (mA) for Row I/O
Pins
3.3-V LVTTL
24, 20, 16, 12, 8, 4
12, 8, 4
3.3-V LVCMOS
I/O Standard
24, 20, 16, 12, 8, 4
8, 4
2.5-V LVTTL/LVCMOS
16, 12, 8, 4
12, 8, 4
1.8-V LVTTL/LVCMOS
12, 10, 8, 6, 4, 2
8, 6, 4, 2
8, 6, 4, 2
4, 2
SSTL-2 Class I
12, 8
12, 8
SSTL-2 Class II
24, 20, 16
16
SSTL-18 Class I
12, 10, 8, 6, 4
10, 8, 6, 4
SSTL-18 Class II
20, 18, 16, 8
-
HSTL-18 Class I
12, 10, 8, 6, 4
12, 10, 8, 6, 4
HSTL-18 Class II
20, 18, 16
-
HSTL-15 Class I
12, 10, 8, 6, 4
8, 6, 4
HSTL-15 Class II
20, 18, 16
-
1.5-V LVCMOS
Note to Table 2–15:
(1)
The Quartus II software default current setting is the maximum setting for each
I/O standard.
Open-Drain Output
Stratix II devices provide an optional open-drain (equivalent to an opencollector) output for each I/O pin. This open-drain output enables the
device to provide system-level control signals (e.g., interrupt and writeenable signals) that can be asserted by any of several devices.
Bus Hold
Each Stratix II device I/O pin provides an optional bus-hold feature. The
bus-hold circuitry can weakly hold the signal on an I/O pin at its
last-driven state. Since the bus-hold feature holds the last-driven state of
the pin until the next input signal is present, you do not need an external
pull-up or pull-down resistor to hold a signal level when the bus is
tri-stated.
2–84
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
The bus-hold circuitry also pulls undriven pins away from the input
threshold voltage where noise can cause unintended high-frequency
switching. You can select this feature individually for each I/O pin. The
bus-hold output drives no higher than VCCIO to prevent overdriving
signals. If the bus-hold feature is enabled, the programmable pull-up
option cannot be used. Disable the bus-hold feature when the I/O pin has
been configured for differential signals.
The bus-hold circuitry uses a resistor with a nominal resistance (RBH) of
approximately 7 kΩ to weakly pull the signal level to the last-driven state.
See the DC & Switching Characteristics chapter in the Stratix II Device
Handbook, Volume 1, for the specific sustaining current driven through this
resistor and overdrive current used to identify the next-driven input
level. This information is provided for each VCCIO voltage level.
The bus-hold circuitry is active only after configuration. When going into
user mode, the bus-hold circuit captures the value on the pin present at
the end of configuration.
Programmable Pull-Up Resistor
Each Stratix II device I/O pin provides an optional programmable
pull-up resistor during user mode. If you enable this feature for an I/O
pin, the pull-up resistor (typically 25 kΩ) weakly holds the output to the
VCCIO level of the output pin’s bank.
Programmable pull-up resistors are only supported on user I/O pins, and
are not supported on dedicated configuration pins, JTAG pins or
dedicated clock pins.
Advanced I/O Standard Support
Stratix II device IOEs support the following I/O standards:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Altera Corporation
May 2007
3.3-V LVTTL/LVCMOS
2.5-V LVTTL/LVCMOS
1.8-V LVTTL/LVCMOS
1.5-V LVCMOS
3.3-V PCI
3.3-V PCI-X mode 1
LVDS
LVPECL (on input and output clocks only)
HyperTransport technology
Differential 1.5-V HSTL Class I and II
Differential 1.8-V HSTL Class I and II
Differential SSTL-18 Class I and II
Differential SSTL-2 Class I and II
2–85
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
■
■
■
■
■
1.5-V HSTL Class I and II
1.8-V HSTL Class I and II
1.2-V HSTL
SSTL-2 Class I and II
SSTL-18 Class I and II
Table 2–16 describes the I/O standards supported by Stratix II devices.
Table 2–16. Stratix II Supported I/O Standards (Part 1 of 2)
I/O Standard
Type
Input Reference
Output Supply
Board Termination
Voltage (VREF) (V) Voltage (VCCIO) (V) Voltage (VTT) (V)
LVTTL
Single-ended
-
3.3
-
LVCMOS
Single-ended
-
3.3
-
2.5 V
Single-ended
-
2.5
-
1.8 V
Single-ended
-
1.8
-
1.5-V LVCMOS
Single-ended
-
1.5
-
3.3-V PCI
Single-ended
-
3.3
-
3.3-V PCI-X mode 1
Single-ended
-
3.3
-
LVDS
Differential
-
2.5 (3)
-
LVPECL (1)
Differential
-
3.3
-
HyperTransport technology Differential
-
2.5
-
Differential 1.5-V HSTL
Class I and II (2)
Differential
0.75
1.5
0.75
Differential 1.8-V HSTL
Class I and II (2)
Differential
0.90
1.8
0.90
Differential SSTL-18 Class
I and II (2)
Differential
0.90
1.8
0.90
Differential SSTL-2 Class I
and II (2)
Differential
1.25
2.5
1.25
1.2-V HSTL(4)
Voltage-referenced
0.6
1.2
0.6
1.5-V HSTL Class I and II
Voltage-referenced
0.75
1.5
0.75
1.8-V HSTL Class I and II
Voltage-referenced
0.9
1.8
0.9
SSTL-18 Class I and II
Voltage-referenced
0.90
1.8
0.90
2–86
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Table 2–16. Stratix II Supported I/O Standards (Part 2 of 2)
I/O Standard
SSTL-2 Class I and II
Type
Voltage-referenced
Input Reference
Output Supply
Board Termination
Voltage (VREF) (V) Voltage (VCCIO) (V) Voltage (VTT) (V)
1.25
2.5
1.25
Notes to Table 2–16:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
This I/O standard is only available on input and output column clock pins.
This I/O standard is only available on input clock pins and DQS pins in I/O banks 3, 4, 7, and 8, and output clock
pins in I/O banks 9,10, 11, and 12.
VCCIO is 3.3 V when using this I/O standard in input and output column clock pins (in I/O banks 9, 10, 11, and 12).
The clock input pins supporting LVDS on banks 3, 4, 7, and 8 use VCCINT for LVDS input operations and have no
dependency on the VCCIO level of the bank.
1.2-V HSTL is only supported in I/O banks 4,7, and 8.
f
For more information on I/O standards supported by Stratix II I/O
banks, refer to the Selectable I/O Standards in Stratix II & Stratix II GX
Devices chapter in volume 2 of the Stratix II Device Handbook or the
Stratix II GX Device Handbook.
Stratix II devices contain eight I/O banks and four enhanced PLL external
clock output banks, as shown in Figure 2–57. The four I/O banks on the
right and left of the device contain circuitry to support high-speed
differential I/O for LVDS and HyperTransport inputs and outputs. These
banks support all Stratix II I/O standards except PCI or PCI-X I/O pins,
and SSTL-18 Class II and HSTL outputs. The top and bottom I/O banks
support all single-ended I/O standards. Additionally, enhanced PLL
external clock output banks allow clock output capabilities such as
differential support for SSTL and HSTL.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–87
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
Figure 2–57. Stratix II I/O Banks Notes (1), (2), (3), (4)
DQS8T
VREF0B3
DQS7T
VREF1B3
DQS6T
VREF2B3
VREF3B3
DQS5T
VREF4B3
PLL11
PLL5
Bank 11
Bank 9
DQS4T
DQS3T
DQS2T
DQS1T
DQS0T
VREF0B4
VREF1B4
VREF2B4
VREF3B4
VREF4B4
PLL7
PLL10
VR EF1B 5
VREF 4B5
VREF 0B2
I/O banks 1, 2, 5 & 6 support LVTTL, LVCMOS,
2.5-V, 1.8-V, 1.5-V, SSTL-2, SSTL-18 Class I,
HSTL-18 Class I, HSTL-15 Class I, LVDS, and
HyperTransport standards for input and output
operations. HSTL-18 Class II, HSTL-15-Class II,
SSTL-18 Class II standards are only supported
for input operations.
PLL1
PLL4
VR EF1B6
VREF 2B6
Bank 6
This I/O bank supports LVDS
and LVPECL standards for input
clock operations. Differential
HSTL and differential SSTL
standards are supported for both
input and output operations.
VREF 4B6
This I/O bank supports LVDS
and LVPECL standards for input
clock operations. Differential
HSTL and differential SSTL
standards are supported for both
input and output operations.
VREF 3B6
I/O banks 7, 8, 10 & 12 support all
single-ended I/O standards and
differential I/O standards except for
HyperTransport technology for
both input and output operations.
VREF 0B1
VREF 1B1
Bank 1
VR EF3B1
VR EF0B6
PLL3
VR EF4B1
PLL2
VREF 2B1
VR EF2B5
I/O banks 3, 4, 9 & 11 support all
single-ended I/O standards and
differential I/O standards except for
HyperTransport technology for
both input and output operations.
Bank 5
This I/O bank supports LVDS
and LVPECL standards for input
clock operations. Differential
HSTL and differential SSTL
standards are supported for both
input and output operations.
VR EF3B5
Bank 2
This I/O bank supports LVDS
and LVPECL standards for input
clock operations. Differential
HSTL and differential SSTL
standards are supported for both
input and output operations.
VR EF1B2
VR EF2B2
VR EF3B 2
VREF 0B5
Bank 4
VREF 4B2
Bank 3
Bank 8
Bank 12
Bank 10
PLL12
PLL6
Bank 7
PLL8
PLL9
VREF4B8
DQS8B
VREF3B8
VREF2B8
DQS7B
VREF1B8
DQS6B
VREF0B8
DQS5B
VREF4B7
VREF3B7
VREF2B7
VREF1B7
VREF0B7
DQS4B
DQS3B
DQS2B
DQS1B
DQS0B
Notes to Figure 2–57:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Figure 2–57 is a top view of the silicon die that corresponds to a reverse view for flip-chip packages. It is a graphical
representation only.
Depending on the size of the device, different device members have different numbers of VREF groups. Refer to the
pin list and the Quartus II software for exact locations.
Banks 9 through 12 are enhanced PLL external clock output banks. These PLL banks utilize the adjacent VREF group
when voltage-referenced standards are implemented. For example, if an SSTL input is implemented in PLL bank
10, the voltage level at VREFB7 is the reference voltage level for the SSTL input.
Horizontal I/O banks feature SERDES and DPA circuitry for high speed differential I/O standards. See the High
Speed Differential I/O Interfaces in Stratix II & Stratix II GX Devices chapter of the Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 2
or the Stratix II GX Device Handbook, Volume 2 for more information on differential I/O standards.
2–88
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Each I/O bank has its own VCCIO pins. A single device can support
1.5-, 1.8-, 2.5-, and 3.3-V interfaces; each bank can support a different
VCCIO level independently. Each bank also has dedicated VREF pins to
support the voltage-referenced standards (such as SSTL-2). The PLL
banks utilize the adjacent VREF group when voltage-referenced
standards are implemented. For example, if an SSTL input is
implemented in PLL bank 10, the voltage level at VREFB7 is the reference
voltage level for the SSTL input.
I/O pins that reside in PLL banks 9 through 12 are powered by the
VCC_PLL_OUT pins, respectively. The EP2S60F484,
EP2S60F780, EP2S90H484, EP2S90F780, and EP2S130F780 devices do not
support PLLs 11 and 12. Therefore, any I/O pins that reside in bank 11 are
powered by the VCCIO3 pin, and any I/O pins that reside in bank 12 are
powered by the VCCIO8 pin.
Each I/O bank can support multiple standards with the same VCCIO for
input and output pins. Each bank can support one VREF voltage level. For
example, when VCCIO is 3.3 V, a bank can support LVTTL, LVCMOS, and
3.3-V PCI for inputs and outputs.
On-Chip Termination
Stratix II devices provide differential (for the LVDS or HyperTransport
technology I/O standard), series, and parallel on-chip termination to
reduce reflections and maintain signal integrity. On-chip termination
simplifies board design by minimizing the number of external
termination resistors required. Termination can be placed inside the
package, eliminating small stubs that can still lead to reflections.
Stratix II devices provide four types of termination:
■
■
■
■
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Differential termination (RD)
Series termination (RS) without calibration
Series termination (RS) with calibration
Parallel termination (RT) with calibration
2–89
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
Table 2–17 shows the Stratix II on-chip termination support per I/O bank.
Table 2–17. On-Chip Termination Support by I/O Banks (Part 1 of 2)
On-Chip Termination Support
Series termination without
calibration
I/O Standard Support
Top & Bottom Banks
Left & Right Banks
3.3-V LVTTL
v
v
3.3-V LVCMOS
v
v
2.5-V LVTTL
v
v
2.5-V LVCMOS
v
v
1.8-V LVTTL
v
v
1.8-V LVCMOS
v
v
1.5-V LVTTL
v
v
1.5-V LVCMOS
v
v
SSTL-2 Class I and II
v
v
SSTL-18 Class I
v
v
SSTL-18 Class II
v
1.8-V HSTL Class I
v
1.8-V HSTL Class II
v
1.5-V HSTL Class I
v
1.2-V HSTL
v
2–90
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
v
v
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Table 2–17. On-Chip Termination Support by I/O Banks (Part 2 of 2)
On-Chip Termination Support
Series termination with
calibration
Parallel termination with
calibration
Differential termination (1)
I/O Standard Support
Top & Bottom Banks
3.3-V LVTTL
v
3.3-V LVCMOS
v
2.5-V LVTTL
v
2.5-V LVCMOS
v
1.8-V LVTTL
v
1.8-V LVCMOS
v
1.5-V LVTTL
v
1.5-V LVCMOS
v
SSTL-2 Class I and II
v
SSTL-18 Class I and II
v
1.8-V HSTL Class I
v
1.8-V HSTL Class II
v
1.5-V HSTL Class I
v
1.2-V HSTL
v
SSTL-2 Class I and II
v
SSTL-18 Class I and II
v
1.8-V HSTL Class I
v
1.8-V HSTL Class II
v
1.5-V HSTL Class I and II
v
1.2-V HSTL
v
Left & Right Banks
LVDS
v
HyperTransport technology
v
Note to Table 2–17:
(1)
Clock pins CLK1, CLK3, CLK9, CLK11, and pins FPLL[7..10]CLK do not support differential on-chip
termination. Clock pins CLK0, CLK2, CLK8, and CLK10 do support differential on-chip termination. Clock pins in
the top and bottom banks (CLK[4..7, 12..15]) do not support differential on-chip termination.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–91
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
Differential On-Chip Termination
Stratix II devices support internal differential termination with a nominal
resistance value of 100 Ω for LVDS or HyperTransport technology input
receiver buffers. LVPECL input signals (supported on clock pins only)
require an external termination resistor. Differential on-chip termination
is supported across the full range of supported differential data rates as
shown in the DC & Switching Characteristics chapter in volume 1 of the
Stratix II Device Handbook.
f
For more information on differential on-chip termination, refer to the
High-Speed Differential I/O Interfaces with DPA in Stratix II & Stratix II GX
Devices chapter in volume 2 of the Stratix II Device Handbook or the
Stratix II GX Device Handbook.
f
For more information on tolerance specifications for differential on-chip
termination, refer to the DC & Switching Characteristics chapter in
volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
On-Chip Series Termination Without Calibration
Stratix II devices support driver impedance matching to provide the I/O
driver with controlled output impedance that closely matches the
impedance of the transmission line. As a result, reflections can be
significantly reduced. Stratix II devices support on-chip series
termination for single-ended I/O standards with typical RS values of 25
and 50 Ω. Once matching impedance is selected, current drive strength is
no longer selectable. Table 2–17 shows the list of output standards that
support on-chip series termination without calibration.
On-Chip Series Termination with Calibration
Stratix II devices support on-chip series termination with calibration in
column I/O pins in top and bottom banks. There is one calibration circuit
for the top I/O banks and one circuit for the bottom I/O banks. Each
on-chip series termination calibration circuit compares the total
impedance of each I/O buffer to the external 25- or 50-Ω resistors
connected to the RUP and RDN pins, and dynamically enables or disables
the transistors until they match. Calibration occurs at the end of device
configuration. Once the calibration circuit finds the correct impedance, it
powers down and stops changing the characteristics of the drivers.
f
For more information on series on-chip termination supported by
Stratix II devices, refer to the Selectable I/O Standards in Stratix II &
Stratix II GX Devices chapter in volume 2 of the Stratix II Device Handbook
or the Stratix II GX Device Handbook.
2–92
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
f
For more information on tolerance specifications for on-chip termination
with calibration, refer to the DC & Switching Characteristics chapter in
volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
On-Chip Parallel Termination with Calibration
Stratix II devices support on-chip parallel termination with calibration for
column I/O pins only. There is one calibration circuit for the top I/O
banks and one circuit for the bottom I/O banks. Each on-chip parallel
termination calibration circuit compares the total impedance of each I/O
buffer to the external 50-Ω resistors connected to the RUP and RDN pins
and dynamically enables or disables the transistors until they match.
Calibration occurs at the end of device configuration. Once the calibration
circuit finds the correct impedance, it powers down and stops changing
the characteristics of the drivers.
1
On-chip parallel termination with calibration is only supported
for input pins.
f
For more information on on-chip termination supported by Stratix II
devices, refer to the Selectable I/O Standards in Stratix II & Stratix II GX
Devices chapter in volume 2 of the Stratix II Device Handbook or the
Stratix II GX Device Handbook.
f
For more information on tolerance specifications for on-chip termination
with calibration, refer to the DC & Switching Characteristics chapter in
volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
MultiVolt I/O Interface
The Stratix II architecture supports the MultiVolt I/O interface feature
that allows Stratix II devices in all packages to interface with systems of
different supply voltages.
The Stratix II VCCINT pins must always be connected to a 1.2-V power
supply. With a 1.2-V VCCINT level, input pins are 1.5-, 1.8-, 2.5-, and 3.3-V
tolerant. The VCCIO pins can be connected to either a 1.5-, 1.8-, 2.5-, or
3.3-V power supply, depending on the output requirements. The output
levels are compatible with systems of the same voltage as the power
supply (for example, when VCCIO pins are connected to a 1.5-V power
supply, the output levels are compatible with 1.5-V systems).
The Stratix II VCCPD power pins must be connected to a 3.3-V power
supply. These power pins are used to supply the pre-driver power to the
output buffers, which increases the performance of the output pins. The
VCCPD pins also power configuration input pins and JTAG input pins.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–93
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
I/O Structure
Table 2–18 summarizes Stratix II MultiVolt I/O support.
Table 2–18. Stratix II MultiVolt I/O Support Note (1)
Input Signal (V)
VCCIO (V)
1.2
Output Signal (V)
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.5
3.3
1.2
(4)
v (2)
v (2)
v (2)
v (2)
v (4)
1.5
1.8
1.5
(4)
v
v
v (2)
v (2)
v (3)
v
1.8
(4)
v
v
v (2)
v (2)
v (3)
v (3)
v
2.5
2.5
(4)
v
v
v (3)
v (3)
v (3)
v
3.3
(4)
v
v
v (3)
v (3)
v (3)
v (3)
3.3
5.0
v
v
Notes to Table 2–18:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
To drive inputs higher than VCCIO but less than 4.0 V, disable the PCI clamping diode and select the Allow LVTTL
and LVCMOS input levels to overdrive input buffer option in the Quartus II software.
The pin current may be slightly higher than the default value. You must verify that the driving device’s VO L
maximum and VO H minimum voltages do not violate the applicable Stratix II VI L maximum and VI H minimum
voltage specifications.
Although VCCIO specifies the voltage necessary for the Stratix II device to drive out, a receiving device powered at
a different level can still interface with the Stratix II device if it has inputs that tolerate the VCCIO value.
Stratix II devices do not support 1.2-V LVTTL and 1.2-V LVCMOS. Stratix II devices support 1.2-V HSTL.
The TDO and nCEO pins are powered by VCCIO of the bank that they reside
in. TDO is in I/O bank 4 and nCEO is in I/O bank 7.
Ideally, the VCC supplies for the I/O buffers of any two connected pins are
at the same voltage level. This may not always be possible depending on
the VCCIO level of TDO and nCEO pins on master devices and the
configuration voltage level chosen by VCCSEL on slave devices. Master
and slave devices can be in any position in the chain. Master indicates that
it is driving out TDO or nCEO to a slave device.
For multi-device passive configuration schemes, the nCEO pin of the
master device drives the nCE pin of the slave device. The VCCSEL pin on
the slave device selects which input buffer is used for nCE. When VCCSEL
is logic high, it selects the 1.8-V/1.5-V buffer powered by VCCIO. When
VCCSEL is logic low it selects the 3.3-V/2.5-V input buffer powered by
VCCPD. The ideal case is to have the VCCIO of the nCEO bank in a master
device match the VCCSEL settings for the nCE input buffer of the slave
device it is connected to, but that may not be possible depending on the
application. Table 2–19 contains board design recommendations to
ensure that nCEO can successfully drive nCE for all power supply
combinations.
2–94
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Table 2–19. Board Design Recommendations for nCEO
Stratix II nCEO VCCIO Voltage Level in I/O Bank 7
nCE Input Buffer Power in I/O
Bank 3
VC C I O =
3.3 V
VC C I O =
2.5 V
VC C I O =
1.8 V
VC C I O =
1.5 V
VC C I O =
1.2 V
VCCSEL high
(VC C I O Bank 3 = 1.5 V)
v(1), (2)
v (3), (4)
v (5)
v
v
VCCSEL high
(VC C I O Bank 3 = 1.8 V)
v (1), (2)
v (3), (4)
v
v
Level shifter
required
v
v (4)
v (6)
Level shifter
required
Level shifter
required
VCCSEL low
(nCE Powered by VC C P D = 3.3V)
Notes to Table 2–19:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Input buffer is 3.3-V tolerant.
The nCEO output buffer meets VO H (MIN) = 2.4 V.
Input buffer is 2.5-V tolerant.
The nCEO output buffer meets VOH (MIN) = 2.0 V.
Input buffer is 1.8-V tolerant.
An external 250-Ω pull-up resistor is not required, but recommended if signal levels on the board are not optimal.
For JTAG chains, the TDO pin of the first device drives the TDI pin of the
second device in the chain. The VCCSEL input on JTAG input I/O cells
(TCK, TMS, TDI, and TRST) is internally hardwired to GND selecting the
3.3-V/2.5-V input buffer powered by VCCPD. The ideal case is to have the
VCCIO of the TDO bank from the first device to match the VCCSEL settings
for TDI on the second device, but that may not be possible depending on
the application. Table 2–20 contains board design recommendations to
ensure proper JTAG chain operation.
Table 2–20. Supported TDO/TDI Voltage Combinations (Part 1 of 2)
Device
Stratix II
Stratix II TDO VC C I O Voltage Level in I/O Bank 4
TDI Input
Buffer Power V
C C I O = 3.3 V VC C I O = 2.5 V VC C I O = 1.8 V VC C I O = 1.5 V VC C I O = 1.2 V
Always
VC C P D (3.3V)
Altera Corporation
May 2007
v (1)
v (2)
v (3)
Level shifter
required
Level shifter
required
2–95
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA Support
Table 2–20. Supported TDO/TDI Voltage Combinations (Part 2 of 2)
Device
Stratix II TDO VC C I O Voltage Level in I/O Bank 4
TDI Input
Buffer Power V
C C I O = 3.3 V VC C I O = 2.5 V VC C I O = 1.8 V VC C I O = 1.5 V VC C I O = 1.2 V
v (1)
v (2)
v (3)
Level shifter
required
Level shifter
required
VCC = 2.5 V
v (1), (4)
v (2)
v (3)
Level shifter
required
Level shifter
required
VCC = 1.8 V
v (1), (4)
v (2), (5)
v
Level shifter
required
Level shifter
required
VCC = 1.5 V
v (1), (4)
v (2), (5)
v (6)
v
v
Non-Stratix II VCC = 3.3 V
Notes to Table 2–20:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
The TDO output buffer meets VOH (MIN) = 2.4 V.
The TDO output buffer meets VOH (MIN) = 2.0 V.
An external 250-Ω pull-up resistor is not required, but recommended if signal levels on the board are not optimal.
Input buffer must be 3.3-V tolerant.
Input buffer must be 2.5-V tolerant.
Input buffer must be 1.8-V tolerant.
High-Speed
Differential I/O
with DPA
Support
Stratix II devices contain dedicated circuitry for supporting differential
standards at speeds up to 1 Gbps. The LVDS and HyperTransport
differential I/O standards are supported in the Stratix II device. In
addition, the LVPECL I/O standard is supported on input and output
clock pins on the top and bottom I/O banks.
The high-speed differential I/O circuitry supports the following high
speed I/O interconnect standards and applications:
■
■
■
■
SPI-4 Phase 2 (POS-PHY Level 4)
SFI-4
Parallel RapidIO
HyperTransport technology
There are four dedicated high-speed PLLs in the EP2S15 to EP2S30
devices and eight dedicated high-speed PLLs in the EP2S60 to EP2S180
devices to multiply reference clocks and drive high-speed differential
SERDES channels.
Tables 2–21 through 2–26 show the number of channels that each fast PLL
can clock in each of the Stratix II devices. In Tables 2–21 through 2–26 the
first row for each transmitter or receiver provides the number of channels
driven directly by the PLL. The second row below it shows the maximum
channels a PLL can drive if cross bank channels are used from the
adjacent center PLL. For example, in the 484-pin FineLine BGA EP2S15
2–96
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
device, PLL 1 can drive a maximum of 10 transmitter channels in I/O
bank 1 or a maximum of 19 transmitter channels in I/O banks 1 and 2. The
Quartus II software may also merge receiver and transmitter PLLs when
a receiver is driving a transmitter. In this case, one fast PLL can drive both
the maximum numbers of receiver and transmitter channels.
Table 2–21. EP2S15 Device Differential Channels
Package
484-pin FineLine BGA
672-pin FineLine BGA
Transmitter/
Receiver
484-pin FineLine BGA
672-pin FineLine BGA
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Center Fast PLLs
Total
Channels
PLL 1
PLL 2
PLL 3
PLL 4
Transmitter
38 (2)
10
9
9
10
(3)
19
19
19
19
Receiver
42 (2)
11
10
10
11
(3)
21
21
21
21
Transmitter
38 (2)
10
9
9
10
(3)
19
19
19
19
Receiver
42 (2)
11
10
10
11
(3)
21
21
21
21
Table 2–22. EP2S30 Device Differential Channels
Package
Note (1)
Transmitter/
Receiver
Note (1)
Center Fast PLLs
Total
Channels
PLL 1
PLL 2
PLL 3
PLL 4
Transmitter
38 (2)
10
9
9
10
(3)
19
19
19
19
Receiver
42 (2)
11
10
10
11
(3)
21
21
21
21
Transmitter
58 (2)
16
13
13
16
(3)
29
29
29
29
Receiver
62 (2)
17
14
14
17
(3)
31
31
31
31
2–97
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA Support
Table 2–23. EP2S60 Differential Channels
Package
484-pin
FineLine BGA
Center Fast PLLs
Transmitter/
Total
Receiver Channels PLL 1 PLL 2 PLL 3 PLL 4
Transmitter
Receiver
672-pin
FineLine BGA
Transmitter
Receiver
1,020-pin
FineLine BGA
Note (1)
Transmitter
Receiver
Receiver
780-pin
FineLine BGA
Transmitter
Receiver
1,020-pin
FineLine BGA
Transmitter
Receiver
1,508-pin
FineLine BGA
Transmitter
Receiver
PLL 8
PLL 9 PLL 10
10
9
9
10
10
9
9
10
(3)
19
19
19
19
-
-
-
-
42 (2)
11
10
10
11
11
10
10
11
(3)
21
21
21
21
-
-
-
-
58 (2)
16
13
13
16
16
13
13
16
(3)
29
29
29
29
-
-
-
-
62 (2)
17
14
14
17
17
14
14
17
(3)
31
31
31
31
-
-
-
-
84 (2)
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
(3)
42
42
42
42
-
-
-
-
84 (2)
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
(3)
42
42
42
42
-
-
-
-
Note (1)
Center Fast PLLs
Transmitter/
Total
Receiver Channels PLL 1 PLL 2 PLL 3 PLL 4
484-pin Hybrid Transmitter
FineLine BGA
PLL 7
38 (2)
Table 2–24. EP2S90 Differential Channels
Package
Corner Fast PLLs (4)
Corner Fast PLLs (4)
PLL 7
PLL 8
PLL 9 PLL 10
38 (2)
10
9
9
10
-
-
-
-
(3)
19
19
19
19
-
-
-
-
42 (2)
11
10
10
11
-
-
-
-
(3)
21
21
21
21
-
-
-
-
64 (2)
16
16
16
16
-
-
-
(3)
32
32
32
32
-
-
-
-
68 (2)
17
17
17
17
-
-
-
-
(3)
34
34
34
34
-
-
-
90 (2)
23
22
22
23
23
22
22
23
(3)
45
45
45
45
-
-
-
-
94 (2)
23
24
24
23
23
24
24
23
(3)
46
46
46
46
-
-
-
-
118 (2)
30
29
29
30
30
29
29
30
(3)
59
59
59
59
-
-
-
-
118 (2)
30
29
29
30
30
29
29
30
(3)
59
59
59
59
-
-
-
-
2–98
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Table 2–25. EP2S130 Differential Channels
Package
780-pin
FineLine BGA
Center Fast PLLs
Transmitter/
Total
Receiver Channels PLL 1 PLL 2 PLL 3 PLL 4
Transmitter
Receiver
1,020-pin
FineLine BGA
Transmitter
Receiver
1,508-pin
FineLine BGA
Transmitter
Receiver
1,020-pin
FineLine BGA
Receiver
1,508-pin
FineLine BGA
Transmitter
Receiver
PLL 7
PLL 8
PLL 9 PLL 10
16
16
16
16
-
-
-
(3)
32
32
32
32
-
-
-
-
68 (2)
17
17
17
17
-
-
-
-
(3)
34
34
34
34
-
-
-
88 (2)
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
(3)
44
44
44
44
-
-
-
-
92 (2)
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
(3)
46
46
46
46
-
-
-
-
156 (2)
37
41
41
37
37
41
41
37
(3)
78
78
78
78
-
-
-
-
156 (2)
37
41
41
37
37
41
41
37
(3)
78
78
78
78
-
-
-
-
Note (1)
Center Fast PLLs
Transmitter/
Total
Receiver Channels PLL 1 PLL 2 PLL 3 PLL 4
Transmitter
Corner Fast PLLs (4)
64 (2)
Table 2–26. EP2S180 Differential Channels
Package
Note (1)
Corner Fast PLLs (4)
PLL 7
PLL 8
PLL 9 PLL 10
88 (2)
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
(3)
44
44
44
44
-
-
-
-
92 (2)
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
(3)
46
46
46
46
-
-
-
-
156 (2)
37
41
41
37
37
41
41
37
(3)
78
78
78
78
-
-
-
-
156 (2)
37
41
41
37
37
41
41
37
(3)
78
78
78
78
-
-
-
-
Notes to Tables 2–21 to 2–26:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
The total number of receiver channels includes the four non-dedicated clock channels that can be optionally used
as data channels.
This is the maximum number of channels the PLLs can directly drive.
This is the maximum number of channels if the device uses cross bank channels from the adjacent center PLL.
The channels accessible by the center fast PLL overlap with the channels accessible by the corner fast PLL.
Therefore, the total number of channels is not the addition of the number of channels accessible by PLLs 1, 2, 3, and
4 with the number of channels accessible by PLLs 7, 8, 9, and 10.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–99
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA Support
Dedicated Circuitry with DPA Support
Stratix II devices support source-synchronous interfacing with LVDS or
HyperTransport signaling at up to 1 Gbps. Stratix II devices can transmit
or receive serial channels along with a low-speed or high-speed clock.
The receiving device PLL multiplies the clock by an integer factor W = 1
through 32. For example, a HyperTransport technology application
where the data rate is 1,000 Mbps and the clock rate is 500 MHz would
require that W be set to 2. The SERDES factor J determines the parallel
data width to deserialize from receivers or to serialize for transmitters.
The SERDES factor J can be set to 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 and does not have to
equal the PLL clock-multiplication W value. A design using the dynamic
phase aligner also supports all of these J factor values. For a J factor of 1,
the Stratix II device bypasses the SERDES block. For a J factor of 2, the
Stratix II device bypasses the SERDES block, and the DDR input and
output registers are used in the IOE. Figure 2–58 shows the block diagram
of the Stratix II transmitter channel.
Figure 2–58. Stratix II Transmitter Channel
Data from R4, R24, C4, or
direct link interconnect
+
–
10
Local
Interconnect
Up to 1 Gbps
10
Dedicated
Transmitter
Interface
diffioclk
refclk
Fast
PLL
load_en
Regional or
global clock
Each Stratix II receiver channel features a DPA block for phase detection
and selection, a SERDES, a synchronizer, and a data realigner circuit. You
can bypass the dynamic phase aligner without affecting the basic sourcesynchronous operation of the channel. In addition, you can dynamically
switch between using the DPA block or bypassing the block via a control
signal from the logic array. Figure 2–59 shows the block diagram of the
Stratix II receiver channel.
2–100
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–59. Stratix II Receiver Channel
Data to R4, R24, C4, or
direct link interconnect
Up to 1 Gbps
+
–
D
Q
Data Realignment
Circuitry
10
data
retimed_data
DPA
Synchronizer
Dedicated
Receiver
Interface
DPA_clk
Eight Phase Clocks
8
diffioclk
refclk
Fast
PLL
load_en
Regional or
global clock
An external pin or global or regional clock can drive the fast PLLs, which
can output up to three clocks: two multiplied high-speed clocks to drive
the SERDES block and/or external pin, and a low-speed clock to drive the
logic array. In addition, eight phase-shifted clocks from the VCO can feed
to the DPA circuitry.
f
For more information on the fast PLL, see the PLLs in Stratix II &
Stratix II GX Devices chapter in volume 2 of the Stratix II Device Handbook
or the Stratix II GX Device Handbook.
The eight phase-shifted clocks from the fast PLL feed to the DPA block.
The DPA block selects the closest phase to the center of the serial data eye
to sample the incoming data. This allows the source-synchronous
circuitry to capture incoming data correctly regardless of the channel-tochannel or clock-to-channel skew. The DPA block locks to a phase closest
to the serial data phase. The phase-aligned DPA clock is used to write the
data into the synchronizer.
The synchronizer sits between the DPA block and the data realignment
and SERDES circuitry. Since every channel utilizing the DPA block can
have a different phase selected to sample the data, the synchronizer is
needed to synchronize the data to the high-speed clock domain of the
data realignment and the SERDES circuitry.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–101
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA Support
For high-speed source synchronous interfaces such as POS-PHY 4,
Parallel RapidIO, and HyperTransport, the source synchronous clock rate
is not a byte- or SERDES-rate multiple of the data rate. Byte alignment is
necessary for these protocols since the source synchronous clock does not
provide a byte or word boundary since the clock is one half the data rate,
not one eighth. The Stratix II device’s high-speed differential I/O
circuitry provides dedicated data realignment circuitry for usercontrolled byte boundary shifting. This simplifies designs while saving
ALM resources. You can use an ALM-based state machine to signal the
shift of receiver byte boundaries until a specified pattern is detected to
indicate byte alignment.
Fast PLL & Channel Layout
The receiver and transmitter channels are interleaved such that each I/O
bank on the left and right side of the device has one receiver channel and
one transmitter channel per LAB row. Figure 2–60 shows the fast PLL and
channel layout in the EP2S15 and EP2S30 devices. Figure 2–61 shows the
fast PLL and channel layout in the EP2S60 to EP2S180 devices.
Figure 2–60. Fast PLL & Channel Layout in the EP2S15 & EP2S30 Devices Note (1)
4
LVDS
Clock
DPA
Clock
Quadrant
Quadrant
DPA
Clock
LVDS
Clock
4
4
4
2
2
4
Fast
PLL 1
Fast
PLL 4
Fast
PLL 2
Fast
PLL 3
LVDS
Clock
DPA
Clock
Quadrant
Quadrant
DPA
Clock
LVDS
Clock
2
2
4
Note to Figure 2–60:
(1)
See Table 2–21 for the number of channels each device supports.
2–102
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Figure 2–61. Fast PLL & Channel Layout in the EP2S60 to EP2S180 Devices Note (1)
Fast
PLL 7
Fast
PLL 10
2
2
4
LVDS
Clock
DPA
Clock
Quadrant
Quadrant
DPA
Clock
LVDS
Clock
4
4
4
2
2
4
Fast
PLL 1
Fast
PLL 4
Fast
PLL 2
Fast
PLL 3
LVDS
Clock
DPA
Clock
Quadrant
Quadrant
DPA
Clock
LVDS
Clock
2
2
2
4
2
Fast
PLL 8
Fast
PLL 9
Note to Figure 2–61:
(1)
See Tables 2–22 through 2–26 for the number of channels each device supports.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
2–103
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Document Revision History
Document
Revision History
Table 2–27 shows the revision history for this chapter.
Table 2–27. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date and
Document
Version
Changes Made
Summary of Changes
—
May 2007, v4.3 Updated “Clock Control Block” section.
Updated note in the “Clock Control Block” section.
—
Deleted Tables 2-11 and 2-12.
—
Updated notes to:
Figure 2–41
● Figure 2–42
● Figure 2–43
● Figure 2–45
—
Updated notes to Table 2–18.
—
Moved Document Revision History to end of the chapter.
—
August 2006,
v4.2
Updated Table 2–18 with note.
—
April 2006,
v4.1
●
●
●
●
●
●
Updated Table 2–13.
Removed Note 2 from Table 2–16.
Updated “On-Chip Termination” section and Table 2–19 to
include parallel termination with calibration information.
Added new “On-Chip Parallel Termination with Calibration”
section.
Updated Figure 2–44.
December
2005, v4.0
Updated “Clock Control Block” section.
July 2005, v3.1
●
●
●
May 2005, v3.0
●
●
●
●
●
●
March 2005,
2.1
●
●
●
●
Added parallel onchip termination
description and
specification.
Changed RCLK
names to match the
Quartus II software in
Table 2–13.
—
Updated HyperTransport technology information in Table 2–18.
Updated HyperTransport technology information in
Figure 2–57.
Added information on the asynchronous clear signal.
—
Updated “Functional Description” section.
Updated Table 2–3.
Updated “Clock Control Block” section.
Updated Tables 2–17 through 2–19.
Updated Tables 2–20 through 2–22.
Updated Figure 2–57.
—
Updated “Functional Description” section.
Updated Table 2–3.
—
2–104
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix II Architecture
Table 2–27. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date and
Document
Version
January 2005,
v2.0
Changes Made
Summary of Changes
—
●
Updated the “MultiVolt I/O Interface” and “TriMatrix Memory”
sections.
Updated Tables 2–3, 2–17, and 2–19.
October 2004,
v1.2
●
Updated Tables 2–9, 2–16, 2–26, and 2–27.
—
July 2004, v1.1
●
Updated note to Tables 2–9 and 2–16.
Updated Tables 2–16, 2–17, 2–18, 2–19, and 2–20.
Updated Figures 2–41, 2–42, and 2–57.
Removed 3 from list of SERDES factor J.
Updated “High-Speed Differential I/O with DPA Support”
section.
In “Dedicated Circuitry with DPA Support” section, removed
XSBI and changed RapidIO to Parallel RapidIO.
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
February 2004, Added document to the Stratix II Device Handbook.
v1.0
Altera Corporation
May 2007
—
2–105
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Document Revision History
2–106
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
3. Configuration & Testing
SII51003-4.2
IEEE Std. 1149.1
JTAG BoundaryScan Support
All Stratix® II devices provide Joint Test Action Group (JTAG)
boundary-scan test (BST) circuitry that complies with the IEEE
Std. 1149.1. JTAG boundary-scan testing can be performed either before
or after, but not during configuration. Stratix II devices can also use the
JTAG port for configuration with the Quartus® II software or hardware
using either Jam Files (.jam) or Jam Byte-Code Files (.jbc).
Stratix II devices support IOE I/O standard setting reconfiguration
through the JTAG BST chain. The JTAG chain can update the I/O
standard for all input and output pins any time before or during user
mode through the CONFIG_IO instruction. You can use this capability
for JTAG testing before configuration when some of the Stratix II pins
drive or receive from other devices on the board using voltage-referenced
standards. Because the Stratix II device may not be configured before
JTAG testing, the I/O pins may not be configured for appropriate
electrical standards for chip-to-chip communication. Programming those
I/O standards via JTAG allows you to fully test I/O connections to other
devices.
A device operating in JTAG mode uses four required pins, TDI,TDO, TMS,
and TCK, and one optional pin, TRST. The TCK pin has an internal weak
pull-down resistor, while the TDI,TMS and TRST pins have weak internal
pull-ups. The JTAG input pins are powered by the 3.3-V VCCPD pins. The
TDO output pin is powered by the VCCIO power supply of bank 4.
Stratix II devices also use the JTAG port to monitor the logic operation of
the device with the SignalTap® II embedded logic analyzer. Stratix II
devices support the JTAG instructions shown in Table 3–1.
1
Stratix II, Stratix, Cyclone® II, and Cyclone devices must be
within the first 17 devices in a JTAG chain. All of these devices
have the same JTAG controller. If any of the Stratix II, Stratix,
Cyclone II, or Cyclone devices are in the 18th of further position,
they fail configuration. This does not affect SignalTap II.
The Stratix II device instruction register length is 10 bits and the
USERCODE register length is 32 bits. Tables 3–2 and 3–3 show the
boundary-scan register length and device IDCODE information for
Stratix II devices.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
3–1
IEEE Std. 1149.1 JTAG Boundary-Scan Support
Table 3–1. Stratix II JTAG Instructions
JTAG Instruction
Instruction Code
Description
SAMPLE/PRELOAD
00 0000 0101
Allows a snapshot of signals at the device pins to be captured and
examined during normal device operation, and permits an initial
data pattern to be output at the device pins. Also used by the
SignalTap II embedded logic analyzer.
EXTEST(1)
00 0000 1111
Allows the external circuitry and board-level interconnects to be
tested by forcing a test pattern at the output pins and capturing test
results at the input pins.
BYPASS
11 1111 1111
Places the 1-bit bypass register between the TDI and TDO pins,
which allows the BST data to pass synchronously through selected
devices to adjacent devices during normal device operation.
USERCODE
00 0000 0111
Selects the 32-bit USERCODE register and places it between the
TDI and TDO pins, allowing the USERCODE to be serially shifted
out of TDO.
IDCODE
00 0000 0110
Selects the IDCODE register and places it between TDI and TDO,
allowing the IDCODE to be serially shifted out of TDO.
HIGHZ (1)
00 0000 1011
Places the 1-bit bypass register between the TDI and TDO pins,
which allows the BST data to pass synchronously through selected
devices to adjacent devices during normal device operation, while
tri-stating all of the I/O pins.
CLAMP (1)
00 0000 1010
Places the 1-bit bypass register between the TDI and TDO pins,
which allows the BST data to pass synchronously through selected
devices to adjacent devices during normal device operation while
holding I/O pins to a state defined by the data in the boundary-scan
register.
ICR instructions
Used when configuring a Stratix II device via the JTAG port with a
USB Blaster, MasterBlaster™, ByteBlasterMV™, or ByteBlaster II
download cable, or when using a .jam or .jbc via an embedded
processor or JRunner.
PULSE_NCONFIG
00 0000 0001
Emulates pulsing the nCONFIG pin low to trigger reconfiguration
even though the physical pin is unaffected.
CONFIG_IO (2)
00 0000 1101
Allows configuration of I/O standards through the JTAG chain for
JTAG testing. Can be executed before, during, or after
configuration. Stops configuration if executed during configuration.
Once issued, the CONFIG_IO instruction holds nSTATUS low to
reset the configuration device. nSTATUS is held low until the IOE
configuration register is loaded and the TAP controller state
machine transitions to the UPDATE_DR state.
SignalTap II
instructions
Monitors internal device operation with the SignalTap II embedded
logic analyzer.
Notes to Table 3–1:
(1)
(2)
Bus hold and weak pull-up resistor features override the high-impedance state of HIGHZ, CLAMP, and EXTEST.
For more information on using the CONFIG_IO instruction, see the MorphIO: An I/O Reconfiguration Solution for
Altera Devices White Paper.
3–2
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Configuration & Testing
The Quartus II software has an Auto Usercode feature where you can
choose to use the checksum value of a programming file as the JTAG user
code. If selected, the checksum is automatically loaded to the USERCODE
register. Turn on the Auto Usercode option by clicking Device & Pin
Options, then General, in the Settings dialog box (Assignments menu).
Table 3–2. Stratix II Boundary-Scan Register Length
Device
Boundary-Scan Register Length
EP2S15
1,140
EP2S30
1,692
EP2S60
2,196
EP2S90
2,748
EP2S130
3,420
EP2S180
3,948
Table 3–3. 32-Bit Stratix II Device IDCODE
IDCODE (32 Bits) (1)
Device
Version
(4 Bits)
Part Number (16 Bits)
Manufacturer Identity (11
LSB (1 Bit) (2)
Bits)
EP2S15
0000
0010 0000 1001 0001
000 0110 1110
1
EP2S30
0000
0010 0000 1001 0010
000 0110 1110
1
EP2S60
0001
0010 0000 1001 0011
000 0110 1110
1
EP2S90
0000
0010 0000 1001 0100
000 0110 1110
1
EP2S130
0000
0010 0000 1001 0101
000 0110 1110
1
EP2S180
0000
0010 0000 1001 0110
000 0110 1110
1
Notes to Table 3–3:
(1)
(2)
The most significant bit (MSB) is on the left.
The IDCODE's least significant bit (LSB) is always 1.
1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Stratix, Stratix II, Cyclone, and Cyclone II devices must be
within the first 17 devices in a JTAG chain. All of these devices
have the same JTAG controller. If any of the Stratix, Stratix II,
Cyclone, and Cyclone II devices are in the 18th or after they fail
configuration. This does not affect SignalTap II.
3–3
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
SignalTap II Embedded Logic Analyzer
f
For more information on JTAG, see the following documents:
■
■
The IEEE Std. 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-Scan Testing for Stratix II &
Stratix II GX Devices chapter of the Stratix II Device Handbook,
Volume 2 or the Stratix II GX Device Handbook, Volume 2
Jam Programming & Test Language Specification
SignalTap II
Embedded Logic
Analyzer
Stratix II devices feature the SignalTap II embedded logic analyzer, which
monitors design operation over a period of time through the IEEE
Std. 1149.1 (JTAG) circuitry. You can analyze internal logic at speed
without bringing internal signals to the I/O pins. This feature is
particularly important for advanced packages, such as FineLine BGA®
packages, because it can be difficult to add a connection to a pin during
the debugging process after a board is designed and manufactured.
Configuration
The logic, circuitry, and interconnects in the Stratix II architecture are
configured with CMOS SRAM elements. Altera® FPGA devices are
reconfigurable and every device is tested with a high coverage
production test program so you do not have to perform fault testing and
can instead focus on simulation and design verification.
Stratix II devices are configured at system power-up with data stored in
an Altera configuration device or provided by an external controller (e.g.,
a MAX® II device or microprocessor). Stratix II devices can be configured
using the fast passive parallel (FPP), active serial (AS), passive serial (PS),
passive parallel asynchronous (PPA), and JTAG configuration schemes.
The Stratix II device’s optimized interface allows microprocessors to
configure it serially or in parallel, and synchronously or asynchronously.
The interface also enables microprocessors to treat Stratix II devices as
memory and configure them by writing to a virtual memory location,
making reconfiguration easy.
In addition to the number of configuration methods supported, Stratix II
devices also offer the design security, decompression, and remote system
upgrade features. The design security feature, using configuration
bitstream encryption and AES technology, provides a mechanism to
protect your designs. The decompression feature allows Stratix II FPGAs
to receive a compressed configuration bitstream and decompress this
data in real-time, reducing storage requirements and configuration time.
The remote system upgrade feature allows real-time system upgrades
from remote locations of your Stratix II designs. For more information,
see “Configuration Schemes” on page 3–7.
3–4
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Configuration & Testing
Operating Modes
The Stratix II architecture uses SRAM configuration elements that require
configuration data to be loaded each time the circuit powers up. The
process of physically loading the SRAM data into the device is called
configuration. During initialization, which occurs immediately after
configuration, the device resets registers, enables I/O pins, and begins to
operate as a logic device. The I/O pins are tri-stated during power-up,
and before and during configuration. Together, the configuration and
initialization processes are called command mode. Normal device
operation is called user mode.
SRAM configuration elements allow Stratix II devices to be reconfigured
in-circuit by loading new configuration data into the device. With realtime reconfiguration, the device is forced into command mode with a
device pin. The configuration process loads different configuration data,
reinitializes the device, and resumes user-mode operation. You can
perform in-field upgrades by distributing new configuration files either
within the system or remotely.
PORSEL is a dedicated input pin used to select POR delay times of 12 ms
or 100 ms during power-up. When the PORSEL pin is connected to
ground, the POR time is 100 ms; when the PORSEL pin is connected to
VCC, the POR time is 12 ms.
The nIO PULLUP pin is a dedicated input that chooses whether the
internal pull-ups on the user I/O pins and dual-purpose configuration
I/O pins (nCSO, ASDO, DATA[7..0], nWS, nRS, RDYnBSY, nCS, CS,
RUnLU, PGM[2..0], CLKUSR, INIT_DONE, DEV_OE, DEV_CLR) are on or
off before and during configuration. A logic high (1.5, 1.8, 2.5, 3.3 V) turns
off the weak internal pull-ups, while a logic low turns them on.
Stratix II devices also offer a new power supply, VCCPD, which must be
connected to 3.3 V in order to power the 3.3-V/2.5-V buffer available on
the configuration input pins and JTAG pins. VCCPD applies to all the JTAG
input pins (TCK, TMS, TDI, and TRST) and the configuration input pins
when VCCSEL is connected to ground. See Table 3–4 for more information
on the pins affected by VCCSEL.
The VCCSEL pin allows the VCCIO setting (of the banks where the
configuration inputs reside) to be independent of the voltage required by
the configuration inputs. Therefore, when selecting the VCCIO, the VIL and
VIH levels driven to the configuration inputs do not have to be a concern.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
3–5
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Configuration
The PLL_ENA pin and the configuration input pins (Table 3–4) have a
dual buffer design: a 3.3-V/2.5-V input buffer and a 1.8-V/1.5-V input
buffer. The VCCSEL input pin selects which input buffer is used. The 3.3V/2.5-V input buffer is powered by VCCPD, while the 1.8-V/1.5-V input
buffer is powered by VCCIO. Table 3–4 shows the pins affected by VCCSEL.
Table 3–4. Pins Affected by the Voltage Level at VCCSEL
Pin
VCCSEL = LOW (connected
to GND)
VCCSEL = HIGH (connected
to VCCPD)
3.3/2.5-V input buffer is
selected. Input buffer is
powered by VC C P D .
1.8/1.5-V input buffer is
selected. Input buffer is
powered by VC C I O of the I/O
bank.
nSTATUS (when
used as an input)
nCONFIG
CONF_DONE
(when used as an
input)
DATA[7..0]
nCE
DCLK (when used
as an input)
CS
nWS
nRS
nCS
CLKUSR
DEV_OE
DEV_CLRn
RUnLU
PLL_ENA
VCCSEL is sampled during power-up. Therefore, the VCCSEL setting
cannot change on the fly or during a reconfiguration. The VCCSEL input
buffer is powered by VCCINT and must be hardwired to VCCPD or ground.
A logic high VCCSEL connection selects the 1.8-V/1.5-V input buffer, and
a logic low selects the 3.3-V/2.5-V input buffer. VCCSEL should be set to
comply with the logic levels driven out of the configuration device or
MAX® II/microprocessor.
If you need to support configuration input voltages of 3.3 V/2.5 V, you
should set the VCCSEL to a logic low; you can set the VCCIO of the I/O
bank that contains the configuration inputs to any supported voltage. If
3–6
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Configuration & Testing
you need to support configuration input voltages of 1.8 V/1.5 V, you
should set the VCCSEL to a logic high and the VCCIO of the bank that
contains the configuration inputs to 1.8 V/1.5 V.
f
For more information on multi-volt support, including information on
using TDO and nCEO in multi-volt systems, refer to the Stratix II
Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Configuration Schemes
You can load the configuration data for a Stratix II device with one of five
configuration schemes (see Table 3–5), chosen on the basis of the target
application. You can use a configuration device, intelligent controller, or
the JTAG port to configure a Stratix II device. A configuration device can
automatically configure a Stratix II device at system power-up.
You can configure multiple Stratix II devices in any of the five
configuration schemes by connecting the configuration enable (nCE) and
configuration enable output (nCEO) pins on each device.
Stratix II FPGAs offer the following:
■
■
■
Configuration data decompression to reduce configuration file
storage
Design security using configuration data encryption to protect your
designs
Remote system upgrades for remotely updating your Stratix II
designs
Table 3–5 summarizes which configuration features can be used in each
configuration scheme.
Table 3–5. Stratix II Configuration Features (Part 1 of 2)
Configuration
Scheme
FPP
Configuration Method
MAX II device or microprocessor and
flash device
Design Security Decompression
v (1)
Enhanced configuration device
Remote System
Upgrade
v (1)
v
v (2)
v
AS
Serial configuration device
v
v
v (3)
PS
MAX II device or microprocessor and
flash device
v
v
v
Enhanced configuration device
v
v
v
Download cable (4)
v
v
Altera Corporation
May 2007
3–7
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Configuration
Table 3–5. Stratix II Configuration Features (Part 2 of 2)
Configuration
Scheme
Configuration Method
PPA
MAX II device or microprocessor and
flash device
JTAG
Download cable (4)
Design Security Decompression
Remote System
Upgrade
v
MAX II device or microprocessor and
flash device
Notes for Table 3–5:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
In these modes, the host system must send a DCLK that is 4× the data rate.
The enhanced configuration device decompression feature is available, while the Stratix II decompression feature
is not available.
Only remote update mode is supported when using the AS configuration scheme. Local update mode is not
supported.
The supported download cables include the Altera USB Blaster universal serial bus (USB) port download cable,
MasterBlaster serial/USB communications cable, ByteBlaster II parallel port download cable, and the
ByteBlasterMV parallel port download cable.
f
See the Configuring Stratix II & Stratix II GX Devices chapter in volume 2
of the Stratix II Device Handbook or the Stratix II GX Device Handbook for
more information about configuration schemes in Stratix II and
Stratix II GX devices.
Device Security Using Configuration Bitstream Encryption
Stratix II FPGAs are the industry’s first FPGAs with the ability to decrypt
a configuration bitstream using the Advanced Encryption Standard
(AES) algorithm. When using the design security feature, a 128-bit
security key is stored in the Stratix II FPGA. To successfully configure a
Stratix II FPGA that has the design security feature enabled, it must be
configured with a configuration file that was encrypted using the same
128-bit security key. The security key can be stored in non-volatile
memory inside the Stratix II device. This non-volatile memory does not
require any external devices, such as a battery back-up, for storage.
3–8
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Configuration & Testing
1
An encryption configuration file is the same size as a nonencryption configuration file. When using a serial configuration
scheme such as passive serial (PS) or active serial (AS),
configuration time is the same whether or not the design
security feature is enabled. If the fast passive parallel (FPP)
scheme us used with the design security or decompression
feature, a 4× DCLK is required. This results in a slower
configuration time when compared to the configuration time of
an FPGA that has neither the design security, nor
decompression feature enabled. For more information about
this feature, refer to AN 341: Using the Design Security Feature in
Stratix II Devices. Contact your local Altera sales representative
to request this document.
Device Configuration Data Decompression
Stratix II FPGAs support decompression of configuration data, which
saves configuration memory space and time. This feature allows you to
store compressed configuration data in configuration devices or other
memory, and transmit this compressed bit stream to Stratix II FPGAs.
During configuration, the Stratix II FPGA decompresses the bit stream in
real time and programs its SRAM cells.
Stratix II FPGAs support decompression in the FPP (when using a
MAX II device/microprocessor and flash memory), AS and PS
configuration schemes. Decompression is not supported in the PPA
configuration scheme nor in JTAG-based configuration.
Remote System Upgrades
Shortened design cycles, evolving standards, and system deployments in
remote locations are difficult challenges faced by modern system
designers. Stratix II devices can help effectively deal with these
challenges with their inherent re-programmability and dedicated
circuitry to perform remote system updates. Remote system updates help
deliver feature enhancements and bug fixes without costly recalls, reduce
time to market, and extend product life.
Stratix II FPGAs feature dedicated remote system upgrade circuitry to
facilitate remote system updates. Soft logic (Nios® processor or user logic)
implemented in the Stratix II device can download a new configuration
image from a remote location, store it in configuration memory, and direct
the dedicated remote system upgrade circuitry to initiate a
reconfiguration cycle. The dedicated circuitry performs error detection
during and after the configuration process, recovers from any error
condition by reverting back to a safe configuration image, and provides
Altera Corporation
May 2007
3–9
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Configuration
error status information. This dedicated remote system upgrade circuitry
avoids system downtime and is the critical component for successful
remote system upgrades.
RSC is supported in the following Stratix II configuration schemes: FPP,
AS, PS, and PPA. RSC can also be implemented in conjunction with
advanced Stratix II features such as real-time decompression of
configuration data and design security using AES for secure and efficient
field upgrades.
f
See the Remote System Upgrades With Stratix II & Stratix II GX Devices
chapter in volume 2 of the Stratix II Device Handbook or the Stratix II GX
Device Handbook for more information about remote configuration in
Stratix II devices.
Configuring Stratix II FPGAs with JRunner
JRunner is a software driver that configures Altera FPGAs, including
Stratix II FPGAs, through the ByteBlaster II or ByteBlasterMV cables in
JTAG mode. The programming input file supported is in Raw Binary File
(.rbf) format. JRunner also requires a Chain Description File (.cdf)
generated by the Quartus II software. JRunner is targeted for embedded
JTAG configuration. The source code is developed for the Windows NT
operating system (OS), but can be customized to run on other platforms.
f
For more information on the JRunner software driver, see the JRunner
Software Driver: An Embedded Solution to the JTAG Configuration White
Paper and the source files on the Altera web site (www.altera.com).
Programming Serial Configuration Devices with SRunner
A serial configuration device can be programmed in-system by an
external microprocessor using SRunner. SRunner is a software driver
developed for embedded serial configuration device programming that
can be easily customized to fit in different embedded systems. SRunner is
able to read a .rpd file (Raw Programming Data) and write to the serial
configuration devices. The serial configuration device programming time
using SRunner is comparable to the programming time when using the
Quartus II software.
f
For more information about SRunner, see the SRunner: An Embedded
Solution for EPCS Programming White Paper and the source code on the
Altera web site at www.altera.com.
f
For more information on programming serial configuration devices, see
the Serial Configuration Devices (EPCS1 & EPCS4) Data Sheet in the
Configuration Handbook.
3–10
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Configuration & Testing
Configuring Stratix II FPGAs with the MicroBlaster Driver
The MicroBlasterTM software driver supports an RBF programming input
file and is ideal for embedded FPP or PS configuration. The source code
is developed for the Windows NT operating system, although it can be
customized to run on other operating systems. For more information on
the MicroBlaster software driver, see the Configuring the MicroBlaster Fast
Passive Parallel Software Driver White Paper or the Configuring the
MicroBlaster Passive Serial Software Driver White Paper on the Altera web
site (www.altera.com).
PLL Reconfiguration
The phase-locked loops (PLLs) in the Stratix II device family support
reconfiguration of their multiply, divide, VCO-phase selection, and
bandwidth selection settings without reconfiguring the entire device. You
can use either serial data from the logic array or regular I/O pins to
program the PLL’s counter settings in a serial chain. This option provides
considerable flexibility for frequency synthesis, allowing real-time
variation of the PLL frequency and delay. The rest of the device is
functional while reconfiguring the PLL.
f
Temperature
Sensing Diode
(TSD)
See the PLLs in Stratix II & Stratix II GX Devices chapter in volume 2 of
the Stratix II Device Handbook or the Stratix II GX Device Handbook for
more information on Stratix II PLLs.
Stratix II devices include a diode-connected transistor for use as a
temperature sensor in power management. This diode is used with an
external digital thermometer device. These devices steer bias current
through the Stratix II diode, measuring forward voltage and converting
this reading to temperature in the form of an 8-bit signed number (7 bits
plus sign). The external device's output represents the junction
temperature of the Stratix II device and can be used for intelligent power
management.
The diode requires two pins (tempdiodep and tempdioden) on the
Stratix II device to connect to the external temperature-sensing device, as
shown in Figure 3–1. The temperature sensing diode is a passive element
and therefore can be used before the Stratix II device is powered.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
3–11
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Temperature Sensing Diode (TSD)
Figure 3–1. External Temperature-Sensing Diode
Stratix II Device
Temperature-Sensing
Device
tempdiodep
tempdioden
Table 3–6 shows the specifications for bias voltage and current of the
Stratix II temperature sensing diode.
Table 3–6. Temperature-Sensing Diode Electrical Characteristics
Parameter
IBIAS high
IBIAS low
VBP - VBN
VBN
Series resistance
3–12
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
80
100
120
μA
8
10
0.3
12
μA
0.9
V
3
Ω
0.7
V
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Configuration & Testing
The temperature-sensing diode works for the entire operating range, as
shown in Figure 3–2.
Figure 3–2. Temperature vs. Temperature-Sensing Diode Voltage
0.95
0.90
100 μA Bias Current
10 μA Bias Current
0.85
0.80
0.75
Voltage
(Across Diode)
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
–55
–30
–5
20
45
70
95
120
Temperature (˚C)
The temperature sensing diode is a very sensitive circuit which can be
influenced by noise coupled from other traces on the board, and possibly
within the device package itself, depending on device usage. The
interfacing device registers temperature based on milivolts of difference
as seen at the TSD. Switching I/O near the TSD pins can affect the
temperature reading. Altera recommends you take temperature readings
during periods of no activity in the device (for example, standby mode
where no clocks are toggling in the device), such as when the nearby I/Os
are at a DC state, and disable clock networks in the device.
Automated
Single Event
Upset (SEU)
Detection
Stratix II devices offer on-chip circuitry for automated checking of single
event upset (SEU) detection. Some applications that require the device to
operate error free at high elevations or in close proximity to Earth’s North
or South Pole require periodic checks to ensure continued data integrity.
The error detection cyclic redundancy check (CRC) feature controlled by
Altera Corporation
May 2007
3–13
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Document Revision History
the Device & Pin Options dialog box in the Quartus II software uses a
32-bit CRC circuit to ensure data reliability and is one of the best options
for mitigating SEU.
You can implement the error detection CRC feature with existing circuitry
in Stratix II devices, eliminating the need for external logic. For Stratix II
devices, CRC is computed by the device during configuration and
checked against an automatically computed CRC during normal
operation. The CRC_ERROR pin reports a soft error when configuration
SRAM data is corrupted, triggering device reconfiguration.
Custom-Built Circuitry
Dedicated circuitry is built in the Stratix II devices to perform error
detection automatically. This error detection circuitry in Stratix II devices
constantly checks for errors in the configuration SRAM cells while the
device is in user mode. You can monitor one external pin for the error and
use it to trigger a re-configuration cycle. You can select the desired time
between checks by adjusting a built-in clock divider.
Software Interface
In the Quartus II software version 4.1 and later, you can turn on the
automated error detection CRC feature in the Device & Pin Options
dialog box. This dialog box allows you to enable the feature and set the
internal frequency of the CRC between 400 kHz to 50 MHz. This controls
the rate that the CRC circuitry verifies the internal configuration SRAM
bits in the FPGA device.
For more information on CRC, refer to AN 357: Error Detection Using CRC
in Altera FPGA Devices.
Document
Revision History
Table 3–7 shows the revision history for this chapter.
Table 3–7. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 2)
Date and
Document
Version
Changes Made
May 2007, v4.2 Moved Document Revision History section to the end
of the chapter.
Updated the “Temperature Sensing Diode (TSD)”
section.
3–14
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Summary of Changes
—
—
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Configuration & Testing
Table 3–7. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 2)
Date and
Document
Version
Changes Made
Summary of Changes
April 2006,
v4.1
Updated “Device Security Using Configuration
Bitstream Encryption” section.
—
December
2005, v4.0
Updated “Software Interface” section.
—
May 2005, v3.0
●
January 2005,
v2.1
Updated JTAG chain device limits.
—
January 2005,
v2.0
Updated Table 3–3.
—
July 2004, v1.1
●
●
●
●
Updated “IEEE Std. 1149.1 JTAG Boundary-Scan
Support” section.
Updated “Operating Modes” section.
Added “Automated Single Event Upset (SEU)
Detection” section.
Updated “Device Security Using Configuration
Bitstream Encryption” section.
Updated Figure 3–2.
February 2004, Added document to the Stratix II Device Handbook.
v1.0
Altera Corporation
May 2007
—
—
—
3–15
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Document Revision History
3–16
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
4. Hot Socketing &
Power-On Reset
SII51004-3.2
Stratix® II devices offer hot socketing, which is also known as hot plug-in
or hot swap, and power sequencing support without the use of any
external devices. You can insert or remove a Stratix II board in a system
during system operation without causing undesirable effects to the
running system bus or the board that was inserted into the system.
The hot socketing feature also removes some of the difficulty when you
use Stratix II devices on printed circuit boards (PCBs) that also contain a
mixture of 5.0-, 3.3-, 2.5-, 1.8-, 1.5- and 1.2-V devices. With the Stratix II hot
socketing feature, you no longer need to ensure a proper power-up
sequence for each device on the board.
The Stratix II hot socketing feature provides:
■
■
■
Board or device insertion and removal without external components
or board manipulation
Support for any power-up sequence
Non-intrusive I/O buffers to system buses during hot insertion
This chapter also discusses the power-on reset (POR) circuitry in Stratix II
devices. The POR circuitry keeps the devices in the reset state until the
VCC is within operating range.
Stratix II
Hot-Socketing
Specifications
Stratix II devices offer hot socketing capability with all three features
listed above without any external components or special design
requirements. The hot socketing feature in Stratix II devices allows:
■
■
■
Altera Corporation
May 2007
The device can be driven before power-up without any damage to
the device itself.
I/O pins remain tri-stated during power-up. The device does not
drive out before or during power-up, thereby affecting other buses in
operation.
Signal pins do not drive the VCCIO, VCCPD, or VCCINT power supplies.
External input signals to I/O pins of the device do not internally
power the VCCIO or VCCINT power supplies of the device via internal
paths within the device.
4–1
Stratix II Hot-Socketing Specifications
Devices Can Be Driven Before Power-Up
You can drive signals into the I/O pins, dedicated input pins and
dedicated clock pins of Stratix II devices before or during power-up or
power-down without damaging the device. Stratix II devices support any
power-up or power-down sequence (VCCIO, VCCINT, and VCCPD) in order
to simplify system level design.
I/O Pins Remain Tri-Stated During Power-Up
A device that does not support hot-socketing may interrupt system
operation or cause contention by driving out before or during power-up.
In a hot socketing situation, Stratix II device's output buffers are turned
off during system power-up or power-down. Stratix II device also does
not drive out until the device is configured and has attained proper
operating conditions.
Signal Pins Do Not Drive the VCCIO, VCCINT or VCCPD Power
Supplies
Devices that do not support hot-socketing can short power supplies
together when powered-up through the device signal pins. This irregular
power-up can damage both the driving and driven devices and can
disrupt card power-up.
Stratix II devices do not have a current path from I/O pins, dedicated
input pins, or dedicated clock pins to the VCCIO, VCCINT, or VCCPD pins
before or during power-up. A Stratix II device may be inserted into (or
removed from) a powered-up system board without damaging or
interfering with system-board operation. When hot-socketing, Stratix II
devices may have a minimal effect on the signal integrity of the
backplane.
1
■
■
You can power up or power down the VCCIO, VCCINT, and VCCPD
pins in any sequence. The power supply ramp rates can range
from 100 μs to 100 ms. All VCC supplies must power down
within 100 ms of each other to prevent I/O pins from driving
out. During hot socketing, the I/O pin capacitance is less than 15
pF and the clock pin capacitance is less than 20 pF. Stratix II
devices meet the following hot socketing specification.
The hot socketing DC specification is: | IIOPIN | < 300 μA.
The hot socketing AC specification is: | IIOPIN | < 8 mA for 10 ns or
less.
4–2
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Hot Socketing & Power-On Reset
IIOPIN is the current at any user I/O pin on the device. This specification
takes into account the pin capacitance, but not board trace and external
loading capacitance. Additional capacitance for trace, connector, and
loading needs must be considered separately. For the AC specification,
the peak current duration is 10 ns or less because of power-up transients.
For more information, refer to the Hot-Socketing & Power-Sequencing
Feature & Testing for Altera Devices white paper.
A possible concern regarding hot-socketing is the potential for latch-up.
Latch-up can occur when electrical subsystems are hot-socketed into an
active system. During hot-socketing, the signal pins may be connected
and driven by the active system before the power supply can provide
current to the device's VCC and ground planes. This condition can lead to
latch-up and cause a low-impedance path from VCC to ground within the
device. As a result, the device extends a large amount of current, possibly
causing electrical damage. Nevertheless, Stratix II devices are immune to
latch-up when hot-socketing.
Hot Socketing
Feature
Implementation
in Stratix II
Devices
The hot socketing feature turns off the output buffer during the power-up
event (either VCCINT, VCCIO, or VCCPD supplies) or power down. The hotsocket circuit will generate an internal HOTSCKT signal when either
VCCINT, VCCIO, or VCCPD is below threshold voltage. The HOTSCKT signal
will cut off the output buffer to make sure that no DC current (except for
weak pull up leaking) leaks through the pin. When VCC ramps up very
slowly, VCC is still relatively low even after the POR signal is released and
the configuration is finished. The CONF_DONE, nCEO, and nSTATUS pins
fail to respond, as the output buffer can not flip from the state set by the
hot socketing circuit at this low VCC voltage. Therefore, the hot socketing
circuit has been removed on these configuration pins to make sure that
they are able to operate during configuration. It is expected behavior for
these pins to drive out during power-up and power-down sequences.
Each I/O pin has the following circuitry shown in Figure 4–1.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
4–3
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Hot Socketing Feature Implementation in Stratix II Devices
Figure 4–1. Hot Socketing Circuit Block Diagram for Stratix II Devices
Power On
Reset
Monitor
Output
Weak
Pull-Up
Resistor
PAD
R
Output Enable
Voltage
Tolerance
Control
Hot Socket
Output
Pre-Driver
Input Buffer
to Logic Array
The POR circuit monitors VCCINT voltage level and keeps I/O pins tristated until the device is in user mode. The weak pull-up resistor (R) from
the I/O pin to VCCIO is present to keep the I/O pins from floating. The
3.3-V tolerance control circuit permits the I/O pins to be driven by 3.3 V
before VCCIO and/or VCCINT and/or VCCPD are powered, and it prevents
the I/O pins from driving out when the device is not in user mode. The
hot socket circuit prevents I/O pins from internally powering VCCIO,
VCCINT, and VCCPD when driven by external signals before the device is
powered.
Figure 4–2 shows a transistor level cross section of the Stratix II device
I/O buffers. This design ensures that the output buffers do not drive
when VCCIO is powered before VCCINT or if the I/O pad voltage is higher
than VCCIO. This also applies for sudden voltage spikes during hot
insertion. There is no current path from signal I/O pins to VCCINT or VCCIO
or VCCPD during hot insertion. The VPAD leakage current charges the 3.3-V
tolerant circuit capacitance.
4–4
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
May 2007
Hot Socketing & Power-On Reset
Figure 4–2. Transistor Level Diagram of FPGA Device I/O Buffers
VPAD
Logic Array
Signal
(1)
(2)
VCCIO
n+
n+
p-well
p+
p+
n+
n-well
p-substrate
Notes to Figure 4–2:
(1)
(2)
This is the logic array signal or the larger of either the VCCIO or VPAD signal.
This is the larger of either the VCCIO or VPAD signal.
Power-On Reset
Circuitry
Stratix II devices have a POR circuit to keep the whole device system in
reset state until the power supply voltage levels have stabilized during
power-up. The POR circuit monitors the VCCINT, VCCIO, and VCCPD voltage
levels and tri-states all the user I/O pins while VCC is ramping up until
normal user levels are reached. The POR circuitry also ensures that all
eight I/O bank VCCIO voltages, VCCPD voltage, as well as the logic array
VCCINT voltage, reach an acceptable level before configuration is
triggered. After the Stratix II device enters user mode, the POR circuit
continues to monitor the VCCINT voltage level so that a brown-out
condition during user mode can be detected. If there is a VCCINT voltage
sag below the Stratix II operational level during user mode, the POR
circuit resets the device.
When power is applied to a Stratix II device, a power-on-reset event
occurs if VCC reaches the recommended operating range within a certain
period of time (specified as a maximum VCC rise time). The maximum
VCC rise time for Stratix II device is 100 ms. Stratix II devices provide a
dedicated input pin (PORSEL) to select POR delay times of 12 or 100 ms
during power-up. When the PORSEL pin is connected to ground, the POR
time is 100 ms. When the PORSEL pin is connected to VCC, the POR time
is 12 ms.
Altera Corporation
May 2007
4–5
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Document Revision History
Document
Revision History
Table 4–1 shows the revision history for this chapter.
Table 4–1. Document Revision History
Date and
Document
Version
Changes Made
Summary of Changes
May 2007, v3.2 Moved the Document Revision History section to the
end of the chapter.
—
April 2006,
v3.1
●
Updated “Signal Pins Do Not Drive the VCCIO,
VCCINT or VCCPD Power Supplies” section.
May 2005, v3.0
●
Updated “Signal Pins Do Not Drive the VCCIO,
VCCINT or VCCPD Power Supplies” section.
Removed information on ESD protection.
January 2005,
v2.1
Updated input rise and fall time.
—
January 2005,
v2.0
Updated the “Hot Socketing Feature Implementation in
Stratix II Devices”, “ESD Protection”, and “Power-On
Reset Circuitry” sections.
—
July 2004, v1.1
●
●
●
Updated all tables.
Added tables.
February 2004, Added document to the Stratix II Device Handbook.
v1.0
4–6
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
●
Updated hot socketing AC
specification.
—
—
—
Altera Corporation
May 2007
5. DC & Switching
Characteristics
SII51005-4.5
Operating
Conditions
Stratix® II devices are offered in both commercial and industrial grades.
Industrial devices are offered in -4 speed grades and commercial devices
are offered in -3 (fastest), -4, -5 speed grades.
Tables 5–1 through 5–32 provide information about absolute maximum
ratings, recommended operating conditions, DC electrical characteristics,
and other specifications for Stratix II devices.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 5–1 contains the absolute maximum ratings for the Stratix II device
family.
Table 5–1. Stratix II Device Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol
Parameter
Notes (1), (2), (3)
Conditions
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
VCCINT
Supply voltage
With respect to ground
–0.5
1.8
V
VCCIO
Supply voltage
With respect to ground
–0.5
4.6
V
VCCPD
Supply voltage
With respect to ground
–0.5
4.6
V
VCCA
Analog power supply for
PLLs
With respect to ground
–0.5
1.8
V
VCCD
Digital power supply for PLLs With respect to ground
–0.5
1.8
V
VI
DC input voltage (4)
–0.5
4.6
V
IOUT
DC output current, per pin
–25
40
mA
TSTG
Storage temperature
No bias
–65
150
°C
TJ
Junction temperature
BGA packages under bias
–55
125
°C
Notes to Tables 5–1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
See the Operating Requirements for Altera Devices Data Sheet.
Conditions beyond those listed in Table 5–1 may cause permanent damage to a device. Additionally, device
operation at the absolute maximum ratings for extended periods of time may have adverse affects on the device.
Supply voltage specifications apply to voltage readings taken at the device pins, not at the power supply.
During transitions, the inputs may overshoot to the voltage shown in Table 5–2 based upon the input duty cycle.
The DC case is equivalent to 100% duty cycle. During transitions, the inputs may undershoot to –2.0 V for input
currents less than 100 mA and periods shorter than 20 ns.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–1
Operating Conditions
Table 5–2. Maximum Duty Cycles in Voltage Transitions
Symbol
Parameter
Condition
Maximum
Duty Cycles
Unit
VI
Maximum duty cycles
in voltage transitions
VI = 4.0 V
100
%
VI = 4.1 V
90
%
VI = 4.2 V
50
%
VI = 4.3 V
30
%
VI = 4.4 V
17
%
VI = 4.5 V
10
%
Recommended Operating Conditions
Table 5–3 contains the Stratix II device family recommended operating
conditions.
Table 5–3. Stratix II Device Recommended Operating Conditions (Part 1 of 2)
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Note (1)
Minimum
Maximum Unit
VCCINT
Supply voltage for internal logic
100 μs ≤ risetime ≤ 100 ms (3)
1.15
1.25
V
VCCIO
Supply voltage for input and
output buffers, 3.3-V operation
100 μs ≤ risetime ≤ 100 ms (3), (6)
3.135
(3.00)
3.465
(3.60)
V
Supply voltage for input and
output buffers, 2.5-V operation
100 μs ≤ risetime ≤ 100 ms (3)
2.375
2.625
V
Supply voltage for input and
output buffers, 1.8-V operation
100 μs ≤ risetime ≤ 100 ms (3)
1.71
1.89
V
Supply voltage for output buffers, 100 μs ≤ risetime ≤ 100 ms (3)
1.5-V operation
1.425
1.575
V
Supply voltage for input and
output buffers, 1.2-V operation
100 μs ≤ risetime ≤ 100 ms (3)
1.14
1.26
V
VCCPD
Supply voltage for pre-drivers as
well as configuration and JTAG
I/O buffers.
100 μs ≤ risetime ≤ 100 ms (4)
3.135
3.465
V
VCCA
Analog power supply for PLLs
100 μs ≤ risetime ≤ 100 ms (3)
1.15
1.25
V
VCCD
Digital power supply for PLLs
100 μs ≤ risetime ≤ 100 ms (3)
1.15
1.25
V
VI
Input voltage (see Table 5–2)
(2), (5)
–0.5
4.0
V
VO
Output voltage
0
VCCIO
V
5–2
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–3. Stratix II Device Recommended Operating Conditions (Part 2 of 2)
Symbol
TJ
Parameter
Conditions
Operating junction temperature
Note (1)
Minimum
For commercial use
Maximum Unit
0
85
°C
For industrial use
–40
100
°C
For military use (7)
–55
125
°C
Notes to Table 5–3:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Supply voltage specifications apply to voltage readings taken at the device pins, not at the power supply.
During transitions, the inputs may overshoot to the voltage shown in Table 5–2 based upon the input duty cycle.
The DC case is equivalent to 100% duty cycle. During transitions, the inputs may undershoot to –2.0 V for input
currents less than 100 mA and periods shorter than 20 ns.
Maximum VCC rise time is 100 ms, and VCC must rise monotonically from ground to VC C .
VCCPD must ramp-up from 0 V to 3.3 V within 100 μs to 100 ms. If VC C P D is not ramped up within this specified
time, your Stratix II device does not configure successfully. If your system does not allow for a VCCPD ramp-up time
of 100 ms or less, you must hold nCONFIG low until all power supplies are reliable.
All pins, including dedicated inputs, clock, I/O, and JTAG pins, may be driven before VCCINT, VCCPD, and VCCIO
are powered.
VC C I O maximum and minimum conditions for PCI and PCI-X are shown in parentheses.
For more information, refer to the Stratix II Military Temperature Range Support technical brief.
DC Electrical Characteristics
Table 5–4 shows the Stratix II device family DC electrical characteristics.
Table 5–4. Stratix II Device DC Operating Conditions (Part 1 of 2)
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
II
Input pin leakage current VI = VCCIOmax to 0 V (2)
IOZ
Tri-stated I/O pin
leakage current
VO = VCCIOmax to 0 V (2)
IC C I N T 0
VCCINT supply current
(standby)
VI = ground, no
load, no toggling
inputs
TJ = 25° C
ICCPD0
VCCPD supply current
(standby)
Altera Corporation
April 2011
VI = ground, no
load, no toggling
inputs
TJ = 25° C,
VCCPD = 3.3V
EP2S15
Note (1)
Minimum Typical Maximum Unit
–10
10
μA
–10
10
μA
(3)
A
0.25
EP2S30
0.30
(3)
A
EP2S60
0.50
(3)
A
EP2S90
0.62
(3)
A
EP2S130
0.82
(3)
A
EP2S180
1.12
(3)
A
EP2S15
2.2
(3)
mA
EP2S30
2.7
(3)
mA
EP2S60
3.6
(3)
mA
EP2S90
4.3
(3)
mA
EP2S130
5.4
(3)
mA
EP2S180
6.8
(3)
mA
5–3
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Operating Conditions
Table 5–4. Stratix II Device DC Operating Conditions (Part 2 of 2)
Symbol
ICCI00
Parameter
Conditions
VCCIO supply current
(standby)
VI = ground, no
load, no toggling
inputs
TJ = 25° C
Note (1)
Minimum Typical Maximum Unit
EP2S15
4.0
(3)
mA
EP2S30
4.0
(3)
mA
EP2S60
4.0
(3)
mA
EP2S90
4.0
(3)
mA
EP2S130
4.0
(3)
mA
4.0
(3)
mA
Vi = 0; VCCIO = 3.3 V
10
25
50
kΩ
Vi = 0; VCCIO = 2.5 V
15
35
70
kΩ
Vi = 0; VCCIO = 1.8 V
30
50
100
kΩ
Vi = 0; VCCIO = 1.5 V
40
75
150
kΩ
Vi = 0; VCCIO = 1.2 V
50
90
170
kΩ
1
2
kΩ
EP2S180
RCONF (4) Value of I/O pin pull-up
resistor before and
during configuration
Recommended value of
I/O pin external
pull-down resistor before
and during configuration
Notes to Table 5–4:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Typical values are for TA = 25°C, VCCINT = 1.2 V, and VCCIO = 1.5 V, 1.8 V, 2.5 V, and 3.3 V.
This value is specified for normal device operation. The value may vary during power-up. This applies for all
VCCIO settings (3.3, 2.5, 1.8, and 1.5 V).
Maximum values depend on the actual TJ and design utilization. See the Excel-based PowerPlay Early Power
Estimator (available at www.altera.com) or the Quartus II PowerPlay Power Analyzer feature for maximum
values. See the section “Power Consumption” on page 5–20 for more information.
Pin pull-up resistance values are lower if an external source drives the pin higher than VCCIO.
I/O Standard Specifications
Tables 5–5 through 5–32 show the Stratix II device family I/O standard
specifications.
Table 5–5. LVTTL Specifications (Part 1 of 2)
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
VCCIO (1)
Output supply voltage
3.135
3.465
V
VI H
High-level input voltage
1.7
4.0
V
VIL
Low-level input voltage
–0.3
0.8
V
VOH
High-level output voltage
5–4
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
IOH = –4 mA (2)
2.4
V
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–5. LVTTL Specifications (Part 2 of 2)
Symbol
VOL
Parameter
Low-level output voltage
Conditions
Minimum
IOL = 4 mA (2)
Maximum
Unit
0.45
V
Notes to Tables 5–5:
(1)
(2)
Stratix II devices comply to the narrow range for the supply voltage as specified in the EIA/JEDEC Standard,
JESD8-B.
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive strength settings available for this I/O standard
as shown in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Table 5–6. LVCMOS Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
VCCIO (1)
Output supply voltage
VIH
High-level input voltage
VIL
Low-level input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
VCCIO = 3.0,
IOH = –0.1 mA (2)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
VCCIO = 3.0,
IOL = 0.1 mA (2)
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
3.135
3.465
V
1.7
4.0
V
–0.3
0.8
V
VCCIO – 0.2
V
0.2
V
Notes to Table 5–6:
(1)
(2)
Stratix II devices comply to the narrow range for the supply voltage as specified in the EIA/JEDEC Standard,
JESD8-B.
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive strength available for this I/O standard as
shown in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Table 5–7. 2.5-V I/O Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
VCCIO (1)
Output supply voltage
VIH
High-level input voltage
VIL
Low-level input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = –1mA (2)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOL = 1 mA (2)
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
2.375
2.625
V
1.7
4.0
V
–0.3
0.7
V
2.0
V
0.4
V
Notes to Table 5–7:
(1)
(2)
Stratix II devices VC C I O voltage level support of 2.5 ± -5% is narrower than defined in the Normal Range of the
EIA/JEDEC standard.
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–5
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Operating Conditions
Table 5–8. 1.8-V I/O Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
VCCIO (1)
Output supply voltage
VI H
High-level input voltage
Conditions
VIL
Low-level input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = –2 mA (2)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOL = 2 mA (2)
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
1.71
1.89
V
0.65 × VCCIO
2.25
V
–0.30
0.35 × VCCIO
VCCIO – 0.45
V
V
0.45
V
Notes to Table 5–8:
(1)
(2)
The Stratix II device family’s VC C I O voltage level support of 1.8 ± -5% is narrower than defined in the Normal
Range of the EIA/JEDEC standard.
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Table 5–9. 1.5-V I/O Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
VCCIO (1)
Output supply voltage
VI H
High-level input voltage
Conditions
VIL
Low-level input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = –2 mA (2)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOL = 2 mA (2)
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
1.425
1.575
V
0.65 × VCCIO
VCCIO + 0.30
V
–0.30
0.35 × VCCIO
V
0.75 × VCCIO
V
0.25 × VCCIO
V
Notes to Table 5–9:
(1)
(2)
The Stratix II device family’s VC C I O voltage level support of 1.5 ± -5% is narrower than defined in the Normal
Range of the EIA/JEDEC standard.
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Figures 5–1 and 5–2 show receiver input and transmitter output
waveforms, respectively, for all differential I/O standards (LVDS,
LVPECL, and HyperTransport technology).
5–6
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Figure 5–1. Receiver Input Waveforms for Differential I/O Standards
Single-Ended Waveform
Positive Channel (p) = VIH
VID
Negative Channel (n) = VIL
VCM
Ground
Differential Waveform
VID
p−n=0V
VID
Figure 5–2. Transmitter Output Waveforms for Differential I/O Standards
Single-Ended Waveform
Positive Channel (p) = VOH
VOD
Negative Channel (n) = VOL
VCM
Ground
Differential Waveform
VOD
p−n=0V
VOD
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–7
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Operating Conditions
Table 5–10. 2.5-V LVDS I/O Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
2.375
2.500
2.625
V
VCCIO
I/O supply voltage for left and
right I/O banks (1, 2, 5, and
6)
VID
Input differential voltage
swing (single-ended)
100
350
900
mV
VICM
Input common mode voltage
200
1,250
1,800
mV
VOD
Output differential voltage
(single-ended)
RL = 100 Ω
250
450
mV
VOCM
Output common mode
voltage
RL = 100 Ω
1.125
1.375
V
RL
Receiver differential input
discrete resistor (external to
Stratix II devices)
90
100
110
Ω
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
3.135
3.300
3.465
V
Table 5–11. 3.3-V LVDS I/O Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
VCCIO (1)
I/O supply voltage for top
and bottom PLL banks (9,
10, 11, and 12)
VID
Input differential voltage
swing (single-ended)
100
350
900
mV
VICM
Input common mode voltage
200
1,250
1,800
mV
VOD
Output differential voltage
(single-ended)
RL = 100 Ω
250
710
mV
VOCM
Output common mode
voltage
RL = 100 Ω
840
1,570
mV
RL
Receiver differential input
discrete resistor (external to
Stratix II devices)
110
Ω
90
100
Note to Table 5–11:
(1)
The top and bottom clock input differential buffers in I/O banks 3, 4, 7, and 8 are powered by VCCINT, not VCCIO.
The PLL clock output/feedback differential buffers are powered by VCC_PLL_OUT. For differential clock
output/feedback operation, VCC_PLL_OUT should be connected to 3.3 V.
5–8
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–12. LVPECL Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
3.135
3.300
3.465
V
600
1,000
mV
VCCIO (1)
I/O supply voltage
VID
Input differential voltage
swing (single-ended)
300
VICM
Input common mode voltage
1.0
2.5
V
VOD
Output differential voltage
(single-ended)
RL = 100 Ω
525
970
mV
VOCM
Output common mode
voltage
RL = 100 Ω
1,650
2,250
mV
RL
Receiver differential input
resistor
110
Ω
90
100
Note to Table 5–12:
(1)
The top and bottom clock input differential buffers in I/O banks 3, 4, 7, and 8 are powered by VCCINT, not VCCIO.
The PLL clock output/feedback differential buffers are powered by VCC_PLL_OUT. For differential clock
output/feedback operation, VCC_PLL_OUT should be connected to 3.3 V.
Table 5–13. HyperTransport Technology Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
2.375
2.500
2.625
V
VCCIO
I/O supply voltage for left and
right I/O banks (1, 2, 5, and 6)
VID
Input differential voltage swing RL = 100 Ω
(single-ended)
300
600
900
mV
VICM
Input common mode voltage
RL = 100 Ω
385
600
845
mV
VOD
Output differential voltage
(single-ended)
RL = 100 Ω
400
600
820
mV
Δ VOD
Change in VOD between high
and low
RL = 100 Ω
75
mV
VOCM
Output common mode voltage RL = 100 Ω
Δ VOCM
Change in VOCM between high
and low
RL
Receiver differential input
resistor
440
600
RL = 100 Ω
780
mV
50
mV
90
100
110
Ω
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
3.0
3.3
3.6
V
VCCIO + 0.5
V
Table 5–14. 3.3-V PCI Specifications (Part 1 of 2)
Symbol
Parameter
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
VIH
High-level input voltage
Altera Corporation
April 2011
Conditions
0.5 × VCCIO
5–9
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Operating Conditions
Table 5–14. 3.3-V PCI Specifications (Part 2 of 2)
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
VIL
Low-level input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOUT = –500 μA
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOUT = 1,500 μA
Minimum
Typical
–0.3
Maximum
Unit
0.3 × VCCIO
V
0.9 × VCCIO
V
0.1 × VCCIO
V
Maximum
Unit
3.6
V
Table 5–15. PCI-X Mode 1 Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
3.0
VIH
High-level input voltage
0.5 × VCCIO
VCCIO + 0.5
V
VIL
Low-level input voltage
–0.30
0.35 × VCCIO
V
VIPU
Input pull-up voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOUT = –500 μA
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOUT = 1,500 μA
0.7 × VCCIO
V
0.9 × VCCIO
V
0.1 × VCCIO
V
Maximum
Unit
Table 5–16. SSTL-18 Class I Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
1.71
1.80
1.89
V
VREF
Reference voltage
0.855
0.900
0.945
V
VTT
Termination voltage
VREF – 0.04
VREF
VREF + 0.04
V
VIH (DC)
High-level DC input voltage
VREF + 0.125
VIL (DC)
Low-level DC input voltage
VREF – 0.125
V
VIH (AC)
High-level AC input voltage
VIL (AC)
Low-level AC input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = –6.7 mA (1)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOL = 6.7 mA (1)
V
VREF + 0.25
V
VREF – 0.25
VTT + 0.475
V
V
VTT – 0.475
V
Note to Table 5–16:
(1)
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
5–10
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–17. SSTL-18 Class II Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
1.71
1.80
1.89
V
VREF
Reference voltage
0.855
0.900
0.945
V
VTT
Termination voltage
VREF – 0.04
VREF
VREF + 0.04
V
VIH (DC) High-level DC input voltage
VREF + 0.125
V
VIL (DC) Low-level DC input voltage
VREF – 0.125
VIH (AC) High-level AC input voltage
VREF + 0.25
V
VIL (AC) Low-level AC input voltage
VREF – 0.25
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = –13.4 mA (1)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOL = 13.4 mA (1)
V
VCCIO – 0.28
V
V
0.28
V
Note to Table 5–17:
(1)
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Table 5–18. SSTL-18 Class I & II Differential Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
1.80
1.89
V
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
1.71
VSWING
(DC)
DC differential input voltage
0.25
VX (AC) AC differential input cross
point voltage
V
(VCCIO/2) – 0.175
(VCCIO/2) + 0.175
V
VSWING
(AC)
AC differential input voltage
VISO
Input clock signal offset
voltage
0.5 × VCCIO
V
ΔVISO
Input clock signal offset
voltage variation
±200
mV
VOX
(AC)
AC differential cross point
voltage
Altera Corporation
April 2011
0.5
(VCCIO/2) – 0.125
V
(VCCIO/2) + 0.125
V
5–11
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Operating Conditions
Table 5–19. SSTL-2 Class I Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
VTT
Termination voltage
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
2.375
2.500
2.625
V
VREF – 0.04
VREF
VREF + 0.04
V
1.188
1.250
VREF
Reference voltage
1.313
V
VIH (DC)
High-level DC input voltage
VREF + 0.18
3.00
V
VIL (DC)
Low-level DC input voltage
–0.30
VREF – 0.18
V
VI H (AC)
High-level AC input voltage
VR E F + 0.35
VI L (AC)
Low-level AC input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = –8.1 mA (1)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOL = 8.1 mA (1)
V
VR E F - 0.35
VTT + 0.57
V
V
VTT – 0.57
V
Note to Table 5–19:
(1)
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Table 5–20. SSTL-2 Class II Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
2.375
2.500
2.625
V
VREF – 0.04
VREF
VREF + 0.04
V
1.188
1.250
1.313
V
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
VTT
Termination voltage
VREF
Reference voltage
VIH (DC)
High-level DC input voltage
VREF + 0.18
VCCIO + 0.30
V
VIL (DC)
Low-level DC input voltage
–0.30
VREF – 0.18
V
VR E F + 0.35
VR E F - 0.35
V
VI H (AC)
High-level AC input voltage
VI L (AC)
Low-level AC input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = –16.4 mA (1)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOL = 16.4 mA (1)
V
VTT + 0.76
V
VTT – 0.76
V
Note to Table 5–20:
(1)
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
5–12
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–21. SSTL-2 Class I & II Differential Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
2.500
2.625
V
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
2.375
VSWING
(DC)
DC differential input voltage
0.36
VX (AC) AC differential input cross
point voltage
V
(VCCIO/2) – 0.2
(VCCIO/2) + 0.2
V
VSWING
(AC)
AC differential input voltage
VISO
Input clock signal offset
voltage
0.5 × VCCIO
V
ΔVISO
Input clock signal offset
voltage variation
±200
mV
VOX
(AC)
AC differential output cross
point voltage
0.7
V
(VCCIO/2) – 0.2
(VCCIO/2) + 0.2
V
Table 5–22. 1.2-V HSTL Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
1.14
1.20
1.26
V
0.50 × VC C I O
0.52 × VC C I O
V
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
VR E F
Reference voltage
0.48 × VC C I O
VIH (DC) High-level DC input voltage
VR E F + 0.08
VC C I O + 0.15
V
VIL (DC) Low-level DC input voltage
–0.15
VR E F – 0.08
V
VIH (AC) High-level AC input voltage
VR E F + 0.15
VC C I O + 0.24
V
VIL (AC) Low-level AC input voltage
–0.24
VR E F – 0.15
V
VOH
High-level output voltage
IO H = 8 mA
VR E F + 0.15
VC C I O + 0.15
V
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IO H = –8 mA
–0.15
VR E F – 0.15
V
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–13
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Operating Conditions
Table 5–23. 1.5-V HSTL Class I Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
1.425
1.500
1.575
V
VREF
Input reference voltage
0.713
0.750
0.788
V
VTT
Termination voltage
0.713
0.750
0.788
V
VIH (DC)
DC high-level input voltage
VREF + 0.1
VIL (DC)
DC low-level input voltage
–0.3
VIH (AC)
AC high-level input voltage
VREF + 0.2
VIL (AC)
AC low-level input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = 8 mA (1)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOH = –8 mA (1)
V
VREF – 0.1
V
V
VREF – 0.2
VCCIO – 0.4
V
V
0.4
V
Note to Table 5–23:
(1)
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Table 5–24. 1.5-V HSTL Class II Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
1.425
1.500
1.575
V
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
VREF
Input reference voltage
0.713
0.750
0.788
V
VTT
Termination voltage
0.713
0.750
0.788
V
VIH (DC)
DC high-level input voltage
VREF + 0.1
VIL (DC)
DC low-level input voltage
–0.3
VIH (AC)
AC high-level input voltage
VREF + 0.2
VIL (AC)
AC low-level input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = 16 mA (1)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOH = –16 mA (1)
V
VREF – 0.1
V
VREF – 0.2
V
V
VCCIO – 0.4
V
0.4
V
Note to Table 5–24:
(1)
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
5–14
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–25. 1.5-V HSTL Class I & II Differential Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
1.425
1.500
1.575
V
VCCIO
I/O supply voltage
VDIF (DC)
DC input differential voltage
0.2
VCM (DC)
DC common mode input
voltage
0.68
VDIF (AC)
AC differential input voltage
0.4
VOX (AC)
AC differential cross point
voltage
0.68
V
0.90
V
V
0.90
V
Table 5–26. 1.8-V HSTL Class I Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
1.71
1.80
1.89
V
VREF
Input reference voltage
0.85
0.90
0.95
V
VTT
Termination voltage
0.85
0.90
0.95
V
VIH (DC)
DC high-level input voltage
VREF + 0.1
VIL (DC)
DC low-level input voltage
–0.3
VIH (AC)
AC high-level input voltage
VREF + 0.2
VIL (AC)
AC low-level input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = 8 mA (1)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOH = –8 mA (1)
V
VREF – 0.1
V
V
VREF – 0.2
VCCIO – 0.4
V
V
0.4
V
Note to Table 5–26:
(1)
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–15
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Operating Conditions
Table 5–27. 1.8-V HSTL Class II Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
VCCIO
Output supply voltage
1.71
1.80
1.89
V
VREF
Input reference voltage
0.85
0.90
0.95
V
VTT
Termination voltage
0.85
0.90
0.95
VIH (DC)
DC high-level input voltage
VREF + 0.1
VIL (DC)
DC low-level input voltage
–0.3
VIH (AC)
AC high-level input voltage
VREF + 0.2
VIL (AC)
AC low-level input voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage
IOH = 16 mA (1)
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOH = –16 mA (1)
V
V
VREF – 0.1
V
V
VREF – 0.2
VCCIO – 0.4
V
V
0.4
V
Note to Table 5–27:
(1)
This specification is supported across all the programmable drive settings available for this I/O standard as shown
in the Stratix II Architecture chapter in volume 1 of the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Table 5–28. 1.8-V HSTL Class I & II Differential Specifications
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Unit
1.71
1.80
1.89
V
VCCIO
I/O supply voltage
VDIF (DC)
DC input differential voltage
0.2
VCCIO + 0.6 V
V
VCM (DC)
DC common mode input
voltage
0.78
1.12
V
VDIF (AC)
AC differential input voltage
0.4
VCCIO + 0.6 V
V
VOX (AC)
AC differential cross point
voltage
0.68
0.90
V
5–16
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Bus Hold Specifications
Table 5–29 shows the Stratix II device family bus hold specifications.
Table 5–29. Bus Hold Parameters
VCCIO Level
Parameter
Conditions
1.2 V
Min
Max
1.5 V
Min
1.8 V
Max
Min
2.5 V
Max
Min
Max
3.3 V
Min
Unit
Max
Low
sustaining
current
VIN > VIL
(maximum)
22.5
25.0
30.0
50.0
70.0
μA
High
sustaining
current
VIN < VIH
(minimum)
–22.5
–25.0
–30.0
–50.0
–70.0
μA
Low
overdrive
current
0 V < VIN <
VCCIO
120
160
200
300
500
μA
High
overdrive
current
0 V < VIN <
VCCIO
–120
–160
–200
–300
–500
μA
2.00
V
Bus-hold
trip point
0.45
0.95
0.50
1.00
0.68
1.07
0.70
1.70
0.80
On-Chip Termination Specifications
Tables 5–30 and 5–31 define the specification for internal termination
resistance tolerance when using series or differential on-chip termination.
Table 5–30. Series On-Chip Termination Specification for Top & Bottom I/O Banks (Part 1 of 2)
Notes (1), 2
Resistance Tolerance
Symbol
25-Ω RS
3.3/2.5
Description
Conditions
Commercial
Max
Industrial
Max
Unit
Internal series termination with
calibration (25-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 3.3/2.5 V
±5
±10
%
Internal series termination without
calibration (25-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 3.3/2.5 V
±30
±30
%
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–17
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Operating Conditions
Table 5–30. Series On-Chip Termination Specification for Top & Bottom I/O Banks (Part 2 of 2)
Notes (1), 2
Resistance Tolerance
Symbol
50-Ω RS
3.3/2.5
Description
Conditions
Commercial
Max
Industrial
Max
Unit
Internal series termination with
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 3.3/2.5 V
±5
±10
%
Internal series termination without
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 3.3/2.5 V
±30
±30
%
50-Ω RT
2.5
Internal parallel termination with
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.8 V
±30
±30
%
25-Ω RS
1.8
Internal series termination with
calibration (25-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.8 V
±5
±10
%
Internal series termination without
calibration (25-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.8 V
±30
±30
%
Internal series termination with
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.8 V
±5
±10
%
Internal series termination without
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.8 V
±30
±30
%
50-Ω RT
1.8
Internal parallel termination with
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.8 V
±10
±15
%
50−Ω RS
1.5
Internal series termination with
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.5 V
±8
±10
%
Internal series termination without
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.5 V
±36
±36
%
50-Ω RT
1.5
Internal parallel termination with
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.5 V
±10
±15
%
50−Ω RS
1.2
Internal series termination with
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.2 V
±8
±10
%
Internal series termination without
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.2 V
±50
±50
%
Internal parallel termination with
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.2 V
±10
±15
%
50-Ω RS
1.8
50-Ω RT
1.2
Notes for Table 5–30:
(1)
(2)
The resistance tolerances for calibrated SOCT and POCT are for the moment of calibration. If the temperature or
voltage changes over time, the tolerance may also change.
On-chip parallel termination with calibration is only supported for input pins.
5–18
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–31. Series & Differential On-Chip Termination Specification for Left & Right I/O Banks
Resistance Tolerance
Symbol
Description
Conditions
Commercial Industrial
Max
Max
Unit
25-Ω RS
3.3/2.5
Internal series termination without
calibration (25-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 3.3/2.5 V
±30
±30
%
50-Ω RS
3.3/2.5/1.8
Internal series termination without
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 3.3/2.5/1.8 V
±30
±30
%
50-Ω RS 1.5
Internal series termination without
calibration (50-Ω setting)
VC C I O = 1.5 V
±36
±36
%
RD
VC C I O = 2.5 V
Internal differential termination for
LVDS or HyperTransport technology
(100-Ω setting)
±20
±25
%
Pin Capacitance
Table 5–32 shows the Stratix II device family pin capacitance.
Table 5–32. Stratix II Device Capacitance
Symbol
Note (1)
Parameter
Typical
Unit
CI O T B
Input capacitance on I/O pins in I/O banks 3, 4, 7, and 8.
5.0
pF
CI O L R
Input capacitance on I/O pins in I/O banks 1, 2, 5, and 6, including highspeed differential receiver and transmitter pins.
6.1
pF
CC L K T B
Input capacitance on top/bottom clock input pins: CLK[4..7] and
CLK[12..15].
6.0
pF
CC L K L R
Input capacitance on left/right clock inputs: CLK0, CLK2, CLK8, CLK10.
6.1
pF
CC L K L R +
Input capacitance on left/right clock inputs: CLK1, CLK3, CLK9, and
CLK11.
3.3
pF
CO U T F B
Input capacitance on dual-purpose clock output/feedback pins in PLL
banks 9, 10, 11, and 12.
6.7
pF
Note to Table 5–32:
(1)
Capacitance is sample-tested only. Capacitance is measured using time-domain reflections (TDR). Measurement
accuracy is within ±0.5pF
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–19
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Power Consumption
Power
Consumption
Altera® offers two ways to calculate power for a design: the Excel-based
PowerPlay Early Power Estimator power calculator and the Quartus® II
PowerPlay Power Analyzer feature.
The interactive Excel-based PowerPlay Early Power Estimator is typically
used prior to designing the FPGA in order to get an estimate of device
power. The Quartus II PowerPlay Power Analyzer provides better
quality estimates based on the specifics of the design after place-androute is complete. The Power Analyzer can apply a combination of userentered, simulation-derived and estimated signal activities which,
combined with detailed circuit models, can yield very accurate power
estimates.
In both cases, these calculations should only be used as an estimation of
power, not as a specification.
f
For more information about PowerPlay tools, refer to the PowerPlay Early
Power Estimator User Guide and the PowerPlay Early Power Estimator and
PowerPlay Power Analyzer chapters in volume 3 of the Quartus II
Handbook.
The PowerPlay Early Power Estimator is available on the Altera web site
at www.altera.com. See Table 5–4 on page 5–3 for typical ICC standby
specifications.
Timing Model
The DirectDriveTM technology and MultiTrackTM interconnect ensure
predictable performance, accurate simulation, and accurate timing
analysis across all Stratix II device densities and speed grades. This
section describes and specifies the performance, internal timing, external
timing, and PLL, high-speed I/O, external memory interface, and JTAG
timing specifications.
All specifications are representative of worst-case supply voltage and
junction temperature conditions.
1
The timing numbers listed in the tables of this section are
extracted from the Quartus II software version 5.0 SP1.
Preliminary & Final Timing
Timing models can have either preliminary or final status. The Quartus II
software issues an informational message during the design compilation
if the timing models are preliminary. Table 5–33 shows the status of the
Stratix II device timing models.
5–20
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Preliminary status means the timing model is subject to change. Initially,
timing numbers are created using simulation results, process data, and
other known parameters. These tests are used to make the preliminary
numbers as close to the actual timing parameters as possible.
Final timing numbers are based on actual device operation and testing.
These numbers reflect the actual performance of the device under
worst-case voltage and junction temperature conditions.
Table 5–33. Stratix II Device Timing Model Status
Device
Preliminary
Final
EP2S15
v
EP2S30
v
EP2S60
v
EP2S90
v
EP2S130
v
EP2S180
v
I/O Timing Measurement Methodology
Altera characterizes timing delays at the worst-case process, minimum
voltage, and maximum temperature for input register setup time (tSU)
and hold time (tH). The Quartus II software uses the following equations
to calculate tSU and tH timing for Stratix II devices input signals.
tSU = + data delay from input pin to input register
+ micro setup time of the input register
– clock delay from input pin to input register
tH = – data delay from input pin to input register
+ micro hold time of the input register
+ clock delay from input pin to input register
Figure 5–3 shows the setup and hold timing diagram for input registers.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–21
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Figure 5–3. Input Register Setup & Hold Timing Diagram
Input Data Delay
micro tSU
micro tH
Input Clock Delay
For output timing, different I/O standards require different baseline
loading techniques for reporting timing delays. Altera characterizes
timing delays with the required termination for each I/O standard and
with 0 pF (except for PCI and PCI-X which use 10 pF) loading and the
timing is specified up to the output pin of the FPGA device. The
Quartus II software calculates the I/O timing for each I/O standard with
a default baseline loading as specified by the I/O standards.
The following measurements are made during device characterization.
Altera measures clock-to-output delays (tCO) at worst-case process,
minimum voltage, and maximum temperature (PVT) for default loading
conditions shown in Table 5–34. Use the following equations to calculate
clock pin to output pin timing for Stratix II devices.
tCO from clock pin to I/O pin = delay from clock pad to I/O output
register + IOE output register clock-to-output delay + delay from
output register to output pin + I/O output delay
txz/tzx from clock pin to I/O pin = delay from clock pad to I/O
output register + IOE output register clock-to-output delay + delay
from output register to output pin + I/O output delay + output
enable pin delay
Simulation using IBIS models is required to determine the delays on the
PCB traces in addition to the output pin delay timing reported by the
Quartus II software and the timing model in the device handbook.
1.
Simulate the output driver of choice into the generalized test setup,
using values from Table 5–34.
2.
Record the time to VMEAS.
3.
Simulate the output driver of choice into the actual PCB trace and
load, using the appropriate IBIS model or capacitance value to
represent the load.
5–22
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
4.
Record the time to VMEAS.
5.
Compare the results of steps 2 and 4. The increase or decrease in
delay should be added to or subtracted from the I/O Standard
Output Adder delays to yield the actual worst-case propagation
delay (clock-to-output) of the PCB trace.
The Quartus II software reports the timing with the conditions shown in
Table 5–34 using the above equation. Figure 5–4 shows the model of the
circuit that is represented by the output timing of the Quartus II software.
Figure 5–4. Output Delay Timing Reporting Setup Modeled by Quartus II
VTT
VCCIO
RT
Output
Buffer
Output
GND
Outputp
RS
VMEAS
CL
Outputn
RD
GND
Notes to Figure 5–4:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Output pin timing is reported at the output pin of the FPGA device. Additional
delays for loading and board trace delay need to be accounted for with IBIS model
simulations.
VCCPD is 3.085 V unless otherwise specified.
VCCINT is 1.12 V unless otherwise specified.
Figures 5–5 and 5–6 show the measurement setup for output disable and
output enable timing.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–23
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–34. Output Timing Measurement Methodology for Output Pins
Notes (1), (2), (3)
Measurement
Point
Loading and Termination
I/O Standard
RS (Ω)
RD (Ω)
RT (Ω)
VCCIO (V)
VTT (V)
CL (pF)
VMEAS (V)
LVTTL (4)
3.135
0
1.5675
LVCMOS (4)
3.135
0
1.5675
2.5 V (4)
2.375
0
1.1875
1.8 V (4)
1.710
0
0.855
1.5 V (4)
1.425
0
0.7125
PCI (5)
2.970
10
1.485
PCI-X (5)
SSTL-2 Class I
2.970
25
50
2.325
1.123
10
1.485
0
1.1625
SSTL-2 Class II
25
25
2.325
1.123
0
1.1625
SSTL-18 Class I
25
50
1.660
0.790
0
0.83
SSTL-18 Class II
25
25
1.660
0.790
0
0.83
1.8-V HSTL Class I
50
50
1.660
0.790
0
0.83
1.8-V HSTL Class II
25
25
1.660
0.790
0
0.83
1.5-V HSTL Class I
50
50
1.375
0.648
0
0.6875
1.375
0.648
0
0.6875
0
0.570
1.5-V HSTL Class II
1.2-V HSTL with OCT
25
50
1.140
Differential SSTL-2 Class I
50
50
2.325
1.123
0
1.1625
Differential SSTL-2 Class II
25
25
2.325
1.123
0
1.1625
Differential SSTL-18 Class I
50
50
1.660
0.790
0
0.83
Differential SSTL-18 Class II
25
25
1.660
0.790
0
0.83
1.5-V Differential HSTL Class I
50
50
1.375
0.648
0
0.6875
25
1.375
0.648
0
0.6875
1.5-V Differential HSTL Class II
1.8-V Differential HSTL Class I
50
50
1.660
0.790
0
0.83
1.8-V Differential HSTL Class II
25
25
1.660
0.790
0
0.83
LVDS
100
2.325
0
1.1625
HyperTransport
100
2.325
0
1.1625
LVPECL
100
3.135
0
1.5675
Notes to Table 5–34:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Input measurement point at internal node is 0.5 × VCCINT.
Output measuring point for VMEAS at buffer output is 0.5 × VCCIO.
Input stimulus edge rate is 0 to VCC in 0.2 ns (internal signal) from the driver preceding the I/O buffer.
Less than 50-mV ripple on VCCIO and VCCPD, VCCINT = 1.15 V with less than 30-mV ripple
VCCPD = 2.97 V, less than 50-mV ripple on VCCIO and VCCPD, VCCINT = 1.15 V
5–24
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Figure 5–5. Measurement Setup for txz
Note (1)
tXZ, Driving High to Tristate
Enable
OE
OE
½ VCCINT
Dout
Din
100 Ω
Disable
“1”
Din
100 mv
Dout
thz
GND
tXZ, Driving Low to Tristate
Enable
OE
100 Ω
Disable
½ VCCINT
OE
Dout
Din
Din
Dout
“0”
tlz
VCCIO
100 mv
Note to Figure 5–5:
(1)
Altera Corporation
April 2011
VCCINT is 1.12 V for this measurement.
5–25
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Figure 5–6. Measurement Setup for tzx
tZX, Tristate to Driving High
Disable
OE
OE
Enable
½ VCCINT
Dout
Din
“1”
Din
1 MΩ
tzh
Dout
½ VCCIO
tZX, Tristate to Driving Low
Disable
Enable
½ VCCINT
OE
1 MΩ
OE
Dout
Din
“0”
Din
½ VCCIO
tzl
Dout
Table 5–35 specifies the input timing measurement setup.
Table 5–35. Timing Measurement Methodology for Input Pins (Part 1 of 2)
Notes (1)–(4)
Measurement Conditions
Measurement Point
I/O Standard
VCCIO (V)
LVTTL (5)
VREF (V)
3.135
Edge Rate (ns)
VM E A S (V)
3.135
1.5675
LVCMOS (5)
3.135
3.135
1.5675
2.5 V (5)
2.375
2.375
1.1875
1.8 V (5)
1.710
1.710
0.855
1.5 V (5)
1.425
1.425
0.7125
PCI (6)
2.970
2.970
1.485
PCI-X (6)
2.970
2.970
1.485
SSTL-2 Class I
2.325
1.163
2.325
1.1625
SSTL-2 Class II
2.325
1.163
2.325
1.1625
SSTL-18 Class I
1.660
0.830
1.660
0.83
SSTL-18 Class II
1.660
0.830
1.660
0.83
1.8-V HSTL Class I
1.660
0.830
1.660
0.83
5–26
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–35. Timing Measurement Methodology for Input Pins (Part 2 of 2)
Notes (1)–(4)
Measurement Conditions
Measurement Point
I/O Standard
VCCIO (V)
VREF (V)
Edge Rate (ns)
VM E A S (V)
1.8-V HSTL Class II
1.660
0.830
1.660
0.83
1.5-V HSTL Class I
1.375
0.688
1.375
0.6875
1.5-V HSTL Class II
1.375
0.688
1.375
0.6875
1.2-V HSTL with OCT
1.140
0.570
1.140
0.570
Differential SSTL-2 Class I
2.325
1.163
2.325
1.1625
Differential SSTL-2 Class II
2.325
1.163
2.325
1.1625
Differential SSTL-18 Class I
1.660
0.830
1.660
0.83
Differential SSTL-18 Class II
1.660
0.830
1.660
0.83
1.5-V Differential HSTL Class I
1.375
0.688
1.375
0.6875
1.5-V Differential HSTL Class II
1.375
0.688
1.375
0.6875
1.8-V Differential HSTL Class I
1.660
0.830
1.660
0.83
1.8-V Differential HSTL Class II
1.660
0.830
LVDS
2.325
1.660
0.83
0.100
1.1625
HyperTransport
2.325
0.400
1.1625
LVPECL
3.135
0.100
1.5675
Notes to Table 5–35:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Input buffer sees no load at buffer input.
Input measuring point at buffer input is 0.5 × VCCIO.
Output measuring point is 0.5 × VCC at internal node.
Input edge rate is 1 V/ns.
Less than 50-mV ripple on VCCIO and VCCPD, VCCINT = 1.15 V with less than 30-mV ripple
VCCPD = 2.97 V, less than 50-mV ripple on VCCIO and VCCPD, VCCINT = 1.15 V
Performance
Table 5–36 shows Stratix II performance for some common designs. All
performance values were obtained with the Quartus II software
compilation of library of parameterized modules (LPM), or MegaCore®
functions for the finite impulse response (FIR) and fast Fourier transform
(FFT) designs.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–27
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
1
The performance numbers in Table 5–36 are extracted from the
Quartus II software version 5.1 SP1.
Table 5–36. Stratix II Performance Notes (Part 1 of 6)
Note (1)
Resources Used
ALUTs
TriMatrix
Memory
Blocks
DSP
Blocks
-3
Speed
Grade
(2)
-3
Speed
Grade
(3)
-4
Speed
Grade
-5
Speed
Grade
Unit
21
0
0
654.87
625.0
523.83
460.4
MHz
Applications
LE
16-to-1 multiplexer (4)
Performance
32-to-1 multiplexer (4)
38
0
0
519.21
473.26
464.25
384.17
MHz
16-bit counter
16
0
0
566.57
538.79
489.23
421.05
MHz
64-bit counter
64
0
0
244.31
232.07
209.11
181.38
MHz
TriMatrix
Memory
M512
block
Simple dual-port RAM
32 × 18 bit
0
1
0
500.00
476.19
434.02
373.13
MHz
FIFO 32 x 18 bit
22
1
0
500.00
476.19
434.78
373.13
MHz
TriMatrix
Memory
M4K
block
Simple dual-port RAM
128 x 36 bit (8)
0
1
0
540.54
515.46
469.48
401.60
MHz
True dual-port RAM
128 × 18 bit (8)
0
1
0
540.54
515.46
469.48
401.60
MHz
FIFO
128 × 36 bit
22
1
0
530.22
499.00
469.48
401.60
MHz
Simple dual-port RAM
128 × 36 bit (9)
0
1
0
475.28
453.30
413.22
354.10
MHz
True dual-port RAM
128 × 18 bit (9)
0
1
0
475.28
453.30
413.22
354.10
MHz
5–28
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–36. Stratix II Performance Notes (Part 2 of 6)
Note (1)
Resources Used
ALUTs
TriMatrix
Memory
Blocks
DSP
Blocks
-3
Speed
Grade
(2)
-3
Speed
Grade
(3)
-4
Speed
Grade
-5
Speed
Grade
Unit
Single port
RAM 4K × 144 bit
0
1
0
349.65
333.33
303.95
261.09
MHz
Simple dual-port
RAM 4K × 144 bit
0
1
0
420.16
400.00
364.96
313.47
MHz
True dual-port
RAM 4K × 144 bit
0
1
0
349.65
333.33
303.95
261.09
MHz
Single port
RAM 8K × 72 bit
0
1
0
354.60
337.83
307.69
263.85
MHz
Simple dual-port
RAM 8K × 72 bit
0
1
0
420.16
400.00
364.96
313.47
MHz
True dual-port
RAM 8K × 72 bit
0
1
0
349.65
333.33
303.95
261.09
MHz
Single port
RAM 16K × 36 bit
0
1
0
364.96
347.22
317.46
271.73
MHz
Simple dual-port
RAM 16K × 36 bit
0
1
0
420.16
400.00
364.96
313.47
MHz
True dual-port
RAM 16K × 36 bit
0
1
0
359.71
342.46
313.47
268.09
MHz
Single port
RAM 32K × 18 bit
0
1
0
364.96
347.22
317.46
271.73
MHz
Simple dual-port
RAM 32K × 18 bit
0
1
0
420.16
400.0
364.96
313.47
MHz
True dual-port
RAM 32K × 18 bit
0
1
0
359.71
342.46
313.47
268.09
MHz
Single port
RAM 64K × 9 bit
0
1
0
364.96
347.22
317.46
271.73
MHz
Simple dual-port
RAM 64K × 9 bit
0
1
0
420.16
400.0
364.96
313.47
MHz
True dual-port
RAM 64K × 9 bit
0
1
0
359.71
342.46
313.47
268.09
MHz
Applications
TriMatrix
Memory
M-RAM
block
Performance
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–29
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–36. Stratix II Performance Notes (Part 3 of 6)
Note (1)
Resources Used
ALUTs
TriMatrix
Memory
Blocks
DSP
Blocks
-3
Speed
Grade
(2)
-3
Speed
Grade
(3)
-4
Speed
Grade
-5
Speed
Grade
Unit
9 × 9-bit multiplier (5)
0
0
1
430.29
409.16
373.13
320.10
MHz
18 × 18-bit
multiplier (5)
0
0
1
410.17
390.01
356.12
305.06
MHz
18 × 18-bit
multiplier (7)
0
0
1
450.04
428.08
391.23
335.12
MHz
36 × 36-bit
multiplier (5)
0
0
1
250.00
238.15
217.48
186.60
MHz
36 × 36-bit multiplier
(6)
0
0
1
410.17
390.01
356.12
305.06
MHz
18-bit, four-tap FIR
filter
0
0
1
410.17
390.01
356.12
305.06
MHz
8-bit,16-tap parallel
FIR filter
58
0
4
259.06
240.61
217.15
185.01
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
streaming, three
multipliers and five
adders FFT function
2976
22
9
398.72
364.03
355.23
306.37
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
streaming, four
multipliers and two
adders FFT function
2781
22
12
398.56
409.16
347.22
311.13
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
single output, one
parallel FFT engine,
burst, three multipliers
and five adders FFT
function
984
5
3
425.17
365.76
346.98
292.39
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
single output, one
parallel FFT engine,
burst, four multipliers
and two adders FFT
function
919
5
4
427.53
378.78
357.14
307.59
MHz
Applications
DSP
block
Larger
designs
Performance
5–30
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–36. Stratix II Performance Notes (Part 4 of 6)
Note (1)
Resources Used
ALUTs
TriMatrix
Memory
Blocks
DSP
Blocks
-3
Speed
Grade
(2)
-3
Speed
Grade
(3)
-4
Speed
Grade
-5
Speed
Grade
Unit
8-bit, 1024-point,
single output, two
parallel FFT engines,
burst, three multiplier
and five adders FFT
function
1725
10
6
430.29
401.92
373.13
319.08
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
single output, two
parallel FFT engines,
burst, four multipliers
and two adders FFT
function
1594
10
8
422.65
407.33
373.13
329.10
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, one
parallel FFT engine,
burst, three multipliers
and five adders FFT
function
2361
10
9
315.45
342.81
325.73
284.25
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, one
parallel FFT engine,
burst, four multipliers
and two adders FFT
function
2165
10
12
373.13
369.54
317.96
256.14
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, two
parallel FFT engines,
burst, three multipliers
and five adders FFT
function
3996
14
18
378.50
367.10
332.33
288.68
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, two
parallel FFT engines,
burst, four multipliers
and two adders FFT
function
3604
14
24
391.38
361.14
340.25
280.89
MHz
Applications
Larger
designs
Performance
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–31
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–36. Stratix II Performance Notes (Part 5 of 6)
Note (1)
Resources Used
ALUTs
TriMatrix
Memory
Blocks
DSP
Blocks
-3
Speed
Grade
(2)
-3
Speed
Grade
(3)
-4
Speed
Grade
-5
Speed
Grade
Unit
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, four
parallel FFT engines,
burst, three multipliers
and five adders FFT
function
6850
28
36
334.11
345.66
308.54
276.31
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, four
parallel FFT engines,
burst, four multipliers
two adders FFT
function
6067
28
48
367.91
349.04
327.33
268.24
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, one
parallel FFT engine,
buffered burst, three
multipliers and adders
FFT function
2730
18
9
387.44
388.34
364.56
306.84
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, one
parallel FFT engine,
buffered burst, four
multipliers and two
adders FFT function
2534
18
12
419.28
369.66
364.96
307.88
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, two
parallel FFT engines,
buffered burst, three
multipliers five adders
FFT function
4358
30
18
396.51
378.07
340.13
291.29
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, two
parallel FFT engines,
buffered burst four
multipliers and two
adders FFT function
3966
30
24
389.71
398.08
356.53
280.74
MHz
Applications
Larger
designs
Performance
5–32
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–36. Stratix II Performance Notes (Part 6 of 6)
Note (1)
Resources Used
ALUTs
TriMatrix
Memory
Blocks
DSP
Blocks
-3
Speed
Grade
(2)
-3
Speed
Grade
(3)
-4
Speed
Grade
-5
Speed
Grade
Unit
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, four
parallel FFT engines,
buffered burst, three
multipliers five adders
FFT function
7385
60
36
359.58
352.98
312.01
278.00
MHz
8-bit, 1024-point,
quadrant output, four
parallel FFT engines,
buffered burst, four
multipliers and two
adders FFT function
6601
60
48
371.88
355.74
327.86
277.62
MHz
Applications
Larger
designs
Performance
Notes for Table 5–36:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
These design performance numbers were obtained using the Quartus II software version 5.0 SP1.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
This application uses registered inputs and outputs.
This application uses registered multiplier input and output stages within the DSP block.
This application uses registered multiplier input, pipeline, and output stages within the DSP block.
This application uses registered multiplier input with output of the multiplier stage feeding the accumulator or
subtractor within the DSP block.
This application uses the same clock source that is globally routed and connected to ports A and B.
This application uses locally routed clocks or differently sourced clocks for ports A and B.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–33
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Internal Timing Parameters
See Tables 5–37 through 5–42 for internal timing parameters.
Table 5–37. LE_FF Internal Timing Microparameters
-3 Speed
Grade (1)
Symbol
-3 Speed
Grade (2)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Parameter
Unit
Min
(3)
Max
Min
(3)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(3)
Max
tS U
LE register setup time before
clock
90
95
104
104
121
ps
tH
LE register hold time after clock
149
157
172
172
200
ps
tC O
LE register clock-to-output
delay
62
tC L R
Minimum clear pulse width
204
214
234
234
273
ps
tP R E
Minimum preset pulse width
204
214
234
234
273
ps
tC L K L
Minimum clock low time
612
642
703
703
820
ps
tC L K H
Minimum clock high time
612
642
703
703
820
ps
94
62
99
59
62
109
62
127
ps
tL U T
162
378
162
397
162
170
435
162
507
ps
tA D D E R
354
619
354
650
354
372
712
354
829
ps
Notes to Table 5–37:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
For the -3 and -5 speed grades, the minimum timing is for the commercial temperature grade. Only -4 speed grade
devices offer the industrial temperature grade.
For the -4 speed grade, the first number is the minimum timing parameter for industrial devices. The second
number is the minimum timing parameter for commercial devices.
5–34
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–38. IOE Internal Timing Microparameters
-3 Speed
Grade (1)
Symbol
-3 Speed
Grade (2)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Parameter
Unit
Min
(3)
Max
Min
(3)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(3)
Max
tS U
IOE input and output
register setup time
before clock
122
128
140
140
163
ps
tH
IOE input and output
register hold time after
clock
72
75
82
82
96
ps
tC O
IOE input and output
register clock-tooutput delay
101
169
101
177
97
101
194
101
226
ps
tP I N 2 C O M B O U T _ R Row input pin to IOE
combinational output
410
760
410
798
391
410
873
410
1,018
ps
tP I N 2 C O M B O U T _ C Column input pin to
IOE combinational
output
428
787
428
825
408
428
904
428
1,054
ps
1,101
2,439
ps
991
2,246
ps
tC O M B I N 2 P I N _ R
Row IOE data input to
combinational output
pin
1,101
2,026 1,101
2,127
1,854
tC O M B I N 2 P I N _ C
Column IOE data
input to combinational
output pin
991
1,946
tC L R
Minimum clear pulse
width
200
210
229
229
268
ps
tP R E
Minimum preset pulse
width
200
210
229
229
268
ps
tC L K L
Minimum clock low
time
600
630
690
690
804
ps
tC L K H
Minimum clock high
time
600
630
690
690
804
ps
991
1,049 2,329
1,101
944
991
2,131
Notes to Table 5–38:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
For the -3 and -5 speed grades, the minimum timing is for the commercial temperature grade. Only -4 speed grade
devices offer the industrial temperature grade.
For the -4 speed grade, the first number is the minimum timing parameter for industrial devices. The second
number is the minimum timing parameter for commercial devices.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–35
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–39. DSP Block Internal Timing Microparameters (Part 1 of 2)
-3 Speed
Grade (1)
Symbol
-3 Speed
Grade (2)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Parameter
Unit
Min
(3)
Max
Min
(3)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(3)
Max
tS U
Input, pipeline, and
output register setup
time before clock
50
52
57
57
67
ps
tH
Input, pipeline, and
output register hold
time after clock
180
189
206
206
241
ps
tC O
Input, pipeline, and
output register clockto-output delay
tI N R E G 2 P I P E 9
Input register to DSP
block pipeline register
in 9 × 9-bit mode
1,312 2,030 1,312 2,030 1,250 2,334 1,312 2,720
1,312
ps
tI N R E G 2 P I P E 1 8
Input register to DSP
block pipeline register
in 18 × 18-bit mode
1,302 2,010 1,302 2,110 1,240 2,311 1,302 2,693
1,302
ps
tI N R E G 2 P I P E 3 6
Input register to DSP
block pipeline register
in 36 × 36-bit mode
1,302 2,010 1,302 2,110 1,240 2,311 1,302 2,693
1,302
ps
tP I P E 2 O U T R E G 2 A D D DSP block pipeline
register to output
register delay in twomultipliers adder
mode
0
1,450
0
924
0
880
924
0
924
0
ps
tP I P E 2 O U T R E G 4 A D D DSP block pipeline
register to output
register delay in fourmultipliers adder
mode
1,134 1,850 1,134 1,942 1,080 2,127 1,134 2,479
1,134
ps
tP D 9
Combinational input
to output delay for
9×9
2,100 2,880 2,100 3,024 2,000 3,312 2,100 3,859
2,100
ps
tP D 1 8
Combinational input
to output delay for
18 × 18
2,110 2,990 2,110 3,139 2,010 3,438 2,110 4,006
2,110
ps
tP D 3 6
Combinational input
to output delay for
36 × 36
2,939 4,450 2,939 4,672 2,800 5,117 2,939 5,962
2,939
ps
tC L R
Minimum clear pulse
width
2,212
ps
2,543
2,543
1,667
0
ps
2,322
1,522
0
0
1,943
5–36
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
924
0
2,964
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–39. DSP Block Internal Timing Microparameters (Part 2 of 2)
-3 Speed
Grade (1)
Symbol
-3 Speed
Grade (2)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Parameter
Unit
Min
(3)
Max
Min
(3)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(3)
Max
tC L K L
Minimum clock low
time
1,190
1,249
1,368
1,368
1,594
ps
tC L K H
Minimum clock high
time
1,190
1,249
1,368
1,368
1,594
ps
Notes to Table 5–39:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
For the -3 and -5 speed grades, the minimum timing is for the commercial temperature grade. Only -4 speed grade
devices offer the industrial temperature grade.
For the -4 speed grade, the first number is the minimum timing parameter for industrial devices. The second
number is the minimum timing parameter for commercial devices.
Table 5–40. M512 Block Internal Timing Microparameters (Part 1 of 2)
-3 Speed
Grade (2)
Symbol
-3 Speed
Grade (3)
Note (1)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Parameter
Unit
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(4)
2.433
Max
1,989 2,664
2,089
Min
(4)
Max
2,089
3,104
tM 5 1 2 R C
Synchronous read cycle
time
2,089
tM 5 1 2 W E R E S U
Write or read enable
setup time before clock
22
23
25
25
29
ps
tM 5 1 2 W E R E H
Write or read enable
hold time after clock
203
213
233
233
272
ps
tM 5 1 2 D ATA S U
Data setup time before
clock
22
23
25
25
29
ps
tM 5 1 2 D ATA H
Data hold time after
clock
203
213
233
233
272
ps
tM 5 1 2 WA D D R S U Write address setup
time before clock
22
23
25
25
29
ps
tM 5 1 2 WA D D R H
Write address hold time
after clock
203
213
233
233
272
ps
tM 5 1 2 R A D D R S U
Read address setup
time before clock
22
23
25
25
29
ps
tM 5 1 2 R A D D R H
Read address hold time
after clock
203
213
233
233
272
ps
Altera Corporation
April 2011
2,318 2,089
Max
Min
(5)
ps
5–37
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–40. M512 Block Internal Timing Microparameters (Part 2 of 2)
-3 Speed
Grade (2)
Symbol
-3 Speed
Grade (3)
Note (1)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Parameter
Unit
Min
(4)
298
Max
Min
(4)
Max
478
298
501
2,461
Min
(5)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
284
298
548
298
640
ps
2,003
2,102
2,695
2,102
3,141
ps
tM 5 1 2 D ATA C O 1
Clock-to-output delay
when using output
registers
tM 5 1 2 D ATA C O 2
Clock-to-output delay
without output registers
2,102
2,345 2,102
tM 5 1 2 C L K L
Minimum clock low time
1,315
1,380
1,512
1,512
1,762
ps
tM 5 1 2 C L K H
Minimum clock high time 1,315
1,380
1,512
1,512
1,762
ps
tM 5 1 2 C L R
Minimum clear pulse
width
151
165
165
192
ps
144
Notes to Table 5–40:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
FMAX of M512 block obtained using the Quartus II software does not necessarily equal to 1/TM512RC.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
For the -3 and -5 speed grades, the minimum timing is for the commercial temperature grade. Only -4 speed grade
devices offer the industrial temperature grade.
For the -4 speed grade, the first number is the minimum timing parameter for industrial devices. The second
number is the minimum timing parameter for commercial devices.
Table 5–41. M4K Block Internal Timing Microparameters (Part 1 of 2)
-3 Speed
Grade (2)
Symbol
-3 Speed
Grade (3)
Note (1)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Parameter
Unit
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
2,240
1,462
2,351
Min
(5)
2,575
Max
tM 4 K R C
Synchronous read cycle
time
1,462
tM 4 K W E R E S U
Write or read enable
setup time before clock
22
23
25
25
29
ps
tM 4 K W E R E H
Write or read enable
hold time after clock
203
213
233
233
272
ps
tM 4 K B E S U
Byte enable setup time
before clock
22
23
25
25
29
ps
tM 4 K B E H
Byte enable hold time
after clock
203
213
233
233
272
ps
5–38
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
1,393
1,462
Max
Min
(4)
1,462 3,000
ps
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–41. M4K Block Internal Timing Microparameters (Part 2 of 2)
-3 Speed
Grade (2)
Symbol
-3 Speed
Grade (3)
Note (1)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Parameter
Unit
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(5)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
tM 4 K D ATA A S U
A port data setup time
before clock
22
23
25
25
29
ps
tM 4 K D ATA A H
A port data hold time
after clock
203
213
233
233
272
ps
tM 4 K A D D R A S U
A port address setup
time before clock
22
23
25
25
29
ps
tM 4 K A D D R A H
A port address hold time
after clock
203
213
233
233
272
ps
tM 4 K D ATA B S U
B port data setup time
before clock
22
23
25
25
29
ps
tM 4 K D ATA B H
B port data hold time
after clock
203
213
233
233
272
ps
tM 4 K R A D D R B S U B port address setup
time before clock
22
23
25
25
29
ps
tM 4 K R A D D R B H
B port address hold time
after clock
203
213
233
233
272
ps
tM 4 K D ATA C O 1
Clock-to-output delay
when using output
registers
334
524
334
549
319
334
601
tM 4 K D ATA C O 2
(6)
Clock-to-output delay
without output registers
1,616
2,453
1,616
2,574
1,540
1,616
2,820
tM 4 K C L K H
Minimum clock high time 1,250
1,312
tM 4 K C L K L
Minimum clock low time
1,250
tM 4 K C L R
Minimum clear pulse
width
144
334
701
ps
1,616 3,286
ps
1,437
1,437
1,675
ps
1,312
1,437
1,437
1,675
ps
151
165
165
192
ps
Notes to Table 5–41:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
FMAX of M4K Block obtained using the Quartus II software does not necessarily equal to 1/TM4KRC.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
For the -3 and -5 speed grades, the minimum timing is for the commercial temperature grade. Only -4 speed grade
devices offer the industrial temperature grade.
For the -4 speed grade, the first number is the minimum timing parameter for industrial devices. The second
number is the minimum timing parameter for commercial devices.
Numbers apply to unpacked memory modes, true dual-port memory modes, and simple dual-port memory modes
that use locally routed or non-identical sources for the A and B port registers.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–39
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–42. M-RAM Block Internal Timing Microparameters (Part 1 of 2)
-3 Speed
Grade (2)
Symbol
-3 Speed
Grade (3)
Note (1)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Parameter
Unit
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
2,774
1,866
2,911
Min
(5)
Synchronous read cycle
time
1,866
tM E G AW E R E S U
Write or read enable
setup time before clock
144
151
165
165
192
ps
tM E G AW E R E H
Write or read enable
hold time after clock
39
40
44
44
52
ps
tM E G A B E S U
Byte enable setup time
before clock
50
52
57
57
67
ps
tM E G A B E H
Byte enable hold time
after clock
39
40
44
44
52
ps
tM E G A D ATA A S U
A port data setup time
before clock
50
52
57
57
67
ps
tM E G A D ATA A H
A port data hold time
after clock
243
255
279
279
325
ps
tM E G A A D D R A S U A port address setup
time before clock
589
618
677
677
789
ps
tM E G A A D D R A H
A port address hold time
after clock
241
253
277
277
322
ps
tM E G A D ATA B S U
B port setup time before
clock
50
52
57
57
67
ps
tM E G A D ATA B H
B port hold time after
clock
243
255
279
279
325
ps
tM E G A A D D R B S U B port address setup
time before clock
589
618
677
677
789
ps
tM E G A A D D R B H
B port address hold time
after clock
241
253
277
277
322
ps
tM E G A D ATA C O 1
Clock-to-output delay
when using output
registers
480
715
480
749
457
480
821
480
957
ps
tM E G A D ATA C O 2
Clock-to-output delay
without output registers
1,950
2,899
1,950
3,042
1,857
1,950
3,332
1,950
3,884
ps
tM E G A C L K L
Minimum clock low time
1,250
5–40
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
1,437
1,437
3,189
1,777
1,866
Max
tM E G A R C
1,312
1,777
1,866
Max
Min
(4)
1,675
3,716
ps
ps
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–42. M-RAM Block Internal Timing Microparameters (Part 2 of 2)
-3 Speed
Grade (2)
Symbol
-3 Speed
Grade (3)
Note (1)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Parameter
Unit
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
Min
(5)
Max
Min
(4)
Max
tM E G A C L K H
Minimum clock high
time
1,250
1,312
1,437
1,437
1,675
ps
tM E G A C L R
Minimum clear pulse
width
144
151
165
165
192
ps
Notes to Table 5–42:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
FMAX of M-RAM Block obtained using the Quartus II software does not necessarily equal to 1/TMEGARC.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
For the -3 and -5 speed grades, the minimum timing is for the commercial temperature grade. Only -4 speed grade
devices offer the industrial temperature grade.
For the -4 speed grade, the first number is the minimum timing parameter for industrial devices. The second
number is the minimum timing parameter for commercial devices.
Stratix II Clock Timing Parameters
See Tables 5–43 through 5–67 for Stratix II clock timing parameters.
Table 5–43. Stratix II Clock Timing Parameters
Symbol
Altera Corporation
April 2011
Parameter
tC I N
Delay from clock pad to I/O input register
tC O U T
Delay from clock pad to I/O output register
tP L L C I N
Delay from PLL inclk pad to I/O input register
tP L L C O U T
Delay from PLL inclk pad to I/O output register
5–41
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
EP2S15 Clock Timing Parameters
Tables 5–44 though 5–47 show the maximum clock timing parameters for
EP2S15 devices.
Table 5–44. EP2S15 Column Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.445
1.512
2.487
2.848
3.309
ns
tC O U T
1.288
1.347
2.245
2.570
2.985
ns
Parameter
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
tP L L C I N
0.104
0.102
0.336
0.373
0.424
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.053
-0.063
0.094
0.095
0.1
ns
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Table 5–45. EP2S15 Column Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Parameter
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.419
1.487
2.456
2.813
3.273
ns
tC O U T
1.262
1.322
2.214
2.535
2.949
ns
tP L L C I N
0.094
0.092
0.326
0.363
0.414
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.063
-0.073
0.084
0.085
0.09
ns
Table 5–46. EP2S15 Row Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
1.232
1.288
2.144
Parameter
tC I N
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
2.454
2.848
ns
tC O U T
1.237
1.293
2.140
2.450
2.843
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.109
-0.122
-0.007
-0.021
-0.037
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.104
-0.117
-0.011
-0.025
-0.042
ns
5–42
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–47. EP2S15 Row Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
1.206
1.262
2.113
Parameter
tC I N
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
2.422
2.815
ns
tC O U T
1.211
1.267
2.109
2.418
2.810
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.125
-0.138
-0.023
-0.038
-0.056
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.12
-0.133
-0.027
-0.042
-0.061
ns
EP2S30 Clock Timing Parameters
Tables 5–48 through 5–51 show the maximum clock timing parameters
for EP2S30 devices.
Table 5–48. EP2S30 Column Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Parameter
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
tC I N
1.553
1.627
2.639
3.025
3.509
ns
tC O U T
1.396
1.462
2.397
2.747
3.185
ns
tP L L C I N
0.114
0.113
0.225
0.248
0.28
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.043
-0.052
-0.017
-0.03
-0.044
ns
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Table 5–49. EP2S30 Column Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.539
1.613
2.622
3.008
3.501
ns
tC O U T
1.382
1.448
2.380
2.730
3.177
ns
tP L L C I N
0.101
0.098
0.209
0.229
0.267
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.056
-0.067
-0.033
-0.049
-0.057
ns
Parameter
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–43
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–50. EP2S30 Row Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
1.304
1.184
1.966
Parameter
tC I N
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
2.251
2.616
ns
tC O U T
1.309
1.189
1.962
2.247
2.611
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.135
–0.158
–0.208
–0.254
–0.302
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.13
–0.153
–0.212
–0.258
–0.307
ns
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Table 5–51. EP2S30 Row Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Parameter
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.289
1.352
2.238
2.567
2.990
ns
tC O U T
1.294
1.357
2.234
2.563
2.985
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.14
-0.154
-0.169
-0.205
-0.254
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.135
-0.149
-0.173
-0.209
-0.259
ns
EP2S60 Clock Timing Parameters
Tables 5–52 through 5–55 show the maximum clock timing parameters
for EP2S60 devices.
Table 5–52. EP2S60 Column Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.681
1.762
2.945
3.381
3.931
ns
tC O U T
1.524
1.597
2.703
3.103
3.607
ns
tP L L C I N
0.066
0.064
0.279
0.311
0.348
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.091
-0.101
0.037
0.033
0.024
ns
Parameter
5–44
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–53. EP2S60 Column Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.658
1.739
2.920
tC O U T
1.501
1.574
2.678
3.072
3.575
ns
tP L L C I N
0.06
0.057
0.278
0.304
0.355
ns
-0.097
-0.108
0.036
0.026
0.031
ns
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Parameter
tP L L C O U T
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
3.350
3.899
ns
Table 5–54. EP2S60 Row Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Parameter
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.463
1.532
2.591
2.972
3.453
ns
tC O U T
1.468
1.537
2.587
2.968
3.448
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.153
-0.167
-0.079
-0.099
-0.128
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.148
-0.162
-0.083
-0.103
-0.133
ns
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Table 5–55. EP2S60 Row Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.439
1.508
2.562
2.940
3.421
ns
tC O U T
1.444
1.513
2.558
2.936
3.416
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.161
-0.174
-0.083
-0.107
-0.126
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.156
-0.169
-0.087
-0.111
-0.131
ns
Parameter
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–45
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
EP2S90 Clock Timing Parameters
Tables 5–56 through 5–59 show the maximum clock timing parameters
for EP2S90 devices.
Table 5–56. EP2S90 Column Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.768
1.850
3.033
3.473
4.040
ns
tC O U T
1.611
1.685
2.791
3.195
3.716
ns
Parameter
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
tP L L C I N
-0.127
-0.117
0.125
0.129
0.144
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.284
-0.282
-0.117
-0.149
-0.18
ns
Table 5–57. EP2S90 Column Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Industrial
tC I N
1.783
1.868
3.058
3.502
4.070
ns
tC O U T
1.626
1.703
2.816
3.224
3.746
ns
Parameter
tP L L C I N
-0.137
-0.127
0.115
0.119
0.134
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.294
-0.292
-0.127
-0.159
-0.19
ns
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
3.124
3.632
ns
Table 5–58. EP2S90 Row Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
1.566
1.638
2.731
Parameter
tC I N
tC O U T
1.571
1.643
2.727
3.120
3.627
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.326
-0.326
-0.178
-0.218
-0.264
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.321
-0.321
-0.182
-0.222
-0.269
ns
5–46
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–59. EP2S90 Row Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
1.585
1.658
2.757
Parameter
tC I N
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
3.154
3.665
ns
tC O U T
1.590
1.663
2.753
3.150
3.660
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.341
-0.341
-0.193
-0.235
-0.278
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.336
-0.336
-0.197
-0.239
-0.283
ns
EP2S130 Clock Timing Parameters
Tables 5–60 through 5–63 show the maximum clock timing parameters
for EP2S130 devices.
Table 5–60. EP2S130 Column Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Parameter
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
tC I N
1.889
1.981
3.405
3.722
4.326
ns
tC O U T
1.732
1.816
3.151
3.444
4.002
ns
tP L L C I N
0.105
0.106
0.226
0.242
0.277
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.052
-0.059
-0.028
-0.036
-0.047
ns
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Table 5–61. EP2S130 Column Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.907
1.998
3.420
3.740
4.348
ns
tC O U T
1.750
1.833
3.166
3.462
4.024
ns
tP L L C I N
0.134
0.136
0.276
0.296
0.338
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.023
-0.029
0.022
0.018
0.014
ns
Parameter
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–47
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–62. EP2S130 Row Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
1.680
1.760
3.070
Parameter
tC I N
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
3.351
3.892
ns
tC O U T
1.685
1.765
3.066
3.347
3.887
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.113
-0.124
-0.12
-0.138
-0.168
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.108
-0.119
-0.124
-0.142
-0.173
ns
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Table 5–63. EP2S130 Row Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Parameter
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.690
1.770
3.075
3.362
3.905
ns
tC O U T
1.695
1.775
3.071
3.358
3.900
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.087
-0.097
-0.075
-0.089
-0.11
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.082
-0.092
-0.079
-0.093
-0.115
ns
EP2S180 Clock Timing Parameters
Tables 5–64 through 5–67 show the maximum clock timing parameters
for EP2S180 devices.
Table 5–64. EP2S180 Column Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
2.001
2.095
3.643
3.984
4.634
ns
tC O U T
1.844
1.930
3.389
3.706
4.310
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.307
-0.297
0.053
0.046
0.048
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.464
-0.462
-0.201
-0.232
-0.276
ns
Parameter
5–48
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–65. EP2S180 Column Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
2.003
2.100
3.652
3.993
4.648
ns
tC O U T
1.846
1.935
3.398
3.715
4.324
ns
-0.3
-0.29
0.053
0.054
0.058
ns
-0.457
-0.455
-0.201
-0.224
-0.266
ns
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Parameter
tP L L C I N
tP L L C O U T
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Table 5–66. EP2S180 Row Pins Regional Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Parameter
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.759
1.844
3.273
3.577
4.162
ns
tC O U T
1.764
1.849
3.269
3.573
4.157
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.542
-0.541
-0.317
-0.353
-0.414
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.537
-0.536
-0.321
-0.357
-0.419
ns
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Unit
Table 5–67. EP2S180 Row Pins Global Clock Timing Parameters
Minimum Timing
Industrial
Commercial
-3 Speed
Grade
tC I N
1.763
1.850
3.285
3.588
4.176
ns
tC O U T
1.768
1.855
3.281
3.584
4.171
ns
tP L L C I N
-0.542
-0.542
-0.319
-0.355
-0.42
ns
tP L L C O U T
-0.537
-0.537
-0.323
-0.359
-0.425
ns
Parameter
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–49
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Clock Network Skew Adders
The Quartus II software models skew within dedicated clock networks
such as global and regional clocks. Therefore, intra-clock network skew
adder is not specified. Table 5–68 specifies the clock skew between any
two clock networks driving registers in the IOE.
Table 5–68. Clock Network Specifications
Name
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Clock skew adder
EP2S15, EP2S30,
EP2S60 (1)
Inter-clock network, same side
±50
ps
Inter-clock network, entire chip
±100
ps
Clock skew adder
EP2S90 (1)
Inter-clock network, same side
±55
ps
Inter-clock network, entire chip
±110
ps
Clock skew adder
EP2S130 (1)
Inter-clock network, same side
±63
ps
Inter-clock network, entire chip
±125
ps
Clock skew adder
EP2S180 (1)
Inter-clock network, same side
±75
ps
Inter-clock network, entire chip
±150
ps
Note to Table 5–68:
(1)
This is in addition to intra-clock network skew, which is modeled in the Quartus II software.
5–50
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
IOE Programmable Delay
See Tables 5–69 and 5–70 for IOE programmable delay.
Table 5–69. Stratix II IOE Programmable Delay on Column Pins
Minimum
Timing (2)
Parameter
Paths Affected
Available
Settings
Note (1)
-3 Speed
Grade (3)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
Input delay from Pad to I/O
dataout to logic
pin to internal
array
cells
8
0
0
1,696
1,781
0
0
2,881
3,025
0
3,313
0
3,860
Input delay from Pad to I/O input
register
pin to input
register
64
0
0
1,955
2,053
0
0
3,275
3,439
0
3,766
0
4,388
Delay from
output register
to output pin
I/O output
register to pad
2
0
0
316
332
0
0
500
525
0
575
0
670
Output enable
pin delay
tX Z , tZ X
2
0
0
305
320
0
0
483
507
0
556
0
647
Notes to Table 5–69:
(1)
(2)
(3)
The incremental values for the settings are generally linear. For the exact delay associated with each setting, use the
latest version of the Quartus II software.
The first number is the minimum timing parameter for industrial devices. The second number is the minimum
timing parameter for commercial devices.
The first number applies to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices. The second number
applies to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–51
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–70. Stratix II IOE Programmable Delay on Row Pins
Minimum
Timing (2)
Parameter
Paths Affected
Available
Settings
Note (1)
-3 Speed
Grade (3)
-4 Speed
Grade
-5 Speed
Grade
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset Offset
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
(ps)
Input delay from Pad to I/O
dataout to logic
pin to internal
array
cells
8
0
0
1,697
1,782
0
0
2,876
3,020
0
3,308
0
3,853
Input delay from Pad to I/O input
register
pin to input
register
64
0
0
1,956
2,054
0
0
3,270
3,434
0
3,761
0
4,381
Delay from
output register
to output pin
I/O output
register to pad
2
0
0
316
332
0
0
525
525
0
575
0
670
Output enable
pin delay
tX Z , tZ X
2
0
0
305
320
0
0
507
507
0
556
0
647
Notes to Table 5–70:
(1)
(2)
(3)
The incremental values for the settings are generally linear. For the exact delay associated with each setting, use the
latest version of the Quartus II software.
The first number is the minimum timing parameter for industrial devices. The second number is the minimum
timing parameter for commercial devices.
The first number applies to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices. The second number
applies to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
Default Capacitive Loading of Different I/O Standards
See Table 5–71 for default capacitive loading of different I/O standards.
Table 5–71. Default Loading of Different I/O Standards for Stratix II (Part 1
of 2)
I/O Standard
Capacitive Load
Unit
LVTTL
0
pF
LVCMOS
0
pF
2.5 V
0
pF
1.8 V
0
pF
1.5 V
0
pF
PCI
10
pF
PCI-X
10
pF
SSTL-2 Class I
0
pF
5–52
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–71. Default Loading of Different I/O Standards for Stratix II (Part 2
of 2)
I/O Standard
SSTL-2 Class II
Altera Corporation
April 2011
Capacitive Load
Unit
0
pF
SSTL-18 Class I
0
pF
SSTL-18 Class II
0
pF
1.5-V HSTL Class I
0
pF
1.5-V HSTL Class II
0
pF
1.8-V HSTL Class I
0
pF
1.8-V HSTL Class II
0
pF
1.2-V HSTL with OCT
0
pF
Differential SSTL-2 Class I
0
pF
Differential SSTL-2 Class II
0
pF
Differential SSTL-18 Class I
0
pF
Differential SSTL-18 Class II
0
pF
1.5-V Differential HSTL Class I
0
pF
1.5-V Differential HSTL Class II
0
pF
1.8-V Differential HSTL Class I
0
pF
1.8-V Differential HSTL Class II
0
pF
LVDS
0
pF
HyperTransport
0
pF
LVPECL
0
pF
5–53
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
I/O Delays
See Tables 5–72 through 5–76 for I/O delays.
Table 5–72. I/O Delay Parameters
Symbol
Parameter
tD I P
Delay from I/O datain to output pad
tO P
Delay from I/O output register to output pad
tP C O U T
Delay from input pad to I/O dataout to core
tP I
Delay from input pad to I/O input register
Table 5–73. Stratix II I/O Input Delay for Column Pins (Part 1 of 3)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
Parameter
Industrial
LVTTL
2.5 V
1.8 V
1.5 V
LVCMOS
SSTL-2 Class I
SSTL-2 Class II
SSTL-18 Class I
SSTL-18 Class II
1.5-V HSTL
Class I
-3 Speed -3 Speed
-4 Speed -5 Speed
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Commercial
(2)
(3)
Unit
tP I
674
707
1223
1282
1405
1637
ps
tP C O U T
408
428
787
825
904
1054
ps
tP I
684
717
1210
1269
1390
1619
ps
tP C O U T
418
438
774
812
889
1036
ps
tP I
747
783
1366
1433
1570
1829
ps
tP C O U T
481
504
930
976
1069
1246
ps
tP I
749
786
1436
1506
1650
1922
ps
tP C O U T
483
507
1000
1049
1149
1339
ps
tP I
674
707
1223
1282
1405
1637
ps
tP C O U T
408
428
787
825
904
1054
ps
tP I
507
530
818
857
939
1094
ps
tP C O U T
241
251
382
400
438
511
ps
tP I
507
530
818
857
939
1094
ps
tP C O U T
241
251
382
400
438
511
ps
tP I
543
569
898
941
1031
1201
ps
tP C O U T
277
290
462
484
530
618
ps
tP I
543
569
898
941
1031
1201
ps
tP C O U T
277
290
462
484
530
618
ps
tP I
560
587
993
1041
1141
1329
ps
tP C O U T
294
308
557
584
640
746
ps
5–54
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–73. Stratix II I/O Input Delay for Column Pins (Part 2 of 3)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
Parameter
Industrial
1.5-V HSTL
Class II
1.8-V HSTL
Class I
1.8-V HSTL
Class II
PCI
PCI-X
Differential
SSTL-2 Class I
(1)
Differential
SSTL-2 Class II
(1)
Differential
SSTL-18 Class I
(1)
Differential
SSTL-18 Class II
(1)
1.8-V Differential
HSTL Class I (1)
1.8-V Differential
HSTL Class II (1)
1.5-V Differential
HSTL Class I (1)
1.5-V Differential
HSTL Class II (1)
Altera Corporation
April 2011
tP I
560
-3 Speed -3 Speed
-4 Speed -5 Speed
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Commercial
(2)
(3)
587
993
1041
1141
Unit
1329
ps
tP C O U T
294
308
557
584
640
746
ps
tP I
543
569
898
941
1031
1201
ps
tP C O U T
277
290
462
484
530
618
ps
tP I
543
569
898
941
1031
1201
ps
tP C O U T
277
290
462
484
530
618
ps
tP I
679
712
1214
1273
1395
1625
ps
tP C O U T
413
433
778
816
894
1042
ps
tP I
679
712
1214
1273
1395
1625
ps
tP C O U T
413
433
778
816
894
1042
ps
tP I
507
530
818
857
939
1094
ps
tP C O U T
241
251
382
400
438
511
ps
tP I
507
530
818
857
939
1094
ps
tP C O U T
241
251
382
400
438
511
ps
tP I
543
569
898
941
1031
1201
ps
tP C O U T
277
290
462
484
530
618
ps
tP I
543
569
898
941
1031
1201
ps
tP C O U T
277
290
462
484
530
618
ps
tP I
543
569
898
941
1031
1201
ps
tP C O U T
277
290
462
484
530
618
ps
tP I
543
569
898
941
1031
1201
ps
tP C O U T
277
290
462
484
530
618
ps
tP I
560
587
993
1041
1141
1329
ps
tP C O U T
294
308
557
584
640
746
ps
tP I
560
587
993
1041
1141
1329
ps
tP C O U T
294
308
557
584
640
746
ps
5–55
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–73. Stratix II I/O Input Delay for Column Pins (Part 3 of 3)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
Parameter
Industrial
1.2-V HSTL
-3 Speed -3 Speed
-4 Speed -5 Speed
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Commercial
(2)
(3)
Unit
tP I
645
677
1194
1252
-
-
ps
tP C O U T
379
398
758
795
-
-
ps
Notes for Table 5–73:
(1)
(2)
(3)
These I/O standards are only supported on DQS pins.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
Table 5–74. Stratix II I/O Input Delay for Row Pins (Part 1 of 2)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
Parameter
Industrial
LVTTL
2.5 V
1.8 V
1.5 V
-3 Speed -3 Speed
-4 Speed -5 Speed
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Commercial
(1)
(2)
Unit
tP I
715
749
1287
1350
1477
1723
ps
tP C O U T
391
410
760
798
873
1018
ps
tP I
726
761
1273
1335
1461
1704
ps
tP C O U T
402
422
746
783
857
999
ps
tP I
788
827
1427
1497
1639
1911
ps
tP C O U T
464
488
900
945
1035
1206
ps
tP I
792
830
1498
1571
1720
2006
ps
tP C O U T
468
491
971
1019
1116
1301
ps
LVCMOS
tP I
715
749
1287
1350
1477
1723
ps
tP C O U T
391
410
760
798
873
1018
ps
SSTL-2 Class I
tP I
547
573
879
921
1008
1176
ps
tP C O U T
223
234
352
369
404
471
ps
tP I
547
573
879
921
1008
1176
ps
SSTL-2 Class II
SSTL-18 Class I
SSTL-18 Class II
1.5-V HSTL
Class I
tP C O U T
223
234
352
369
404
471
ps
tP I
577
605
960
1006
1101
1285
ps
tP C O U T
253
266
433
454
497
580
ps
tP I
577
605
960
1006
1101
1285
ps
tP C O U T
253
266
433
454
497
580
ps
tP I
602
631
1056
1107
1212
1413
ps
tP C O U T
278
292
529
555
608
708
ps
5–56
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–74. Stratix II I/O Input Delay for Row Pins (Part 2 of 2)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
Parameter
Industrial
1.5-V HSTL
Class II
tP I
1.8-V HSTL
Class I
1.8-V HSTL
Class II
-3 Speed -3 Speed
-4 Speed -5 Speed
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Commercial
(1)
(2)
602
631
1056
1107
1212
Unit
1413
ps
tP C O U T
278
292
529
555
608
708
ps
tP I
577
605
960
1006
1101
1285
ps
tP C O U T
253
266
433
454
497
580
ps
tP I
577
605
960
1006
1101
1285
ps
tP C O U T
253
266
433
454
497
580
ps
LVDS
tP I
515
540
948
994
1088
1269
ps
tP C O U T
191
201
421
442
484
564
ps
HyperTransport
tP I
515
540
948
994
1088
1269
ps
tP C O U T
191
201
421
442
484
564
ps
Notes for Table 5–74:
(1)
(2)
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
Table 5–75. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Column Pins (Part 1 of 8)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
LVTTL
Drive
Parameter
Strength
4 mA
8 mA
12 mA
16 mA
Industrial
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed Unit
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(3)
(4)
tO P
1178
1236
2351
2467
2702
2820
ps
tD I P
1198
1258
2417
2537
2778
2910
ps
tO P
1041
1091
2036
2136
2340
2448
ps
tD I P
1061
1113
2102
2206
2416
2538
ps
tO P
976
1024
2036
2136
2340
2448
ps
tD I P
996
1046
2102
2206
2416
2538
ps
tO P
951
998
1893
1986
2176
2279
ps
tD I P
971
1020
1959
2056
2252
2369
ps
20 mA
tO P
931
976
1787
1875
2054
2154
ps
tD I P
951
998
1853
1945
2130
2244
ps
24 mA
(1)
tO P
924
969
1788
1876
2055
2156
ps
tD I P
944
991
1854
1946
2131
2246
ps
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–57
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–75. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Column Pins (Part 2 of 8)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
LVCMOS
Drive
Parameter
Strength
4 mA
8 mA
12 mA
16 mA
tO P
1041
1091
2036
2136
2340
2448
ps
tD I P
1061
1113
2102
2206
2416
2538
ps
tO P
952
999
1786
1874
2053
2153
ps
tD I P
972
1021
1852
1944
2129
2243
ps
tO P
926
971
1720
1805
1977
2075
ps
tD I P
946
993
1786
1875
2053
2165
ps
tO P
933
978
1693
1776
1946
2043
ps
tD I P
953
1000
1759
1846
2022
2133
ps
tO P
921
965
1677
1759
1927
2025
ps
tD I P
941
987
1743
1829
2003
2115
ps
24 mA
(1)
tO P
909
954
1659
1741
1906
2003
ps
tD I P
929
976
1725
1811
1982
2093
ps
4 mA
tO P
1004
1053
2063
2165
2371
2480
ps
tD I P
1024
1075
2129
2235
2447
2570
ps
8 mA
tO P
955
1001
1841
1932
2116
2218
ps
tD I P
975
1023
1907
2002
2192
2308
ps
20 mA
2.5 V
Industrial
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed Unit
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(3)
(4)
12 mA
16 mA
(1)
tO P
934
980
1742
1828
2002
2101
ps
tD I P
954
1002
1808
1898
2078
2191
ps
tO P
918
962
1679
1762
1929
2027
ps
tD I P
938
984
1745
1832
2005
2117
ps
5–58
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–75. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Column Pins (Part 3 of 8)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
1.8 V
Drive
Parameter
Strength
2 mA
Industrial
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed Unit
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(3)
(4)
tO P
1042
1093
2904
3048
3338
3472
ps
tD I P
1062
1115
2970
3118
3414
3562
ps
4 mA
tO P
1047
1098
2248
2359
2584
2698
ps
tD I P
1067
1120
2314
2429
2660
2788
ps
6 mA
tO P
974
1022
2024
2124
2326
2434
ps
tD I P
994
1044
2090
2194
2402
2524
ps
tO P
976
1024
1947
2043
2238
2343
ps
tD I P
996
1046
2013
2113
2314
2433
ps
tO P
933
978
1882
1975
2163
2266
ps
tD I P
953
1000
1948
2045
2239
2356
ps
12 mA
(1)
tO P
934
979
1833
1923
2107
2209
ps
tD I P
954
1001
1899
1993
2183
2299
ps
2 mA
tO P
1023
1073
2505
2629
2879
3002
ps
tD I P
1043
1095
2571
2699
2955
3092
ps
4 mA
tO P
963
1009
2023
2123
2325
2433
ps
tD I P
983
1031
2089
2193
2401
2523
ps
tO P
966
1012
1923
2018
2210
2315
ps
tD I P
986
1034
1989
2088
2286
2405
ps
tO P
926
971
1878
1970
2158
2262
ps
tD I P
946
993
1944
2040
2234
2352
ps
tO P
913
957
1715
1799
1971
2041
ps
tD I P
933
979
1781
1869
2047
2131
ps
12 mA
(1)
tO P
896
940
1672
1754
1921
1991
ps
tD I P
916
962
1738
1824
1997
2081
ps
SSTL-2 Class II 16 mA
tO P
876
918
1609
1688
1849
1918
ps
tD I P
896
940
1675
1758
1925
2008
ps
8 mA
10 mA
1.5 V
6 mA
8 mA (1)
SSTL-2 Class I 8 mA
20 mA
24 mA
(1)
Altera Corporation
April 2011
tO P
877
919
1598
1676
1836
1905
ps
tD I P
897
941
1664
1746
1912
1995
ps
tO P
872
915
1596
1674
1834
1903
ps
tD I P
892
937
1662
1744
1910
1993
ps
5–59
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–75. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Column Pins (Part 4 of 8)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
SSTL-18
Class I
Drive
Parameter
Strength
4 mA
tO P
909
953
1690
1773
1942
2012
ps
tD I P
929
975
1756
1843
2018
2102
ps
6 mA
tO P
914
958
1656
1737
1903
1973
ps
tD I P
934
980
1722
1807
1979
2063
ps
8 mA
tO P
894
937
1640
1721
1885
1954
ps
tD I P
914
959
1706
1791
1961
2044
ps
10 mA
SSTL-18
Class II
tO P
898
942
1638
1718
1882
1952
ps
tD I P
918
964
1704
1788
1958
2042
ps
12 mA
(1)
tO P
891
936
1626
1706
1869
1938
ps
tD I P
911
958
1692
1776
1945
2028
ps
8 mA
tO P
883
925
1597
1675
1835
1904
ps
tD I P
903
947
1663
1745
1911
1994
ps
tO P
894
937
1578
1655
1813
1882
ps
16 mA
tD I P
914
959
1644
1725
1889
1972
ps
tO P
890
933
1585
1663
1821
1890
ps
tD I P
910
955
1651
1733
1897
1980
ps
20 mA
(1)
tO P
890
933
1583
1661
1819
1888
ps
tD I P
910
955
1649
1731
1895
1978
ps
4 mA
tO P
912
956
1608
1687
1848
1943
ps
tD I P
932
978
1674
1757
1924
2033
ps
tO P
917
962
1595
1673
1833
1928
ps
tD I P
937
984
1661
1743
1909
2018
ps
tO P
896
940
1586
1664
1823
1917
ps
18 mA
1.8-V HSTL
Class I
Industrial
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed Unit
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(3)
(4)
6 mA
8 mA
10 mA
12 mA
(1)
tD I P
916
962
1652
1734
1899
2007
ps
tO P
900
944
1591
1669
1828
1923
ps
tD I P
920
966
1657
1739
1904
2013
ps
tO P
892
936
1585
1663
1821
1916
ps
tD I P
912
958
1651
1733
1897
2006
ps
5–60
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–75. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Column Pins (Part 5 of 8)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
1.8-V HSTL
Class II
1.5-V HSTL
Class I
Drive
Parameter
Strength
16 mA
tO P
877
919
1385
1453
1591
1680
ps
tD I P
897
941
1451
1523
1667
1770
ps
18 mA
tO P
879
921
1394
1462
1602
1691
ps
tD I P
899
943
1460
1532
1678
1781
ps
20 mA
(1)
tO P
879
921
1402
1471
1611
1700
ps
tD I P
899
943
1468
1541
1687
1790
ps
4 mA
tO P
912
956
1607
1686
1847
1942
ps
tD I P
932
978
1673
1756
1923
2032
ps
tO P
917
961
1588
1666
1825
1920
ps
tD I P
937
983
1654
1736
1901
2010
ps
tO P
899
943
1590
1668
1827
1922
ps
tD I P
919
965
1656
1738
1903
2012
ps
10 mA
tO P
900
943
1592
1670
1829
1924
ps
tD I P
920
965
1658
1740
1905
2014
ps
12 mA
(1)
tO P
893
937
1590
1668
1827
1922
ps
tD I P
913
959
1656
1738
1903
2012
ps
6 mA
8 mA
1.5-V HSTL
Class II
Industrial
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed Unit
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(3)
(4)
16 mA
tO P
881
924
1431
1501
1644
1734
ps
tD I P
901
946
1497
1571
1720
1824
ps
tO P
884
927
1439
1510
1654
1744
ps
tD I P
904
949
1505
1580
1730
1834
ps
tO P
886
929
1450
1521
1666
1757
ps
tD I P
906
951
1516
1591
1742
1847
ps
1.2-V HSTL
tO P
958
1004
1602
1681
-
-
ps
tD I P
978
1026
1668
1751
-
-
ps
PCI
tO P
1028
1082
1956
2051
2244
2070
ps
tD I P
1048
1104
2022
2121
2320
2160
ps
tO P
1028
1082
1956
2051
2244
2070
ps
tD I P
1048
1104
2022
2121
2320
2160
ps
18 mA
20 mA
(1)
PCI-X
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–61
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–75. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Column Pins (Part 6 of 8)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
Differential
SSTL-2 Class I
Drive
Parameter
Strength
8 mA
Industrial
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed Unit
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(3)
(4)
tO P
913
957
1715
1799
1971
2041
ps
tD I P
933
979
1781
1869
2047
2131
ps
12 mA
tO P
896
940
1672
1754
1921
1991
ps
tD I P
916
962
1738
1824
1997
2081
ps
Differential
16 mA
SSTL-2 Class II
tO P
876
918
1609
1688
1849
1918
ps
tD I P
896
940
1675
1758
1925
2008
ps
20 mA
tO P
877
919
1598
1676
1836
1905
ps
tD I P
897
941
1664
1746
1912
1995
ps
tO P
872
915
1596
1674
1834
1903
ps
tD I P
892
937
1662
1744
1910
1993
ps
tO P
909
953
1690
1773
1942
2012
ps
tD I P
929
975
1756
1843
2018
2102
ps
6 mA
tO P
914
958
1656
1737
1903
1973
ps
tD I P
934
980
1722
1807
1979
2063
ps
8 mA
tO P
894
937
1640
1721
1885
1954
ps
tD I P
914
959
1706
1791
1961
2044
ps
tO P
898
942
1638
1718
1882
1952
ps
tD I P
918
964
1704
1788
1958
2042
ps
tO P
891
936
1626
1706
1869
1938
ps
tD I P
911
958
1692
1776
1945
2028
ps
tO P
883
925
1597
1675
1835
1904
ps
tD I P
903
947
1663
1745
1911
1994
ps
16 mA
tO P
894
937
1578
1655
1813
1882
ps
tD I P
914
959
1644
1725
1889
1972
ps
18 mA
tO P
890
933
1585
1663
1821
1890
ps
tD I P
910
955
1651
1733
1897
1980
ps
tO P
890
933
1583
1661
1819
1888
ps
tD I P
910
955
1649
1731
1895
1978
ps
24 mA
Differential
SSTL-18
Class I
4 mA
10 mA
12 mA
Differential
SSTL-18
Class II
8 mA
20 mA
5–62
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–75. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Column Pins (Part 7 of 8)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
1.8-V
Differential
HSTL Class I
Drive
Parameter
Strength
4 mA
tO P
912
956
1608
1687
1848
1943
ps
tD I P
932
978
1674
1757
1924
2033
ps
6 mA
tO P
917
962
1595
1673
1833
1928
ps
tD I P
937
984
1661
1743
1909
2018
ps
8 mA
tO P
896
940
1586
1664
1823
1917
ps
tD I P
916
962
1652
1734
1899
2007
ps
tO P
900
944
1591
1669
1828
1923
ps
tD I P
920
966
1657
1739
1904
2013
ps
tO P
892
936
1585
1663
1821
1916
ps
tD I P
912
958
1651
1733
1897
2006
ps
tO P
877
919
1385
1453
1591
1680
ps
tD I P
897
941
1451
1523
1667
1770
ps
18 mA
tO P
879
921
1394
1462
1602
1691
ps
tD I P
899
943
1460
1532
1678
1781
ps
20 mA
tO P
879
921
1402
1471
1611
1700
ps
tD I P
899
943
1468
1541
1687
1790
ps
tO P
912
956
1607
1686
1847
1942
ps
tD I P
932
978
1673
1756
1923
2032
ps
tO P
917
961
1588
1666
1825
1920
ps
tD I P
937
983
1654
1736
1901
2010
ps
tO P
899
943
1590
1668
1827
1922
ps
tD I P
919
965
1656
1738
1903
2012
ps
tO P
900
943
1592
1670
1829
1924
ps
ps
10 mA
12 mA
1.8-V
Differential
HSTL Class II
1.5-V
Differential
HSTL Class I
Industrial
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed Unit
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(3)
(4)
16 mA
4 mA
6 mA
8 mA
10 mA
12 mA
Altera Corporation
April 2011
tD I P
920
965
1658
1740
1905
2014
tO P
893
937
1590
1668
1827
1922
tD I P
913
959
1656
1738
1903
2012
5–63
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–75. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Column Pins (Part 8 of 8)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
1.5-V
Differential
HSTL Class II
Drive
Parameter
Strength
16 mA
18 mA
20 mA
Industrial
tO P
881
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed Unit
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(3)
(4)
924
1431
1501
1644
1734
ps
tD I P
901
946
1497
1571
1720
1824
ps
tO P
884
927
1439
1510
1654
1744
tD I P
904
949
1505
1580
1730
1834
tO P
886
929
1450
1521
1666
1757
tD I P
906
951
1516
1591
1742
1847
Notes to Table 5–75:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
This is the default setting in the Quartus II software.
These I/O standards are only supported on DQS pins.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
Table 5–76. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Row Pins (Part 1 of 3)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
LVTTL
Drive
Parameter
Strength
4 mA
Unit
tO P
1267
1328
2655
2786
3052
3189
ps
tD I P
1225
1285
2600
2729
2989
3116
ps
tO P
1144
1200
2113
2217
2429
2549
ps
tD I P
1102
1157
2058
2160
2366
2476
ps
12 mA
(1)
tO P
1091
1144
2081
2184
2392
2512
ps
tD I P
1049
1101
2026
2127
2329
2439
ps
4 mA
tO P
1144
1200
2113
2217
2429
2549
ps
tD I P
1102
1157
2058
2160
2366
2476
ps
8 mA (1) tO P
1044
1094
1853
1944
2130
2243
ps
tD I P
1002
1051
1798
1887
2067
2170
ps
8 mA
LVCMOS
Industrial
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(2)
(3)
5–64
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–76. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Row Pins (Part 2 of 3)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
2.5 V
Drive
Parameter
Strength
4 mA
8 mA
12 mA
(1)
1.8 V
2 mA
tO P
1128
1183
2091
2194
2403
2523
ps
tD I P
1086
1140
2036
2137
2340
2450
ps
tO P
1030
1080
1872
1964
2152
2265
ps
tD I P
988
1037
1817
1907
2089
2192
ps
tO P
1012
1061
1775
1862
2040
2151
ps
tD I P
970
1018
1720
1805
1977
2078
ps
tO P
1196
1253
2954
3100
3396
3542
ps
1154
1210
2899
3043
3333
3469
ps
tO P
1184
1242
2294
2407
2637
2763
ps
tD I P
1142
1199
2239
2350
2574
2690
ps
tO P
1079
1131
2039
2140
2344
2462
ps
tD I P
1037
1088
1984
2083
2281
2389
ps
8 mA (1) tO P
1049
1100
1942
2038
2232
2348
ps
tD I P
1007
1057
1887
1981
2169
2275
ps
tO P
1158
1213
2530
2655
2908
3041
ps
tD I P
1116
1170
2475
2598
2845
2968
ps
tO P
1055
1106
2020
2120
2322
2440
ps
tD I P
1013
1063
1965
2063
2259
2367
ps
tO P
1002
1050
1759
1846
2022
2104
ps
tD I P
960
1007
1704
1789
1959
2031
ps
6 mA
2 mA
4 mA
SSTL-2 Class I 8 mA
SSTL-2 Class II 16 mA
(1)
SSTL-18
Class I
Unit
tD I P
4 mA
1.5 V
Industrial
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(2)
(3)
tO P
947
992
1581
1659
1817
1897
ps
tD I P
905
949
1526
1602
1754
1824
ps
4 mA
tO P
990
1038
1709
1793
1964
2046
ps
tD I P
948
995
1654
1736
1901
1973
ps
6 mA
tO P
994
1042
1648
1729
1894
1975
ps
tD I P
952
999
1593
1672
1831
1902
ps
tO P
970
1018
1633
1713
1877
1958
ps
tD I P
928
975
1578
1656
1814
1885
ps
tO P
974
1021
1615
1694
1856
1937
ps
tD I P
932
978
1560
1637
1793
1864
ps
8 mA
10 mA
(1)
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–65
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–76. Stratix II I/O Output Delay for Row Pins (Part 3 of 3)
Minimum Timing
I/O Standard
1.8-V HSTL
Class I
Drive
Parameter
Strength
4 mA
Unit
tO P
972
1019
1610
1689
1850
1956
ps
tD I P
930
976
1555
1632
1787
1883
ps
6 mA
tO P
975
1022
1580
1658
1816
1920
ps
tD I P
933
979
1525
1601
1753
1847
ps
8 mA
tO P
958
1004
1576
1653
1811
1916
ps
tD I P
916
961
1521
1596
1748
1843
ps
tO P
962
1008
1567
1644
1801
1905
ps
tD I P
920
965
1512
1587
1738
1832
ps
12 mA
(1)
tO P
953
999
1566
1643
1800
1904
ps
tD I P
911
956
1511
1586
1737
1831
ps
4 mA
tO P
970
1018
1591
1669
1828
1933
ps
tD I P
928
975
1536
1612
1765
1860
ps
tO P
974
1021
1579
1657
1815
1919
ps
10 mA
1.5-V HSTL
Class I
Industrial
-3
-3
-4
-5
Speed Speed
Speed Speed
Commercial Grade Grade Grade Grade
(2)
(3)
6 mA
tD I P
932
978
1524
1600
1752
1846
ps
8 mA (1) tO P
960
1006
1572
1649
1807
1911
ps
tD I P
918
963
1517
1592
1744
1838
ps
LVDS
HyperTransport
tO P
1018
1067
1723
1808
1980
2089
ps
tD I P
976
1024
1668
1751
1917
2016
ps
tO P
1005
1053
1723
1808
1980
2089
ps
tD I P
963
1010
1668
1751
1917
2016
ps
Notes to Table 5–76:
(1)
(2)
(3)
This is the default setting in the Quartus II software.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S15, EP2S30, EP2S60, and EP2S90 devices.
These numbers apply to -3 speed grade EP2S130 and EP2S180 devices.
Maximum Input & Output Clock Toggle Rate
Maximum clock toggle rate is defined as the maximum frequency
achievable for a clock type signal at an I/O pin. The I/O pin can be a
regular I/O pin or a dedicated clock I/O pin.
5–66
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
The maximum clock toggle rate is different from the maximum data bit
rate. If the maximum clock toggle rate on a regular I/O pin is 300 MHz,
the maximum data bit rate for dual data rate (DDR) could be potentially
as high as 600 Mbps on the same I/O pin.
Table 5–77 specifies the maximum input clock toggle rates. Table 5–78
specifies the maximum output clock toggle rates at 0pF load. Table 5–79
specifies the derating factors for the output clock toggle rate for a non 0pF
load.
To calculate the output toggle rate for a non 0pF load, use this formula:
The toggle rate for a non 0pF load
= 1000 / (1000/ toggle rate at 0pF load + derating factor * load value
in pF /1000)
For example, the output toggle rate at 0pF load for SSTL-18 Class II 20mA
I/O standard is 550 MHz on a -3 device clock output pin. The derating
factor is 94ps/pF. For a 10pF load the toggle rate is calculated as:
1000 / (1000/550 + 94 × 10 /1000) = 363 (MHz)
Tables 5–77 through 5–79 show the I/O toggle rates for Stratix II
devices.
Table 5–77. Maximum Input Toggle Rate on Stratix II Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Column I/O Pins (MHz)
Row I/O Pins (MHz)
Input I/O Standard
Dedicated Clock Inputs
(MHz)
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
LVTTL
500
500
450
500
500
450
500
500
400
2.5-V LVTTL/CMOS
500
500
450
500
500
450
500
500
400
1.8-V LVTTL/CMOS
500
500
450
500
500
450
500
500
400
1.5-V LVTTL/CMOS
500
500
450
500
500
450
500
500
400
LVCMOS
500
500
450
500
500
450
500
500
400
SSTL-2 Class I
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
SSTL-2 Class II
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
SSTL-18 Class I
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
SSTL-18 Class II
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
1.5-V HSTL Class I
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
1.5-V HSTL Class II
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
1.8-V HSTL Class I
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–67
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–77. Maximum Input Toggle Rate on Stratix II Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Column I/O Pins (MHz)
Row I/O Pins (MHz)
Input I/O Standard
Dedicated Clock Inputs
(MHz)
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
1.8-V HSTL Class II
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
PCI (1)
500
500
450
-
-
-
500
500
400
PCI-X (1)
500
500
450
-
-
-
500
500
400
1.2-V HSTL (2)
280
-
-
-
-
-
280
-
-
Differential SSTL-2 Class I
(1), (3)
500
500
500
-
-
-
500
500
500
Differential SSTL-2 Class II
(1), (3)
500
500
500
-
-
-
500
500
500
Differential SSTL-18 Class I
(1), (3)
500
500
500
-
-
-
500
500
500
Differential SSTL-18 Class II
(1), (3)
500
500
500
-
-
-
500
500
500
1.8-V Differential HSTL
Class I (1), (3)
500
500
500
-
-
-
500
500
500
1.8-V Differential HSTL
Class II (1), (3)
500
500
500
-
-
-
500
500
500
1.5-V Differential HSTL
Class I (1), (3)
500
500
500
-
-
-
500
500
500
1.5-V Differential HSTL
Class II (1), (3)
500
500
500
-
-
-
500
500
500
-
-
-
520
520
420
717
717
640
HyperTransport technology
(4)
LVPECL (1)
-
-
-
-
-
-
450
450
400
LVDS (5)
-
-
-
520
520
420
717
717
640
LVDS (6)
-
-
-
-
-
-
450
450
400
Notes to Table 5–77:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Row clock inputs don’t support PCI, PCI-X, LVPECL, and differential HSTL and SSTL standards.
1.2-V HSTL is only supported on column I/O pins.
Differential HSTL and SSTL standards are only supported on column clock and DQS inputs.
HyperTransport technology is only supported on row I/O and row dedicated clock input pins.
These numbers apply to I/O pins and dedicated clock pins in the left and right I/O banks.
These numbers apply to dedicated clock pins in the top and bottom I/O banks.
5–68
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–78. Maximum Output Toggle Rate on Stratix II Devices (Part 1 of 5)
I/O Standard
3.3-V LVTTL
3.3-V LVCMOS
2.5-V
LVTTL/LVCMOS
1.8-V
LVTTL/LVCMOS
1.5-V
LVTTL/LVCMOS
SSTL-2 Class I
SSTL-2 Class II
Altera Corporation
April 2011
Drive
Strength
Column I/O Pins (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
Note (1)
Row I/O Pins (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
Clock Outputs (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
4 mA
270
225
210
270
225
210
270
225
210
8 mA
435
355
325
435
355
325
435
355
325
12 mA
580
475
420
580
475
420
580
475
420
16 mA
720
594
520
-
-
-
720
594
520
20 mA
875
700
610
-
-
-
875
700
610
24 mA
1,030
794
670
-
-
-
1,030
794
670
4 mA
290
250
230
290
250
230
290
250
230
8 mA
565
480
440
565
480
440
565
480
440
12 mA
790
710
670
-
-
-
790
710
670
16 mA
1,020
925
875
-
-
-
1,020
925
875
20 mA
1,066
985
935
-
-
-
1,066
985
24 mA
1,100
1,040
1,000
-
-
-
1,100 1,040
4 mA
230
194
180
230
194
180
230
194
180
8 mA
430
380
380
430
380
380
430
380
380
12 mA
630
575
550
630
575
550
630
575
550
16 mA
930
845
820
-
-
-
930
845
820
2 mA
120
109
104
120
109
104
120
109
104
4 mA
285
250
230
285
250
230
285
250
230
6 mA
450
390
360
450
390
360
450
390
360
8 mA
660
570
520
660
570
520
660
570
520
905
805
755
935
1,000
10 mA
905
805
755
-
-
-
12 mA
1,131
1,040
990
-
-
-
2 mA
244
200
180
244
200
180
244
200
180
4 mA
470
370
325
470
370
325
470
370
325
6 mA
550
430
375
-
-
-
550
430
375
8 mA
625
495
420
-
-
-
625
495
420
1,131 1,040
990
8 mA
400
300
300
-
-
-
400
300
300
12 mA
400
400
350
400
350
350
400
400
350
16 mA
350
350
300
350
350
300
350
350
300
20 mA
400
350
350
-
-
-
400
350
350
24 mA
400
400
350
-
-
-
400
400
350
5–69
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–78. Maximum Output Toggle Rate on Stratix II Devices (Part 2 of 5)
I/O Standard
SSTL-18 Class I
SSTL-18 Class II
1.8-V HSTL
Class I
1.8-V HSTL
Class II
1.5-V HSTL
Class I
1.5-V HSTL
Class II
Differential
SSTL-2 Class I (3)
Differential
SSTL-2 Class II
(3)
Drive
Strength
Column I/O Pins (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
Note (1)
Row I/O Pins (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
Clock Outputs (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
4 mA
200
150
150
200
150
150
200
150
150
6 mA
350
250
200
350
250
200
350
250
200
8 mA
450
300
300
450
300
300
450
300
300
10 mA
500
400
400
500
400
400
500
400
400
12 mA
700
550
400
-
-
-
650
550
400
8 mA
200
200
150
-
-
-
200
200
150
16 mA
400
350
350
-
-
-
400
350
350
18 mA
450
400
400
-
-
-
450
400
400
20 mA
550
500
450
-
-
-
550
500
450
4 mA
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
6 mA
500
450
450
500
450
450
500
450
450
8 mA
650
600
600
650
600
600
650
600
600
10 mA
700
650
600
700
650
600
700
650
600
12 mA
700
700
650
700
700
650
700
700
650
16 mA
500
500
450
-
-
-
500
500
450
18 mA
550
500
500
-
-
-
550
500
500
20 mA
650
550
550
-
-
-
550
550
550
4 mA
350
300
300
350
300
300
350
300
300
6 mA
500
500
450
500
500
450
500
500
450
8 mA
700
650
600
700
650
600
700
650
600
10 mA
700
700
650
-
-
-
700
700
650
12 mA
700
700
700
-
-
-
700
700
700
16 mA
600
600
550
-
-
-
600
600
550
18 mA
650
600
600
-
-
-
650
600
600
20 mA
700
650
600
-
-
-
700
650
600
8 mA
400
300
300
400
300
300
400
300
300
12 mA
400
400
350
400
400
350
400
400
350
16 mA
350
350
300
350
350
300
350
350
300
20 mA
400
350
350
350
350
297
400
350
350
24 mA
400
400
350
-
-
-
400
400
350
5–70
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–78. Maximum Output Toggle Rate on Stratix II Devices (Part 3 of 5)
I/O Standard
Differential
SSTL-18 Class I
(3)
Differential
SSTL-18 Class II
(3)
1.8-V Differential
HSTL Class I (3)
1.8-V Differential
HSTL Class II (3)
1.5-V Differential
HSTL Class I (3)
1.5-V Differential
HSTL Class II (3)
Drive
Strength
Column I/O Pins (MHz)
Note (1)
Row I/O Pins (MHz)
Clock Outputs (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
4 mA
200
150
150
200
150
150
200
150
150
6 mA
350
250
200
350
250
200
350
250
200
8 mA
450
300
300
450
300
300
450
300
300
10 mA
500
400
400
500
400
400
500
400
400
12 mA
700
550
400
350
350
297
650
550
400
8 mA
200
200
150
-
-
-
200
200
150
16 mA
400
350
350
-
-
-
400
350
350
18 mA
450
400
400
-
-
-
450
400
400
20 mA
550
500
450
-
-
-
550
500
450
4 mA
300
300
300
-
-
-
300
300
300
6 mA
500
450
450
-
-
-
500
450
450
8 mA
650
600
600
-
-
-
650
600
600
10 mA
700
650
600
-
-
-
700
650
600
12 mA
700
700
650
-
-
-
700
700
650
16 mA
500
500
450
-
-
-
500
500
450
18 mA
550
500
500
-
-
-
550
500
500
20 mA
650
550
550
-
-
-
550
550
550
4 mA
350
300
300
-
-
-
350
300
300
6 mA
500
500
450
-
-
-
500
500
450
8 mA
700
650
600
-
-
-
700
650
600
10 mA
700
700
650
-
-
-
700
700
650
12 mA
700
700
700
-
-
-
700
700
700
16 mA
600
600
550
-
-
-
600
600
550
18 mA
650
600
600
-
-
-
650
600
600
700
650
600
-
-
-
700
650
600
3.3-V PCI
20 mA
1,000
790
670
-
-
-
1,000
790
670
3.3-V PCI-X
1,000
790
670
-
-
-
1,000
790
670
-
-
-
500
500
500
450
400
300
500
500
500
-
-
-
LVDS (6)
HyperTransport
technology (4), (6)
LVPECL (5)
-
-
-
-
-
-
450
400
300
3.3-V LVTTL
OCT 50 Ω
400
400
350
400
400
350
400
400
350
2.5-V LVTTL
OCT 50 Ω
350
350
300
350
350
300
350
350
300
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–71
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–78. Maximum Output Toggle Rate on Stratix II Devices (Part 4 of 5)
I/O Standard
Drive
Strength
Column I/O Pins (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
Note (1)
Row I/O Pins (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
Clock Outputs (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
1.8-V LVTTL
OCT 50 Ω
700
550
450
700
550
450
700
550
450
3.3-V LVCMOS
OCT 50 Ω
350
350
300
350
350
300
350
350
300
1.5-V LVCMOS
OCT 50 Ω
550
450
400
550
450
400
550
450
400
SSTL-2 Class I
OCT 50 Ω
600
500
500
600
500
500
600
500
500
SSTL-2 Class II
OCT 25 Ω
600
550
500
600
550
500
600
550
500
SSTL-18 Class I
OCT 50 Ω
560
400
350
590
400
350
450
400
350
SSTL-18 Class II
OCT 25 Ω
550
500
450
-
-
-
550
500
450
1.2-V HSTL (2)
OCT 50 Ω
280
-
-
-
-
-
280
-
-
1.5-V HSTL
Class I
OCT 50 Ω
600
550
500
600
550
500
600
550
500
1.8-V HSTL
Class I
OCT 50 Ω
650
600
600
650
600
600
650
600
600
1.8-V HSTL
Class II
OCT 25 Ω
500
500
450
-
-
-
500
500
450
Differential
SSTL-2 Class I
OCT 50 Ω
600
500
500
600
500
500
600
500
500
Differential
SSTL-2 Class II
OCT 25 Ω
600
550
500
600
550
500
600
550
500
Differential
SSTL-18 Class I
OCT 50 Ω
560
400
350
590
400
350
560
400
350
Differential
SSTL-18 Class II
OCT 25 Ω
550
500
450
-
-
-
550
500
450
1.8-V Differential
HSTL Class I
OCT 50 Ω
650
600
600
650
600
600
650
600
600
1.8-V Differential
HSTL Class II
OCT 25 Ω
500
500
450
-
-
-
500
500
450
1.5-V Differential
HSTL Class I
OCT 50 Ω
600
550
500
600
550
500
600
550
500
5–72
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–78. Maximum Output Toggle Rate on Stratix II Devices (Part 5 of 5)
Drive
Strength
I/O Standard
OCT 50 Ω
1.2-V Differential
HSTL
Column I/O Pins (MHz)
Note (1)
Row I/O Pins (MHz)
Clock Outputs (MHz)
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
280
-
-
-
-
-
280
-
-
Notes to Table 5–78:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
The toggle rate applies to 0-pF output load for all I/O standards except for LVDS and HyperTransport technology
on row I/O pins. For LVDS and HyperTransport technology on row I/O pins, the toggle rates apply to load from
0 to 5pF.
1.2-V HSTL is only supported on column I/O pins in I/O banks 4, 7, and 8.
Differential HSTL and SSTL is only supported on column clock and DQS outputs.
HyperTransport technology is only supported on row I/O and row dedicated clock input pins.
LVPECL is only supported on column clock pins.
Refer to Tables 5–81 through 5–91 if using SERDES block. Use the toggle rate values from the clock output column
for PLL output.
Table 5–79. Maximum Output Clock Toggle Rate Derating Factors (Part 1 of 5)
Maximum Output Clock Toggle Rate Derating Factors (ps/pF)
I/O Standard
3.3-V LVTTL
3.3-V LVCMOS
2.5-V
LVTTL/LVCMOS
Altera Corporation
April 2011
Drive
Strength
Column I/O Pins
Row I/O Pins
Dedicated Clock Outputs
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
4 mA
478
510
510
478
510
510
466
510
510
8 mA
260
333
333
260
333
333
291
333
333
12 mA
213
247
247
213
247
247
211
247
247
16 mA
136
197
197
-
-
-
166
197
197
20 mA
138
187
187
-
-
-
154
187
187
24 mA
134
177
177
-
-
-
143
177
177
4 mA
377
391
391
377
391
391
377
391
391
8 mA
206
212
212
206
212
212
178
212
212
12 mA
141
145
145
-
-
-
115
145
145
16 mA
108
111
111
-
-
-
86
111
111
20 mA
83
88
88
-
-
-
79
88
88
24 mA
65
72
72
-
-
-
74
72
72
4 mA
387
427
427
387
427
427
391
427
427
8 mA
163
224
224
163
224
224
170
224
224
12 mA
142
203
203
142
203
203
152
203
203
16 mA
120
182
182
-
-
-
134
182
182
5–73
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–79. Maximum Output Clock Toggle Rate Derating Factors (Part 2 of 5)
Maximum Output Clock Toggle Rate Derating Factors (ps/pF)
I/O Standard
1.8-V
LVTTL/LVCMOS
1.5-V
LVTTL/LVCMOS
SSTL-2 Class I
SSTL-2 Class II
SSTL-18 Class I
SSTL-18 Class II
SSTL-2 Class I
SSTL-2 Class II
Drive
Strength
Column I/O Pins
Row I/O Pins
Dedicated Clock Outputs
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
2 mA
951
1421
1421
951
1421
1421
904
1421
1421
4 mA
405
516
516
405
516
516
393
516
516
6 mA
261
325
325
261
325
325
253
325
325
8 mA
223
274
274
223
274
274
224
274
274
10 mA
194
236
236
-
-
-
199
236
236
12 mA
174
209
209
-
-
-
180
209
209
2 mA
652
963
963
652
963
963
618
963
963
4 mA
333
347
347
333
347
347
270
347
347
6 mA
182
247
247
-
-
-
198
247
247
8 mA
135
194
194
-
-
-
155
194
194
8 mA
364
680
680
364
680
680
350
680
680
12 mA
163
207
207
163
207
207
188
207
207
16 mA
118
147
147
118
147
147
94
147
147
20 mA
99
122
122
-
-
-
87
122
122
24 mA
91
116
116
-
-
-
85
116
116
4 mA
458
570
570
458
570
570
505
570
570
6 mA
305
380
380
305
380
380
336
380
380
8 mA
225
282
282
225
282
282
248
282
282
10 mA
167
220
220
167
220
220
190
220
220
12 mA
129
175
175
-
-
-
148
175
175
8 mA
173
206
206
-
-
-
155
206
206
16 mA
150
160
160
-
-
-
140
160
160
18 mA
120
130
130
-
-
-
110
130
130
20 mA
109
127
127
-
-
-
94
127
127
8 mA
364
680
680
364
680
680
350
680
680
12 mA
163
207
207
163
207
207
188
207
207
16 mA
118
147
147
118
147
147
94
147
147
20 mA
99
122
122
-
-
-
87
122
122
24 mA
91
116
116
-
-
-
85
116
116
5–74
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–79. Maximum Output Clock Toggle Rate Derating Factors (Part 3 of 5)
Maximum Output Clock Toggle Rate Derating Factors (ps/pF)
I/O Standard
Drive
Strength
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
SSTL-18 Class I
4 mA
458
570
570
458
570
570
505
570
570
6 mA
305
380
380
305
380
380
336
380
380
8 mA
225
282
282
225
282
282
248
282
282
10 mA
167
220
220
167
220
220
190
220
220
12 mA
129
175
175
-
-
-
148
175
175
SSTL-18 Class II
1.8-V HSTL
Class I
1.8-V HSTL
Class II
1.5-V HSTL
Class I
1.5-V HSTL
Class II
Differential
SSTL-2 Class II
(3)
Altera Corporation
April 2011
Column I/O Pins
Row I/O Pins
Dedicated Clock Outputs
8 mA
173
206
206
-
-
-
155
206
206
16 mA
150
160
160
-
-
-
140
160
160
18 mA
120
130
130
-
-
-
110
130
130
20 mA
109
127
127
-
-
-
94
127
127
4 mA
245
282
282
245
282
282
229
282
282
6 mA
164
188
188
164
188
188
153
188
188
8 mA
123
140
140
123
140
140
114
140
140
10 mA
110
124
124
110
124
124
108
124
124
12 mA
97
110
110
97
110
110
104
110
110
16 mA
101
104
104
-
-
-
99
104
104
18 mA
98
102
102
-
-
-
93
102
102
20 mA
93
99
99
-
-
-
88
99
99
4 mA
168
196
196
168
196
196
188
196
196
6 mA
112
131
131
112
131
131
125
131
131
8 mA
84
99
99
84
99
99
95
99
99
10 mA
87
98
98
-
-
-
90
98
98
12 mA
86
98
98
-
-
-
87
98
98
16 mA
95
101
101
-
-
-
96
101
101
18 mA
95
100
100
-
-
-
101
100
100
20 mA
94
101
101
-
-
-
104
101
101
8 mA
364
680
680
-
-
-
350
680
680
12 mA
163
207
207
-
-
-
188
207
207
16 mA
118
147
147
-
-
-
94
147
147
20 mA
99
122
122
-
-
-
87
122
122
24 mA
91
116
116
-
-
-
85
116
116
5–75
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Timing Model
Table 5–79. Maximum Output Clock Toggle Rate Derating Factors (Part 4 of 5)
Maximum Output Clock Toggle Rate Derating Factors (ps/pF)
I/O Standard
Differential
SSTL-18 Class I
(3)
Differential
SSTL-18 Class II
(3)
1.8-V Differential
HSTL Class I (3)
1.8-V Differential
HSTL Class II (3)
1.5-V Differential
HSTL Class I (3)
1.5-V Differential
HSTL Class II (3)
Drive
Strength
Column I/O Pins
Row I/O Pins
Dedicated Clock Outputs
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
4 mA
458
570
570
-
-
-
505
570
570
6 mA
305
380
380
-
-
-
336
380
380
8 mA
225
282
282
-
-
-
248
282
282
10 mA
167
220
220
-
-
-
190
220
220
12 mA
129
175
175
-
-
-
148
175
175
8 mA
173
206
206
-
-
-
155
206
206
16 mA
150
160
160
-
-
-
140
160
160
18 mA
120
130
130
-
-
-
110
130
130
20 mA
109
127
127
-
-
-
94
127
127
4 mA
245
282
282
-
-
-
229
282
282
6 mA
164
188
188
-
-
-
153
188
188
8 mA
123
140
140
-
-
-
114
140
140
10 mA
110
124
124
-
-
-
108
124
124
12 mA
97
110
110
-
-
-
104
110
110
16 mA
101
104
104
-
-
-
99
104
104
18 mA
98
102
102
-
-
-
93
102
102
20 mA
93
99
99
-
-
-
88
99
99
4 mA
168
196
196
-
-
-
188
196
196
6 mA
112
131
131
-
-
-
125
131
131
8 mA
84
99
99
-
-
-
95
99
99
10 mA
87
98
98
-
-
-
90
98
98
12 mA
86
98
98
-
-
-
87
98
98
16 mA
95
101
101
-
-
-
96
101
101
18 mA
95
100
100
-
-
-
101
100
100
20 mA
94
101
101
-
-
-
104
101
101
3.3-V PCI
134
177
177
-
-
-
143
177
177
3.3-V PCI-X
134
177
177
-
-
-
143
177
177
LVDS
-
-
-
155 (1)
155
(1)
155
(1)
134
134
134
HyperTransport
technology
-
-
-
155 (1)
155
(1)
155
(1)
-
-
-
LVPECL (4)
-
-
-
-
-
-
134
134
134
5–76
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–79. Maximum Output Clock Toggle Rate Derating Factors (Part 5 of 5)
Maximum Output Clock Toggle Rate Derating Factors (ps/pF)
I/O Standard
Drive
Strength
Column I/O Pins
Row I/O Pins
Dedicated Clock Outputs
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
-3
-4
-5
3.3-V LVTTL
OCT
50 Ω
133
152
152
133
152
152
147
152
152
2.5-V LVTTL
OCT
50 Ω
207
274
274
207
274
274
235
274
274
1.8-V LVTTL
OCT
50 Ω
151
165
165
151
165
165
153
165
165
3.3-V LVCMOS
OCT
50 Ω
300
316
316
300
316
316
263
316
316
1.5-V LVCMOS
OCT
50 Ω
157
171
171
157
171
171
174
171
171
SSTL-2 Class I
OCT
50 Ω
121
134
134
121
134
134
77
134
134
SSTL-2 Class II
OCT
25 Ω
56
101
101
56
101
101
58
101
101
SSTL-18 Class I
OCT
50 Ω
100
123
123
100
123
123
106
123
123
SSTL-18 Class II
OCT
25 Ω
61
110
110
-
-
-
59
110
110
1.2-V HSTL (2)
OCT
50 Ω
95
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
95
Notes to Table 5–79:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
For LVDS and HyperTransport technology output on row I/O pins, the toggle rate derating factors apply to loads
larger than 5 pF. In the derating calculation, subtract 5 pF from the intended load value in pF for the correct result.
For a load less than or equal to 5 pF, refer to Table 5–78 for output toggle rates.
1.2-V HSTL is only supported on column I/O pins in I/O banks 4,7, and 8.
Differential HSTL and SSTL is only supported on column clock and DQS outputs.
LVPECL is only supported on column clock outputs.
Duty Cycle
Distortion
Altera Corporation
April 2011
Duty cycle distortion (DCD) describes how much the falling edge of a
clock is off from its ideal position. The ideal position is when both the
clock high time (CLKH) and the clock low time (CLKL) equal half of the
clock period (T), as shown in Figure 5–7. DCD is the deviation of the
non-ideal falling edge from the ideal falling edge, such as D1 for the
falling edge A and D2 for the falling edge B (Figure 5–7). The maximum
DCD for a clock is the larger value of D1 and D2.
5–77
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Duty Cycle Distortion
Figure 5–7. Duty Cycle Distortion
Ideal Falling Edge
CLKH = T/2
CLKL = T/2
D1
D2
Falling Edge B
Falling Edge A
Clock Period (T)
DCD expressed in absolution derivation, for example, D1 or D2 in
Figure 5–7, is clock-period independent. DCD can also be expressed as a
percentage, and the percentage number is clock-period dependent. DCD
as a percentage is defined as
(T/2 – D1) / T (the low percentage boundary)
(T/2 + D2) / T (the high percentage boundary)
DCD Measurement Techniques
DCD is measured at an FPGA output pin driven by registers inside the
corresponding I/O element (IOE) block. When the output is a single data
rate signal (non-DDIO), only one edge of the register input clock (positive
or negative) triggers output transitions (Figure 5–8). Therefore, any DCD
present on the input clock signal or caused by the clock input buffer or
different input I/O standard does not transfer to the output signal.
Figure 5–8. DCD Measurement Technique for Non-DDIO (Single-Data Rate) Outputs
IOE
NOT
inst1
clk
INPUT
VCC
DFF
PRN
D
Q
OUTPUT
output
CLRN
inst
5–78
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
However, when the output is a double data rate input/output (DDIO)
signal, both edges of the input clock signal (positive and negative) trigger
output transitions (Figure 5–9). Therefore, any distortion on the input
clock and the input clock buffer affect the output DCD.
Figure 5–9. DCD Measurement Technique for DDIO (Double-Data Rate) Outputs
IOE
VCC
clk
DFF
PRN
D
INPUT
VCC
Q
CLRN
inst2
OUTPUT
output
DFF
PRN
GND
D
Q
NOT
inst8
CLRN
inst3
When an FPGA PLL generates the internal clock, the PLL output clocks
the IOE block. As the PLL only monitors the positive edge of the reference
clock input and internally re-creates the output clock signal, any DCD
present on the reference clock is filtered out. Therefore, the DCD for a
DDIO output with PLL in the clock path is better than the DCD for a
DDIO output without PLL in the clock path.
Tables 5–80 through 5–87 give the maximum DCD in absolution
derivation for different I/O standards on Stratix II devices. Examples are
also provided that show how to calculate DCD as a percentage.
Table 5–80. Maximum DCD for Non-DDIO Output on Row I/O Pins (Part 1
of 2)
Note (1)
Row I/O Output
Standard
Altera Corporation
April 2011
Maximum DCD for Non-DDIO Output
-3 Devices
-4 & -5 Devices
Unit
3.3-V LVTTTL
245
275
ps
3.3-V LVCMOS
125
155
ps
2.5 V
105
135
ps
5–79
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Duty Cycle Distortion
Table 5–80. Maximum DCD for Non-DDIO Output on Row I/O Pins (Part 2
of 2)
Note (1)
Row I/O Output
Standard
Maximum DCD for Non-DDIO Output
-3 Devices
-4 & -5 Devices
Unit
1.8 V
180
180
ps
1.5-V LVCMOS
165
195
ps
SSTL-2 Class I
115
145
ps
SSTL-2 Class II
95
125
ps
SSTL-18 Class I
55
85
ps
1.8-V HSTL Class I
80
100
ps
1.5-V HSTL Class I
85
115
ps
LVDS/
HyperTransport
technology
55
80
ps
Note to Table 5–80:
(1)
The DCD specification is based on a no logic array noise condition.
Here is an example for calculating the DCD as a percentage for a
non-DDIO output on a row I/O on a -3 device:
If the non-DDIO output I/O standard is SSTL-2 Class II, the maximum
DCD is 95 ps (see Table 5–80). If the clock frequency is 267 MHz, the clock
period T is:
T = 1/ f = 1 / 267 MHz = 3.745 ns = 3745 ps
To calculate the DCD as a percentage:
(T/2 – DCD) / T = (3745ps/2 – 95ps) / 3745ps = 47.5% (for low
boundary)
(T/2 + DCD) / T = (3745ps/2 + 95ps) / 3745ps = 52.5% (for high
boundary)
5–80
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Therefore, the DCD percentage for the 267 MHz SSTL-2 Class II
non-DDIO row output clock on a –3 device ranges from 47.5% to 52.5%.
Table 5–81. Maximum DCD for Non-DDIO Output on Column I/O
Pins
Note (1)
Column I/O Output
Standard I/O
Standard
Maximum DCD for Non-DDIO Output
Unit
-3 Devices
-4 & -5 Devices
3.3-V LVTTL
190
220
ps
3.3-V LVCMOS
140
175
ps
2.5 V
125
155
ps
1.8 V
80
110
ps
1.5-V LVCMOS
185
215
ps
SSTL-2 Class I
105
135
ps
SSTL-2 Class II
100
130
ps
SSTL-18 Class I
90
115
ps
SSTL-18 Class II
70
100
ps
1.8-V HSTL
Class I
80
110
ps
1.8-V HSTL
Class II
80
110
ps
1.5-V HSTL
Class I
85
115
ps
1.5-V HSTL
Class II
50
80
ps
1.2-V HSTL (2)
170
-
ps
LVPECL
55
80
ps
Notes to Table 5–81:
(1)
(2)
Altera Corporation
April 2011
The DCD specification is based on a no logic array noise condition.
1.2-V HSTL is only supported in -3 devices.
5–81
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Duty Cycle Distortion
Table 5–82. Maximum DCD for DDIO Output on Row I/O Pins Without PLL in the Clock Path for -3
Devices
Notes (1), (2)
Maximum DCD Based on I/O Standard of Input Feeding the DDIO Clock Port
(No PLL in Clock Path)
Row DDIO Output I/O
Standard
3.3-V LVTTL
TTL/CMOS
SSTL-2
SSTL/HSTL
LVDS/
HyperTransport
Technology
Unit
3.3 & 2.5 V
1.8 & 1.5 V
2.5 V
1.8 & 1.5 V
3.3 V
260
380
145
145
110
ps
3.3-V LVCMOS
210
330
100
100
65
ps
2.5 V
195
315
85
85
75
ps
1.8 V
150
265
85
85
120
ps
1.5-V LVCMOS
255
370
140
140
105
ps
SSTL-2 Class I
175
295
65
65
70
ps
SSTL-2 Class II
170
290
60
60
75
ps
SSTL-18 Class I
155
275
55
50
90
ps
1.8-V HSTL Class I
150
270
60
60
95
ps
1.5-V HSTL Class I
150
270
55
55
90
ps
LVDS/ HyperTransport
technology
180
180
180
180
180
ps
Notes to Table 5–82:
(1)
(2)
The information in Table 5–82 assumes the input clock has zero DCD.
The DCD specification is based on a no logic array noise condition.
Here is an example for calculating the DCD in percentage for a DDIO
output on a row I/O on a -3 device:
If the input I/O standard is SSTL-2 and the DDIO output I/O standard is
SSTL-2 Class II, the maximum DCD is 60 ps (see Table 5–82). If the clock
frequency is 267 MHz, the clock period T is:
T = 1/ f = 1 / 267 MHz = 3.745 ns = 3745 ps
Calculate the DCD as a percentage:
(T/2 – DCD) / T = (3745ps/2 – 60ps) / 3745ps = 48.4% (for low
boundary)
(T/2 + DCD) / T = (3745 ps/2 + 60 ps) / 3745ps = 51.6% (for high
boundary)
5–82
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Therefore, the DCD percentage for the 267 MHz SSTL-2 Class II DDIO
row output clock on a –3 device ranges from 48.4% to 51.6%.
Table 5–83. Maximum DCD for DDIO Output on Row I/O Pins Without PLL in the Clock Path for -4 & -5
Devices
Notes (1), (2)
Maximum DCD Based on I/O Standard of Input Feeding the DDIO Clock
Port (No PLL in the Clock Path)
Row DDIO Output I/O
Standard
3.3-V LVTTL
TTL/CMOS
SSTL-2
SSTL/HSTL
LVDS/
HyperTransport
Technology
Unit
3.3/2.5 V
1.8/1.5 V
2.5 V
1.8/1.5 V
3.3 V
440
495
170
160
105
ps
3.3-V LVCMOS
390
450
120
110
75
ps
2.5 V
375
430
105
95
90
ps
1.8 V
325
385
90
100
135
ps
1.5-V LVCMOS
430
490
160
155
100
ps
SSTL-2 Class I
355
410
85
75
85
ps
SSTL-2 Class II
350
405
80
70
90
ps
SSTL-18 Class I
335
390
65
65
105
ps
1.8-V HSTL Class I
330
385
60
70
110
ps
1.5-V HSTL Class I
330
390
60
70
105
ps
LVDS/ HyperTransport
technology
180
180
180
180
180
ps
Notes to Table 5–83:
(1)
(2)
Table 5–83 assumes the input clock has zero DCD.
The DCD specification is based on a no logic array noise condition.
Table 5–84. Maximum DCD for DDIO Output on Column I/O Pins Without PLL in the Clock Path for -3
Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Notes (1), (2)
Maximum DCD Based on I/O Standard of Input Feeding the DDIO
Clock Port (No PLL in the Clock Path)
DDIO Column Output I/O
Standard
3.3-V LVTTL
TTL/CMOS
SSTL-2
SSTL/HSTL
1.2-V
HSTL
Unit
3.3/2.5 V
1.8/1.5 V
2.5 V
1.8/1.5 V
1.2 V
260
380
145
145
145
ps
3.3-V LVCMOS
210
330
100
100
100
ps
2.5 V
195
315
85
85
85
ps
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–83
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Duty Cycle Distortion
Table 5–84. Maximum DCD for DDIO Output on Column I/O Pins Without PLL in the Clock Path for -3
Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Notes (1), (2)
Maximum DCD Based on I/O Standard of Input Feeding the DDIO
Clock Port (No PLL in the Clock Path)
DDIO Column Output I/O
Standard
TTL/CMOS
SSTL-2
SSTL/HSTL
1.2-V
HSTL
2.5 V
1.8/1.5 V
1.2 V
Unit
3.3/2.5 V
1.8/1.5 V
1.8 V
150
265
85
85
85
ps
1.5-V LVCMOS
255
370
140
140
140
ps
SSTL-2 Class I
175
295
65
65
65
ps
SSTL-2 Class II
170
290
60
60
60
ps
SSTL-18 Class I
155
275
55
50
50
ps
SSTL-18 Class II
140
260
70
70
70
ps
1.8-V HSTL Class I
150
270
60
60
60
ps
1.8-V HSTL Class II
150
270
60
60
60
ps
1.5-V HSTL Class I
150
270
55
55
55
ps
1.5-V HSTL Class II
125
240
85
85
85
ps
1.2-V HSTL
240
360
155
155
155
ps
LVPECL
180
180
180
180
180
ps
Notes to Table 5–84:
(1)
(2)
Table 5–84 assumes the input clock has zero DCD.
The DCD specification is based on a no logic array noise condition.
Table 5–85. Maximum DCD for DDIO Output on Column I/O Pins Without PLL in the Clock Path for -4 & -5
Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Notes (1), (2)
DDIO Column Output I/O
Standard
Maximum DCD Based on I/O Standard of Input Feeding the DDIO
Clock Port (No PLL in the Clock Path)
TTL/CMOS
SSTL-2
SSTL/HSTL
Unit
3.3/2.5 V
1.8/1.5 V
2.5 V
1.8/1.5 V
440
495
170
160
ps
3.3-V LVCMOS
390
450
120
110
ps
2.5 V
375
430
105
95
ps
1.8 V
325
385
90
100
ps
1.5-V LVCMOS
430
490
160
155
ps
SSTL-2 Class I
355
410
85
75
ps
SSTL-2 Class II
350
405
80
70
ps
3.3-V LVTTL
5–84
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–85. Maximum DCD for DDIO Output on Column I/O Pins Without PLL in the Clock Path for -4 & -5
Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Notes (1), (2)
DDIO Column Output I/O
Standard
Maximum DCD Based on I/O Standard of Input Feeding the DDIO
Clock Port (No PLL in the Clock Path)
TTL/CMOS
3.3/2.5 V
1.8/1.5 V
SSTL-2
SSTL/HSTL
2.5 V
1.8/1.5 V
Unit
SSTL-18 Class I
335
390
65
65
ps
SSTL-18 Class II
320
375
70
80
ps
1.8-V HSTL Class I
330
385
60
70
ps
1.8-V HSTL Class II
330
385
60
70
ps
1.5-V HSTL Class I
330
390
60
70
ps
1.5-V HSTL Class II
330
360
90
100
ps
1.2-V HSTL
420
470
155
165
ps
LVPECL
180
180
180
180
ps
Notes to Table 5–85:
(1)
(2)
Table 5–85 assumes the input clock has zero DCD.
The DCD specification is based on a no logic array noise condition.
Table 5–86. Maximum DCD for DDIO Output on Row I/O Pins with PLL in the
Clock Path (Part 1 of 2)
Note (1)
Row DDIO Output I/O
Standard
3.3-V LVTTL
Altera Corporation
April 2011
Maximum DCD (PLL Output Clock Feeding
DDIO Clock Port)
-3 Device
-4 & -5 Device
110
105
Unit
ps
3.3-V LVCMOS
65
75
ps
2.5V
75
90
ps
1.8V
85
100
ps
1.5-V LVCMOS
105
100
ps
SSTL-2 Class I
65
75
ps
SSTL-2 Class II
60
70
ps
SSTL-18 Class I
50
65
ps
1.8-V HSTL Class I
50
70
ps
1.5-V HSTL Class I
55
70
ps
5–85
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Duty Cycle Distortion
Table 5–86. Maximum DCD for DDIO Output on Row I/O Pins with PLL in the
Clock Path (Part 2 of 2)
Note (1)
Row DDIO Output I/O
Standard
LVDS/ HyperTransport
technology
Maximum DCD (PLL Output Clock Feeding
DDIO Clock Port)
-3 Device
-4 & -5 Device
180
180
Unit
ps
Note to Table 5–86:
(1)
The DCD specification is based on a no logic array noise condition.
Table 5–87. Maximum DCD for DDIO Output on Column I/O with PLL in the
Clock Path
Note (1)
Column DDIO Output I/O
Standard
Maximum DCD (PLL Output Clock Feeding
DDIO Clock Port)
Unit
-3 Device
-4 & -5 Device
3.3-V LVTTL
145
160
ps
3.3-V LVCMOS
100
110
ps
2.5V
85
95
ps
1.8V
85
100
ps
1.5-V LVCMOS
140
155
ps
SSTL-2 Class I
65
75
ps
SSTL-2 Class II
60
70
ps
SSTL-18 Class I
50
65
ps
SSTL-18 Class II
70
80
ps
1.8-V HSTL Class I
60
70
ps
1.8-V HSTL Class II
60
70
ps
1.5-V HSTL Class I
55
70
ps
1.5-V HSTL Class II
85
100
ps
1.2-V HSTL
155
-
ps
LVPECL
180
180
ps
Notes to Table 5–87:
(1)
(2)
The DCD specification is based on a no logic array noise condition.
1.2-V HSTL is only supported in -3 devices.
5–86
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
High-Speed I/O
Specifications
Table 5–88 provides high-speed timing specifications definitions.
Table 5–88. High-Speed Timing Specifications & Definitions
High-Speed Timing Specifications
Definitions
tC
High-speed receiver/transmitter input and output clock period.
fH S C L K
High-speed receiver/transmitter input and output clock frequency.
J
Deserialization factor (width of parallel data bus).
W
PLL multiplication factor.
tR I S E
Low-to-high transmission time.
tF A L L
High-to-low transmission time.
Timing unit interval (TUI)
The timing budget allowed for skew, propagation delays, and data
sampling window. (TUI = 1/(Receiver Input Clock Frequency ×
Multiplication Factor) = tC /w).
fH S D R
Maximum/minimum LVDS data transfer rate (fH S D R = 1/TUI), non-DPA.
fH S D R D P A
Maximum/minimum LVDS data transfer rate (fH S D R D PA = 1/TUI), DPA.
Channel-to-channel skew (TCCS)
The timing difference between the fastest and slowest output edges,
including tC O variation and clock skew. The clock is included in the TCCS
measurement.
Sampling window (SW)
The period of time during which the data must be valid in order to capture
it correctly. The setup and hold times determine the ideal strobe position
within the sampling window.
Input jitter
Peak-to-peak input jitter on high-speed PLLs.
Output jitter
Peak-to-peak output jitter on high-speed PLLs.
tDUTY
Duty cycle on high-speed transmitter output clock.
tL O C K
Lock time for high-speed transmitter and receiver PLLs.
Table 5–89 shows the high-speed I/O timing specifications for -3 speed
grade Stratix II devices.
Table 5–89. High-Speed I/O Specifications for -3 Speed Grade (Part 1 of 2)
Notes (1), (2)
-3 Speed Grade
Symbol
Conditions
Unit
Min
fH S C L K (clock frequency)
fH S C L K = f H S D R / W
Altera Corporation
April 2011
W = 2 to 32 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
(3)
Typ
Max
16
520
MHz
W = 1 (SERDES bypass, LVDS only)
16
500
MHz
W = 1 (SERDES used, LVDS only)
150
717
MHz
5–87
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
High-Speed I/O Specifications
Table 5–89. High-Speed I/O Specifications for -3 Speed Grade (Part 2 of 2)
Notes (1), (2)
-3 Speed Grade
Symbol
Conditions
Unit
Min
fH S D R (data rate)
Typ
Max
J = 4 to 10 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
150
1,040
Mbps
J = 2 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
(4)
760
Mbps
J = 1 (LVDS only)
fH S D R D PA (DPA data rate) J = 4 to 10 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
(4)
500
Mbps
150
1,040
Mbps
200
ps
TCCS
All differential standards
-
SW
All differential standards
330
Output jitter
-
ps
190
ps
Output tR I S E
All differential I/O standards
160
ps
Output tFA L L
All differential I/O standards
180
ps
55
%
6,400
UI
tDUTY
45
DPA run length
DPA jitter tolerance
DPA lock time
Data channel peak-to-peak jitter
Standard
SPI-4
Parallel Rapid I/O
Miscellaneous
0.44
Training
Pattern
Transition
Density
0000000000
1111111111
10%
256
00001111
25%
256
10010000
50%
256
10101010
100%
256
01010101
50
UI
Number of
repetitions
256
Notes to Table 5–89:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
When J = 4 to 10, the SERDES block is used.
When J = 1 or 2, the SERDES block is bypassed.
The input clock frequency and the W factor must satisfy the following fast PLL VCO specification: 150 ≤ input clock
frequency × W ≤ 1,040.
The minimum specification is dependent on the clock source (fast PLL, enhanced PLL, clock pin, and so on) and
the clock routing resource (global, regional, or local) utilized. The I/O differential buffer and input register do not
have a minimum toggle rate.
5–88
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–90 shows the high-speed I/O timing specifications for -4 speed
grade Stratix II devices.
Table 5–90. High-Speed I/O Specifications for -4 Speed Grade
Notes (1), (2)
-4 Speed Grade
Symbol
Conditions
Unit
Min
fH S C L K (clock frequency)
fH S C L K = f H S D R / W
fH S D R (data rate)
W = 2 to 32 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
(3)
Typ
Max
16
520
MHz
W = 1 (SERDES bypass, LVDS only)
16
500
MHz
W = 1 (SERDES used, LVDS only)
150
717
MHz
J = 4 to 10 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
150
1,040
Mbps
J = 2 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
(4)
760
Mbps
J = 1 (LVDS only)
fH S D R D PA (DPA data rate) J = 4 to 10 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
(4)
500
Mbps
150
1,040
Mbps
200
ps
TCCS
All differential standards
-
SW
All differential standards
330
Output jitter
-
ps
190
ps
Output tR I S E
All differential I/O standards
160
ps
Output tFA L L
All differential I/O standards
180
ps
55
%
6,400
UI
tDUTY
45
DPA run length
DPA jitter tolerance
DPA lock time
Data channel peak-to-peak jitter
0.44
Standard
Training
Pattern
Transition
Density
SPI-4
0000000000
1111111111
10%
256
Parallel Rapid I/O
00001111
25%
256
10010000
50%
256
10101010
100%
256
Miscellaneous
01010101
50
UI
Number of
repetitions
256
Notes to Table 5–90:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
When J = 4 to 10, the SERDES block is used.
When J = 1 or 2, the SERDES block is bypassed.
The input clock frequency and the W factor must satisfy the following fast PLL VCO specification: 150 ≤ input clock
frequency × W ≤ 1,040.
The minimum specification is dependent on the clock source (fast PLL, enhanced PLL, clock pin, and so on) and
the clock routing resource (global, regional, or local) utilized. The I/O differential buffer and input register do not
have a minimum toggle rate.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–89
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
High-Speed I/O Specifications
Table 5–91 shows the high-speed I/O timing specifications for -5 speed
grade Stratix II devices.
Table 5–91. High-Speed I/O Specifications for -5 Speed Grade
Notes (1), (2)
-5 Speed Grade
Symbol
Conditions
Unit
Min
fH S C L K (clock frequency)
fH S C L K = f H S D R / W
fH S D R (data rate)
W = 2 to 32 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
(3)
Typ
Max
16
420
MHz
W = 1 (SERDES bypass, LVDS only)
16
500
MHz
W = 1 (SERDES used, LVDS only)
150
640
MHz
J = 4 to 10 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
150
840
Mbps
J = 2 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
(4)
700
Mbps
J = 1 (LVDS only)
fH S D R D PA (DPA data rate) J = 4 to 10 (LVDS, HyperTransport technology)
(4)
500
Mbps
150
840
Mbps
200
ps
TCCS
All differential I/O standards
-
SW
All differential I/O standards
440
Output jitter
-
ps
190
ps
Output tR I S E
All differential I/O standards
290
ps
Output tFA L L
All differential I/O standards
290
ps
55
%
6,400
UI
tDUTY
45
DPA run length
DPA jitter tolerance
DPA lock time
Data channel peak-to-peak jitter
Standard
SPI-4
Parallel Rapid I/O
Miscellaneous
0.44
Training
Pattern
Transition
Density
0000000000
1111111111
10%
256
00001111
25%
256
10010000
50%
256
10101010
100%
256
01010101
50
UI
Number of
repetitions
256
Notes to Table 5–91:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
When J = 4 to 10, the SERDES block is used.
When J = 1 or 2, the SERDES block is bypassed.
The input clock frequency and the W factor must satisfy the following fast PLL VCO specification: 150 ≤ input clock
frequency × W ≤ 1,040.
The minimum specification is dependent on the clock source (fast PLL, enhanced PLL, clock pin, and so on) and
the clock routing resource (global, regional, or local) utilized. The I/O differential buffer and input register do not
have a minimum toggle rate.
5–90
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
PLL Timing
Specifications
Tables 5–92 and 5–93 describe the Stratix II PLL specifications when
operating in both the commercial junction temperature range (0 to 85 °C)
and the industrial junction temperature range (–40 to 100 °C).
Table 5–92. Enhanced PLL Specifications (Part 1 of 2)
Name
Description
Min
fI N
Input clock frequency
fI N P F D
Input frequency to the
PFD
fI N D U T Y
Input clock duty cycle
40
60
%
fE I N D U T Y
External feedback
input clock duty cycle
40
60
%
tI N J I T T E R
Input or external
feedback clock input
jitter tolerance in
terms of period jitter.
Bandwidth ≤
0.85 MHz
0.5
ns (p-p)
Input or external
feedback clock input
jitter tolerance in
terms of period jitter.
Bandwidth >
0.85 MHz
1.0
ns (p-p)
Max
Unit
2
500
MHz
2
420
MHz
250 ps for ≥ 100 MHz outclk ps or mUI
(p-p)
25 mUI for < 100 MHz outclk
tO U T J I T T E R
Dedicated clock
output period jitter
tF C O M P
External feedback
compensation time
fO U T
Output frequency for
internal global or
regional clock
1.5
(2)
tO U T D U T Y
Duty cycle for external
clock output (when set
to 50%).
45
fS C A N C L K
Scanclk frequency
tC O N F I G P L L
Time required to
reconfigure scan
chains for enhanced
PLLs
fO U T _ E X T
PLL external clock
output frequency
Altera Corporation
April 2011
Typ
50
10
ns
550.0
MHz
55
%
100
MHz
174/fS C A N C L K
1.5
(2)
ns
550.0 (1)
MHz
5–91
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
PLL Timing Specifications
Table 5–92. Enhanced PLL Specifications (Part 2 of 2)
Name
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
0.03
1
ms
1
ms
500
MHz
16.90
MHz
tL O C K
Time required for the
PLL to lock from the
time it is enabled or
the end of device
configuration
tD L O C K
Time required for the
PLL to lock
dynamically after
automatic clock
switchover between
two identical clock
frequencies
fS W I T C H OV E R
Frequency range
where the clock
switchover performs
properly
fC L B W
PLL closed-loop
bandwidth
0.13
fV C O
PLL VCO operating
range for –3 and –4
speed grade devices
300
1,040
MHz
PLL VCO operating
range for –5 speed
grade devices
300
840
MHz
fS S
Spread-spectrum
modulation frequency
30
150
kHz
% spread
Percent down spread
for a given clock
frequency
0.4
0.6
%
tP L L _ P S E R R
Accuracy of PLL
phase shift
±15
ps
tA R E S E T
Minimum pulse width
on areset signal.
10
ns
tA R E S E T _ R E C O N F I G
Minimum pulse width
on the areset signal
when using PLL
reconfiguration. Reset
the PLL after
scandone goes
high.
500
ns
4
1.20
0.5
Notes to Table 5–92:
(1)
(2)
Limited by I/O fM A X . See Table 5–78 on page 5–69 for the maximum. Cannot exceed fO U T specification.
If the counter cascading feature of the PLL is utilized, there is no minimum output clock frequency.
5–92
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–93. Fast PLL Specifications
Name
fI N
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Input clock frequency (for -3 and -4 speed
grade devices)
16.08
717
MHz
Input clock frequency (for -5 speed grade
devices)
16.08
640
MHz
fI N P F D
Input frequency to the PFD
16.08
500
MHz
fI N D U T Y
Input clock duty cycle
40
60
%
tI N J I T T E R
Input clock jitter tolerance in terms of period
jitter. Bandwidth ≤ 2 MHz
0.5
ns (p-p)
Input clock jitter tolerance in terms of period
jitter. Bandwidth > 2 MHz
1.0
ns (p-p)
fV C O
fO U T
Upper VCO frequency range for –3 and –4
speed grades
300
1,040
MHz
Upper VCO frequency range for –5 speed
grades
300
840
MHz
Lower VCO frequency range for –3 and –4
speed grades
150
520
MHz
Lower VCO frequency range for –5 speed
grades
150
420
MHz
4.6875
550
MHz
150
1,040
MHz
4.6875
(1)
MHz
100
MHz
PLL output frequency to GCLK or RCLK
PLL output frequency to LVDS or DPA clock
fO U T _ I O
PLL clock output frequency to regular I/O
pin
fS C A N C L K
Scanclk frequency
tC O N F I G P L L
Time required to reconfigure scan chains
for fast PLLs
fC L B W
PLL closed-loop bandwidth
tL O C K
Time required for the PLL to lock from the
time it is enabled or the end of the device
configuration
tP L L _ P S E R R
Accuracy of PLL phase shift
tA R E S E T
75/fS C A N C L K
1.16
5.00
28.00
MHz
0.03
1.00
ms
±15
ps
10
ns
500
ns
Minimum pulse width on areset signal.
tA R E S E T _ R E C O N F I G Minimum pulse width on the areset signal
when using PLL reconfiguration. Reset the
PLL after scandone goes high.
ns
Note to Table 5–93:
(1)
Limited by I/O fM A X . See Table 5–77 on page 5–67 for the maximum.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
5–93
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
External Memory Interface Specifications
External
Memory
Interface
Specifications
Tables 5–94 through 5–101 contain Stratix II device specifications for the
dedicated circuitry used for interfacing with external memory devices.
Table 5–94. DLL Frequency Range Specifications
Frequency Mode
Frequency Range
Resolution
(Degrees)
0
100 to 175
30
1
150 to 230
22.5
2
200 to 310
30
240 to 400 (–3 speed grade)
36
240 to 350 (–4 and –5 speed grades)
36
3
Table 5–95 lists the maximum delay in the fast timing model for the
Stratix II DQS delay buffer. Multiply the number of delay buffers that you
are using in the DQS logic block to get the maximum delay achievable in
your system. For example, if you implement a 90° phase shift at 200 MHz,
you use three delay buffers in mode 2. The maximum achievable delay
from the DQS block is then 3 × .416 ps = 1.248 ns.
Table 5–95. DQS Delay Buffer Maximum Delay in Fast Timing Model
Frequency Mode
Maximum Delay Per Delay Buffer
(Fast Timing Model)
Unit
0
0.833
ns
1, 2, 3
0.416
ns
Table 5–96. DQS Period Jitter Specifications for DLL-Delayed Clock
(tDQS_JITTER)
Note (1)
Number of DQS Delay Buffer
Stages (2)
Commercial
Industrial
Unit
1
80
110
ps
2
110
130
ps
3
130
180
ps
4
160
210
ps
Notes to Table 5–96:
(1)
(2)
Peak-to-peak period jitter on the phase shifted DQS clock.
Delay stages used for requested DQS phase shift are reported in your project’s
Compilation Report in the Quartus II software.
5–94
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–97. DQS Phase Jitter Specifications for DLL-Delayed Clock
(tDQS PHASE_JITTER) Note (1)
Number of DQS Delay
Buffer Stages (2)
DQS Phase Jitter
Unit
1
30
ps
2
60
ps
3
90
ps
4
120
ps
Notes to Table 5–97:
(1)
(2)
Peak-to-peak phase jitter on the phase shifted DDS clock (digital jitter is caused
by DLL tracking).
Delay stages used for requested DQS phase shift are reported in your project’s
Compilation Report in the Quartus II software.
Table 5–98. DQS Phase-Shift Error Specifications for DLL-Delayed Clock (tDQS_PSERR)
Number of DQS Delay Buffer Stages (2) –3 Speed Grade
(1)
–4 Speed Grade
–5 Speed Grade
Unit
1
25
30
35
ps
2
50
60
70
ps
3
75
90
105
ps
4
100
120
140
ps
Notes to Table 5–98:
(1)
(2)
This error specification is the absolute maximum and minimum error. For example, skew on three delay buffer
stages in a C3 speed grade is 75 ps or ± 37.5 ps.
Delay stages used for requested DQS phase shift are reported in your project’s Compilation Report in the
Quartus II software.
Table 5–99. DQS Bus Clock Skew Adder Specifications
(tDQS_CLOCK_SKEW_ADDER)
Mode
DQS Clock Skew Adder
Unit
×4 DQ per DQS
40
ps
×9 DQ per DQS
70
ps
×18 DQ per DQS
75
ps
×36 DQ per DQS
95
ps
Note to Table 5–99:
(1)
Altera Corporation
April 2011
This skew specification is the absolute maximum and minimum skew. For
example, skew on a ×4 DQ group is 40 ps or ±20 ps.
5–95
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
JTAG Timing Specifications
Table 5–100. DQS Phase Offset Delay Per Stage
Notes (1), (2), (3)
Speed Grade
Min
Max
Unit
-3
9
14
ps
-4
9
14
ps
-5
9
15
ps
Notes to Table 5–100:
(1)
(2)
(3)
The delay settings are linear.
The valid settings for phase offset are -64 to +63 for frequency mode 0 and -32 to
+31 for frequency modes 1, 2, and 3.
The typical value equals the average of the minimum and maximum values.
Table 5–101. DDIO Outputs Half-Period Jitter
Notes (1), (2)
Name
Description
Max
Unit
tO U T H A L F J I T T E R
Half-period jitter (PLL driving DDIO outputs)
200
ps
Notes to Table 5–101:
(1)
(2)
JTAG Timing
Specifications
The worst-case half period is equal to the ideal half period subtracted by the DCD
and half-period jitter values.
The half-period jitter was characterized using a PLL driving DDIO outputs.
Figure 5–10 shows the timing requirements for the JTAG signals.
Figure 5–10. Stratix II JTAG Waveforms
TMS
TDI
t JCP
t JCH
t JCL
t JPSU
t JPH
TCK
tJPZX
t JPCO
t JPXZ
TDO
5–96
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–102 shows the JTAG timing parameters and values for Stratix II
devices.
Table 5–102. Stratix II JTAG Timing Parameters & Values
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Max
Unit
tJCP
TCK clock period
30
ns
tJCH
TCK clock high time
13
ns
tJCL
TCK clock low time
13
ns
tJPSU
JTAG port setup time
3
ns
tJPH
JTAG port hold time
5
ns
tJPCO
JTAG port clock to output
tJPZX
tJPXZ
11 (1)
ns
JTAG port high impedance to valid output
14 (1)
ns
JTAG port valid output to high impedance
14 (1)
ns
Note to Table 5–102:
(1)
Document
Revision History
A 1 ns adder is required for each VC C I O voltage step down from 3.3 V. For
example, tJPCO = 12 ns if VC C I O of the TDO I/O bank = 2.5 V, or 13 ns if it equals
1.8 V.
Table 5–103 shows the revision history for this chapter.
Table 5–103. Document Revision History (Part 1 of 3)
Date and
Document
Version
Changes Made
Summary of Changes
April 2011, v4.5
Updated Table 5–3.
Added operating junction temperature
for military use.
July 2009, v4.4
Updated Table 5–92.
Updated the spread spectrum
modulation frequency (fS S ) from
(100 kHz–500 kHz) to
(30 kHz–150 kHz).
May 2007, v4.3
●
●
●
Updated RCONF in Table 5–4.
Updated fIN (min) in Table 5–92.
Updated fIN and fINPFD in Table 5–93.
Moved the Document Revision History section to the
end of the chapter.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
—
—
5–97
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Document Revision History
Table 5–103. Document Revision History (Part 2 of 3)
Date and
Document
Version
Changes Made
August, 2006,
v4.2
Updated Table 5–73, Table 5–75, Table 5–77,
Table 5–78, Table 5–79, Table 5–81, Table 5–85, and
Table 5–87.
April 2006, v4.1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Updated Table 5–3.
Updated Table 5–11.
Updated Figures 5–8 and 5–9.
Added parallel on-chip termination information to
“On-Chip Termination Specifications” section.
Updated Tables 5–28, 5–30,5–31, and 5–34.
Updated Table 5–78, Tables 5–81 through 5–90,
and Tables 5–92, 5–93, and 5–98.
Updated “PLL Timing Specifications” section.
Updated “External Memory Interface
Specifications” section.
Added Tables 5–95 and 5–101.
Updated “JTAG Timing Specifications” section,
including Figure 5–10 and Table 5–102.
Summary of Changes
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
December 2005,
v4.0
●
●
July 2005, v3.1
●
●
●
●
May 2005, v3.0
●
●
●
●
●
●
Changed 0.2 MHz to 2 MHz in
Table 5–93.
Added new spec for half period
jitter (Table 5–101).
Added support for PLL clock
switchover for industrial
temperature range.
Changed fI N P F D (min) spec from
4 MHz to 2 MHz in Table 5–92.
Fixed typo in tO U T J I T T E R
specification in Table 5–92.
Updated VD I F AC & DC max
specifications in Table 5–28.
Updated minimum values for tJ C H ,
tJ C L , and tJ P S U in Table 5–102.
Update maximum values for tJ P C O ,
tJ P Z X , and tJ P X Z in Table 5–102.
Updated “External Memory Interface
Specifications” section.
Updated timing numbers throughout chapter.
—
Updated HyperTransport technology information in
Table 5–13.
Updated “Timing Model” section.
Updated “PLL Timing Specifications” section.
Updated “External Memory Interface
Specifications” section.
—
Updated tables throughout chapter.
Updated “Power Consumption” section.
Added various tables.
Replaced “Maximum Input & Output Clock Rate”
section with “Maximum Input & Output Clock Toggle
Rate” section.
Added “Duty Cycle Distortion” section.
Added “External Memory Interface Specifications”
section.
—
March 2005,
v2.2
Updated tables in “Internal Timing Parameters”
section.
—
January 2005,
v2.1
Updated input rise and fall time.
—
5–98
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
DC & Switching Characteristics
Table 5–103. Document Revision History (Part 3 of 3)
Date and
Document
Version
January 2005,
v2.0
●
●
●
●
●
●
October 2004,
v1.2
●
July 2004, v1.1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
February 2004,
v1.0
Changes Made
Summary of Changes
Updated the “Power Consumption” section.
Added the “High-Speed I/O Specifications” and
“On-Chip Termination Specifications” sections.
Removed the ESD Protection Specifications
section.
Updated Tables 5–3 through 5–13, 5–16 through
5–18, 5–21, 5–35, 5–39, and 5–40.
Updated tables in “Timing Model” section.
Added Tables 5–30 and 5–31.
—
Updated Table 5–3.
Updated introduction text in the “PLL Timing
Specifications” section.
—
Re-organized chapter.
Added typical values and CO U T F B to Table 5–32.
Added undershoot specification to Note (4) for
Tables 5–1 through 5–9.
Added Note (1) to Tables 5–5 and 5–6.
Added VI D and VI C M to Table 5–10.
Added “I/O Timing Measurement Methodology”
section.
Added Table 5–72.
Updated Tables 5–1 through 5–2 and Tables 5–24
through 5–29.
—
Added document to the Stratix II Device Handbook.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
—
5–99
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Document Revision History
5–100
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Altera Corporation
April 2011
6. Reference & Ordering
Information
SII51006-2.2
Software
Stratix® II devices are supported by the Altera® Quartus® II design
software, which provides a comprehensive environment for system-on-aprogrammable-chip (SOPC) design. The Quartus II software includes
HDL and schematic design entry, compilation and logic synthesis, full
simulation and advanced timing analysis, SignalTap® II logic analyzer,
and device configuration. See the Quartus II Handbook for more
information on the Quartus II software features.
The Quartus II software supports the Windows XP/2000/NT/98, Sun
Solaris, Linux Red Hat v7.1 and HP-UX operating systems. It also
supports seamless integration with industry-leading EDA tools through
the NativeLink® interface.
Device Pin-Outs
Device pin-outs for Stratix II devices are available on the Altera web site
at (www.altera.com).
Ordering
Information
Figure 6–1 describes the ordering codes for Stratix II devices. For more
information on a specific package, refer to the Package Information for
Stratix II & Stratix II GX Devices chapter in volume 2 of the Stratix II Device
Handbook or the Stratix II GX Device Handbook.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
6–1
Document Revision History
Figure 6–1. Stratix II Device Packaging Ordering Information
EP2S
90
F
1508
C
7
ES
Family Signature
EP2S:
Optional Suffix
Stratix II
Indicates specific device options or
shipment method.
ES: Engineering sample
Device Type
15
30
60
90
130
180
Speed Grade
3, 4, or 5, with 3 being the fastest
Operating Temperature
C: Commercial temperature (tJ = 0° C to 85° C)
I: Industrial temperature (tJ = -40° C to 100° C)
Military temperature (tJ = -55° C to 125° C) (1)
Package Type
Pin Count
F: FineLine BGA
H: Hybrid FineLine BGA
Number of pins for a particular FineLine BGA package
Note to Figure 6–1:
(1)
Applicable to I4 devices. For more information, refer to the Stratix II Military Temperature Range Support technical
brief.
Document
Revision History
Table 6–1 shows the revision history for this chapter.
Table 6–1. Document Revision History
Date and
Document
Version
Changes Made
Summary of Changes
April 2011,
v2.2
Updated Figure 6–1.
May 2007,
v2.1
Moved the Document Revision History section to the end
of the chapter.
—
January
2005, v2.0
Contact information was removed.
—
October
2004, v1.1
Updated Figure 6–1.
—
February
2004, v1.0
Added document to the Stratix II Device Handbook.
—
6–2
Stratix II Device Handbook, Volume 1
Added operating junction temperature
for military use.
Altera Corporation
April 2011
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
